DCS F-16C Viper Guide

DCS GUIDE
F-16CM VIPER BLOCK 50

BY CHUCK
LAST UPDATED: 8/11/2020
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• PART 1 – INTRODUCTION
• PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP
• PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT
• PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE
• PART 5 – TAXI & TAKEOFF
• PART 6 – LANDING
• PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT
• PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS
• PART 9 – HOTAS
• PART 10 – RADAR & SENSORS
• PART 11 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT
• PART 12 – DEFENCE: RWR AND COUNTERMEASURES
• PART 13 – DATALINK & IFF
• PART 14 – RADIO TUTORIAL
• PART 15 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AUTOPILOT
• PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING
• PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
• PART 18 – OTHER RESOURCES
Special thanks to Paul "Goldwolf" Whittingham for creating the guide icons. 2
The F-16C Fighting Falcon (also nicknamed “Viper” by
its pilots) is a supersonic, single-engine, multi-role
combat aircraft developed by General Dynamics for
the United States Air Force (USAF). Designed as an air
VIPER
F-16C
superiority day fighter, it evolved into a successful all-

weather multirole aircraft. Over 4,600 aircraft have
been built since production was approved in 1976.
Experiences in the Vietnam War revealed the need

for air superiority fighters and better air-to-air
training for fighter pilots. From this need originated
the Lightweight Fighter (LWF) program. This program
was a United States Air Force technology evaluation
program initiated in the late 1960s by a group of
officers and defense analysts known as the "Fighter
Mafia". It was spurred by then-Major John
Boyd's 'energy-maneuverability' (E-M) theory, which
indicated that excessive weight would have severely
debilitating consequences on the maneuverability of
an aircraft. Boyd's design called for a light-weight
fighter with a high thrust-to-weight ratio, high
maneuverability, and a gross weight of less than
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION
20,000 lbs; half that of its counterpart, the McDonnell

Douglas F-15 Eagle.
In 1972, the Air Staff selected General Dynamics'

Model 401 and Northrop's P-600 for the prototype
development and testing phase. General Dynamics
and Northrop were awarded contracts worth
$37.9 million and $39.8 million to produce the YF-16
and YF-17, respectively, with first flights of both
prototypes planned for early 1974. Late in the
program, in 1974, with the promise of European
sales, the Air Force changed the program name to Air
Combat Fighter (ACF), and committed to purchasing
650 models of the YF-16, adopted as the F-16 Fighting
YF-16 aircraft and a YF-17 aircraft, side-by-side, by Air Force Camera Operator: R.L. House (1972)
Falcon. The YF-17, on the other hand, would
Reference: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lightweight_Fighter_program
eventually become the F/A-18 Hornet.
3
Increased interest turned the LWF into a serious acquisition program. North
Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) allies Belgium, Denmark, the Netherlands,
and Norway were seeking to replace their F-104G Starfighter fighter-bombers. In
early 1974, they reached an agreement with the U.S. that if the USAF ordered the
VIPER
F-16C
LWF winner, they would consider ordering it as well. The USAF also needed to
replace its F-105 Thunderchief and F-4 Phantom II fighter-bombers. The U.S.
Congress sought greater commonality in fighter procurements by the Air Force and
Navy, and in August 1974 redirected Navy funds to a new Navy Air Combat Fighter
(NACF) program that would be a navalized fighter-bomber variant of the LWF.
The four NATO allies had formed the "Multinational Fighter Program Group"
(MFPG) and pressed for a U.S. decision by December 1974; thus, the USAF
accelerated testing. To reflect this serious intent to procure a new fighter-bomber,
the LWF program was rolled into a new Air Combat Fighter (ACF) competition.
The ACF would not be a pure fighter, but multi-role, and Schlesinger made it clear
that any ACF order would be in addition to the F-15, which extinguished opposition
to the LWF. ACF also raised the stakes for GD and Northrop because it brought in
competitors intent on securing what was touted at the time as "the arms deal of
the century". These were Dassault-Breguet's proposed Mirage F1M-53, the Anglo-
French SEPECAT Jaguar, and the proposed Saab 37E "Eurofighter". Northrop
offered the P-530 Cobra, which was similar to the YF-17.
The Jaguar and Cobra were dropped by the MFPG early on, leaving two European
and the two U.S. candidates. On 11 September 1974, the U.S. Air Force confirmed
plans to order the winning ACF design to equip five tactical fighter wings. Though
computer modeling predicted a close contest, the YF-16 proved significantly
quicker going from one maneuver to the next, and was the unanimous choice of
those pilots that flew both aircraft.
On 13 January 1975, the YF-16 was announced as the winner of the ACF
competition. The chief reasons given were the YF-16's lower operating costs,
greater range, and maneuver performance that was "significantly better" than that
of the YF-17, especially at supersonic speeds. Another advantage of the YF-16 –
unlike the YF-17 – was its use of the Pratt & Whitney F100 turbofan engine, the
same powerplant used by the F-15; such commonality would lower the cost of
engines for both programs. Secretary McLucas announced that the USAF planned
to order at least 650, possibly up to 1,400 production F-16s.
4
The Fighting Falcon's key features include a frameless bubble canopy for better visibility, side-mounted control stick to ease control while maneuvering, an ejection seat reclined 30 degrees
from vertical to reduce the effect of g-forces on the pilot, and use of a relaxed static stability/fly-by-wire flight control system which helps to make it an agile aircraft. The F-16 was the first
fighter aircraft purpose-built to pull 9-g maneuvers and can reach a maximum speed of over Mach 2. Although the LWF program called for a structural life of 4,000 flight hours, capable of
achieving 7.33 g with 80% internal fuel; General Dynamics’ engineers decided to design the F-16's airframe life for 8,000 hours and for 9-g maneuvers on full internal fuel. This proved
VIPER
F-16C
advantageous when the aircraft's mission changed from solely air-to-air combat to multi-role operations.
5
One change made during production was augmented pitch control to avoid deep
stall conditions at high angles of attack. The stall issue had been raised during
development, but had originally been discounted. Model tests of the YF-16 conducted
by the Langley Research Center revealed a potential problem, but no other laboratory
VIPER
F-16C
was able to duplicate it. YF-16 flight tests were not sufficient to expose the issue; later
flight testing on the FSD (Full-Scale Development) aircraft demonstrated there was a
real concern. In response, the area of the horizontal stabilizer were increased by 25%
on the Block 15 aircraft in 1981 and later retrofitted to earlier aircraft. In addition, a
manual override switch to disable the horizontal stabilizer flight limiter was
prominently placed on the control console, allowing the pilot to regain control of the
horizontal stabilizers (which the flight limiters otherwise lock in place) and recover.
Besides reducing the risk of deep stalls, the larger horizontal tail also improved stability
and permitted faster takeoff rotation.
In the 1980s, the Multinational Staged Improvement Program (MSIP) was conducted to
evolve the F-16's capabilities, mitigate risks during technology development, and
ensure the aircraft's worth. The program upgraded the F-16 in three stages. The MSIP
process permitted the quick introduction of new capabilities, at lower costs and with
reduced risks compared to traditional independent upgrade programs. In 2012, the
USAF had allocated $2.8 billion to upgrade 350 F-16s while waiting for the F-35 to enter
service. One key upgrade has been an auto-GCAS (Ground collision avoidance system)
to reduce instances of controlled flight into terrain. Onboard power and cooling
capacities limit the scope of upgrades, which often involve the addition of more power-
hungry avionics.
Equipment-wise, early F-16s could be armed with up to six AIM-9 Sidewinder heat-
seeking short-range air-to-air missiles (AAM) by employing rail launchers on each
wingtip, as well as radar guided AIM-7 Sparrow medium-range AAMs in a weapons mix.
More recent versions support the AIM-120 AMRAAM and replaced the AIM-7. The
aircraft can carry various other AAMs, a wide variety of air-to-ground missiles, rockets
or bombs; electronic countermeasures (ECM), navigation, targeting or weapons pods;
and fuel tanks on 9 hardpoints – six under the wings, two on wingtips, and one under
the fuselage. Two other locations under the fuselage are available for sensor or radar
pods. The F-16 carries a 20 mm M61A1 Vulcan cannon for close range aerial
combat and strafing.
At the time, the Thrust-to-Weight ratio of the Viper was nothing short of revolutionary.
Check out this 1975 takeoff comparison between a F-16A and the F-4 Phantom in the
6
Netherlands: https://youtu.be/eyWqKT-AG9A?t=46
F-16s have participated in numerous conflicts, most of them in the Middle East. The Viper is one of the most successful export fighters ever built and has been operated by various air forces
around the world including the United States, Israel, South Korea, Pakistan, Taiwan, Greece, Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Italy, Poland, Portugal, Oman, Bahrain, Iraq, United
Arab Emirates, Turkey, Egypt, Jordan, Romania, Slovakia, Indonesia, Singapore, Thailand, Morocco, Venezuela, and Chile. Its popularity among operators is certainly not a sheer coincidence.
VIPER
F-16C
7
Note: In your controls, make sure you check your “Trim” controls since the default version of the game has your trim hat set to changing your view rather than
VIPER trim the aircraft. Since most of you are probably equipped with a TRACKIR already, I suggest you make sure the Trim Hat Switch is set up properly.
F-16C
To assign axis, click on Axis Assign. You can also

select “Axis Commands” in the upper scrolling
menu.
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP
To modify curves and sensitivities of axes, click

on the axis you want to modify and then click
on “Axis Tune”.
8
Bind the following axes:
• PITCH (DEADZONE AT 1, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 5)
VIPER
• ROLL (DEADZONE AT 1, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 5)

F-16C
• RUDDER (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)

• THRUST – CONTROLS ENGINE RPM
• RDR CURSOR SWITCH – X & Y AXIS
• ANT ELEV Knob
• WHEEL BRAKE LEFT / RIGHT
9
VIPER
WHAT YOU NEED MAPPED
F-16C
NWS A/R DISC MSL STEP Button (hidden Trim Switch – Nose DOWN
grey button on right hand side) Trim Switch – Right Wing DOWN
Trim Switch – Nose UP
Trim Switch – Left Wing DOWN DMS UP
DMS RIGHT
DMS DOWN
TMS UP DMS LEFT
Weapon
WPN Release
REL Button
TMS RIGHT
TMS DOWN
TMS LEFT
Camera/Gun Trigger
(Two Detents)
Countermeasures Management Sw - FWD

Countermeasures Management Sw – RIGHT

Countermeasures Management Sw – AFT
Chaff/Flare Dispense Button (Slap Switch)
Expand/FOV Button
Zoom In Slow: L_Shift+TMS UP

Zoom Out Slow: L_Shift+TMS DOWN
Paddle Switch - Depress
+ TOE BRAKES (MAPPED ON PEDALS) 10

VIPER
WHAT YOU NEED MAPPED
F-16C
Transmit Switch - UHF

Transmit Switch – IFF IN
S Transmit Switch - VHF ENABLE Switch (Enter)
S Transmit Switch – IFF OUT
RDR Cursor Switch – Y Axis
RDR Cursor Switch – X Axis
SPD BRK Switch – AFT/Extend
SPD BRK Switch – FWD/Retract

Dogfight Switch – MISSILE OVERRIDE/CENTER
UNCAGE Switch
Dogfight Switch – DOGFIGHT/CENTER
MAN RNG Knob – CCW (Zoom Out)

MAN RNG Knob – CW (Zoom In)
ANT ELEV Knob (Radar Antenna Elevation)
11
F-16C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT VIPER
12
F-16C
13
Environmental Sensor Pitot
In an emergency situation during the pilot escape initiation, the seat moves up the rails leaving the aircraft.
Pitot tubes on the top of the seat near the parachute container are exposed to the airstream. Pitot and
VIPER
Static pressure inputs to the environmental sensing unit act on the speed and altitude transducers to
F-16C
establish the safest mode for the pilot involved, based on the speed and altitude environment
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT
Magnetic Transmitter Unit

Used to generate a magnetic field used to
determine HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display)
position/orientation, which is used by the JHMCS
(Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System).
14
OBOGS (On-Board Oxygen Generating
Fire & Overheat System) BIT (Built-In Test) Switch
Detection Test Button
VIPER
F-16C
MAL & IND LTS (Malfunction & Indication Lights) Test Button
Tests the illumination of all warning, caution, indicator lights, the
Probe Heat & Test Switch warning horn and all voice messages in sequence
ON / OFF / TEST
FLCS PWR (Flight Control System Power) Test

Switch
Pronounced “Flickiss”, this switch is used to test the
flight control system after an engine start.
FLCS PWR Quadruple Indicator
• TEST: With the MAIN PWR switch in BATT it closes
Indicator of the 4 redundant digital
the FLCS relay and allows verification of power

systems (A, B, C & D) of the FLCS
output to the FLCC (Flight Control Computer) with
(Flight Control System).
the aircraft battery as the power source.
• NORM: Normal Operation Mode
• MAINT: Maintenance
Anti-G Test Button
EPU (Emergency Power Unit) Generator Test Switch

Tests the EPU generator and EPU PMG (Permanent Magnet
Generator) output to FLCS on the ground without using hydrazine.
15
Flight Control System (FLCS) RESET Switch
RESET/OFF
Allows the FLCS fault to be reset.
VIPER
F-16C
Leading Edge Flaps Switch Digital Backup (DBU) Switch

• LOCK: Leading Edge locked in current position. FLCS warning light Allowing the pilot to manually select a
illuminates and the PFLD reports a >FLCS LEF LOCK< warning backup software state of the FLCS
message
• AUTO: Leading Edge position is a function of Mach, altitude and
angle of attack Manual TF FLYUP Switch
Disable/Enable
Roll Trim Indicator (deg) Allows you to disable or enable FLYUP protection in
MANUAL TF (Terrain Following) mode. Only aircraft
fitted with the AN/AAQ-13 navigation pod (NVP), part of
Manual Roll Trim Wheel the LANTIRN (Low Altitude Navigation and Targeting
Left Wing Down: Left Infrared for Night) system, will have Terrain Following
Right Wing Down: RIght Radar (TFR) capability.
Manual Yaw Trim Knob

Alternate Flaps
Extend Switch
Flight Control System BIT (Built-In Test)

RUN and FAIL lights
Flight Control System BIT (Built-In Test) Switch

BIT/OFF
Performs the FLCS built in test if the weight on wheel switch is on. BIT takes
about 45 seconds, during which the RUN green indicator light is
Yaw Trim Indicator (deg) illuminated. During the BIT all flight control surfaces move in sequence
(these movements are visible in multiplayer). If the BIT is successful the
switch snaps back to the OFF position and the RUN light goes off.
Manual Pitch Trim Wheel Trim/AP Disc Switch

Nose Up: Aft NORM: Stick trims are energized and autopilot is possible
Nose Down: Fwd Pitch Trim Indicator (deg) DISC: Stick trims and autopilot are inhibited 16
Fuel Master Switch Tank Inerting Switch
Guarded in MASTER position. When placed in OFF Reduces internal tank pressurisation when ON.
the fuel shutoff valve is closed, preventing fuel
from reaching the engine. Air Refueling Door Control Switch
VIPER
F-16C
Open / Close
Also sets flight control gains to takeoff & landing mode
IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe)
Master Switch Engine Feed Selector Switch
Controls power to the IFF Controls the way the fuel is pumped to the engine. Note that the fuel goes to the
transponder/interrogator unit. engine by gravity feed, so the engine will not starve when the fuel pumps are
OFF. Use of the pumps prevents fuel starvation during negative G maneuvers
and allows manual fuel balance whenever necessary.
• OFF - all fuel pumps are off.
IFF Enable Switch • NORM - all pumps are on, the CG (Centre of Gravity) is maintained
• M3/MS automatically.
• OFF • AFT - aft pumps are on. Fuel is transferred from the AFT tank to the engine.
• M1/M3 The CG moves forward.
• FWD – forward pumps are on. Fuel is transferred from the FWD tank to the
engine. CG moves back.
C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and Identification) Switch

Allows the pilot to toggle between the BACKUP system and the UFC (Up Front Controller).
BACKUP is only used if engine generator failure has occurred.
IFF Mode 4 Code Switch

IFF Mode 1 Zero / A/B / Hold
Selector Switches
IFF Mode 3
Selector Switches IFF Mode 4 Monitor Switch
Audio/Out
IFF Mode 4 Reply Switch

B / A / Out
17
VIPER
F-16C
Anti-Collision Lights Switch

• OFF
• 1 / 2 / 3 / 4: Flash pattern settings per cycle (“4”
flashes 4 times per cycle, “1” cycles 1 time per cycle…
this can be used to recognize wingmen if members of a
flight use specific settings)
• A / B / C: Advanced flash pattern settings, which
depends on Power Supply Setting set by the ground
crew
Position Lights Switch

Flash / Steady
Wing/Tail Position Lights Switch

Bright/OFF/Dim
Formation Lights
Fuselage Lights Switch
Brightness Control Knob
Bright/OFF/Dim
Master Lights Switch Aerial Refueling Light Brightness Control Knob

• OFF
• COVERT ALL: All lights flash with covert strobes
• COVERT A-C: Anti-Collision lights flash set pattern (A through C) with
covert strobes
• COVERT FORM: Formation lights flash set pattern with covert strobes 18
• NORM: All lights flash set pattern with visible strobes
Canopy Defogging Lever
AFT: Min
FWD: Max
Canopy Jettison T-Handle
VIPER
F-16C
Manual Canopy Crank
19
EPU (Emergency Power Unit) Switch EPU RUN Light
The EPU is a hydrazine-powered, self-contained unit that can provide • Illuminates when the EPU turbine runs within the proper
emergency hydraulic and electrical power, when just bleed air is not range and the EPU hydraulic pressure is above 2000 psi
VIPER
F-16C
enough, for about 10 to 15 minutes. You would most often use this if
you lose your engine, and the EPU would provide power to the
hydraulic and electrical systems. In a way, it’s like a very limited EPU Hydrazine/Air Light
Auxiliary Power Unit, or APU. • AIR light illuminates when the EPU is engaged and
running on engine bleed air and not Hydrazine.
The main requirements for the EPU are that it should be simple, • HYDRAZINE light illuminates when hydrazine is used to
maintenance free, supply power immediately and consistently for power the turbine.
the required time. Use of Hydrazine assures this while requiring
careful handling, but it is very toxic and inflammable.
Main Power Switch
• FWD: MAIN (MAIN generator and standby
generator provide power to the aircraft
systems )
• MID: BATT (aircraft battery is connected and

CAUTION Reset Button the battery bus is powered)
Resets an ELEC fault, displayed as the • AFT: OFF
amber ELEC SYS caution light.
FLCS (Flight Control System) PMG Indicator
When illuminated, none of the FLCS branches are receiving
TO FLCS (Flight Control System) Indicator power from the FLCS PMG (Permanent Magnet Generator)
When illuminated, battery power is going to one
or more FLCS branches. Basically the battery is MAIN GEN Indicator
powering the FLCS and will deplete fast. When illuminated, the main generator is not connected to
the non-essential AC buses
STBY GEN Indicator

FLCS RLY (Relay) Indicator When illuminated, the standby generator power is not available
When illuminated, one or more FLCS branches
aren’t getting adequate voltage (at least 20 EPU GEN Indicator
Volts) from the battery . When illuminated, EPU has been commanded ON but the EPU generator is not
providing power to the emergency buses. Be aware that the light does not function
with the EPU in OFF (Weight On Wheel ON) and the engine running.
ACFT BATT FAIL Indicator
When illuminated, indicates there is less than 20 EPU PMG Indicator
volts in the battery when airborne or a battery When illuminated, EPU has been commanded ON but the EPU is unable to provide
failure occured on the ground.
20
power to the FLCS branches (normally through the EPU Permanent Magnet Generator).
VIPER
F-16C
ECM Panel Dim

Button
ECM (Electronic Countermeasures)

Jammer Switch
OPR: Operate
STBY: Standby
OFF
ECM XMIT (Transmit) Switch Seat Harness Lock Lever

FWD: Locked
ECM Reset Button

ECM Control Buttons
AVTR (Airborne Video Tape Recorder) Video

Selector Switch Emergency Oxygen
• HUD (Heads-Up Display): Records HUD and MFDs Bottle Handle
(Multifunction Display)
• HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display): Records HMD and
MFDs (Multifunction Display)
Video Recorder Switch
Event Marker / Record / Unthread (OFF)
ECM BIT (Built-In Test) Button
21
Throttle Cutoff Release
VIPER
F-16C
Pressed by using “RSHIFT+HOME” (throttle goes to IDLE) or

“RSHIFT+END” (throttle goes to OFF)
Communications UHF/VHF
Transmit Switch (4-Way)
MAN RNG/UNCAGE Knob/Switch

Can be rotated or depressed
Dogfight Switch
3-Position switch, Slide
Radar Antenna
Elevation Knob
Rotates, Center Detent
Throttle
Radar Cursor/Enable Switch Speed Brake Switch

Depress, Multidirectional 3-Position, Aft Momentary 22
VIPER
F-16C
MAX AB
(Afterburner) Detent
Throttle Stripe
Indicates Throttle Position
on Quadrant
OFF Detent
MIL (Military)
IDLE Detent
Power Detent
BUC IDLE Detent (only functional on the F-16A) AB (Afterburner) Detent

The backup control (BUC) for the DEEC (Digital
Electronic Engine Control) system was a simple
hydromechanical system provided in the event a
major malfunction occurs in the DEEC.
23
VIPER Mechanical Gate
F-16C
Throttle Stripe
Throttle Stripe
Indicates Throttle Position
on Quadrant
Between IDLE and MIL
OFF
The geometry of the throttle quadrant means that depending on

the position on the throttle on the quadrant, the orientation of
the throttle must be varied to access certain power detents. As
an example, the throttle must be angled up to go from the OFF
to the IDLE detent due to the mechanical gate. The throttle must
also be angled to go in the AB detent range.
Afterburner ON 24
VIPER
F-16C
Audio 1 Control Panel

Controls the primary communication systems.
Secure Voice Knob

(Inoperative)
COMM 1 (UHF) Radio Power Knob
MSL (AIM-9 Missile) Tone
COMM 2 (VHF) Radio Power Knob Volume Control Knob
COMM 1 (UHF) Radio Mode Knob TF Tone Control Knob (Inoperative)

OFF / Squelch / Guard Frequency
THREAT (TWS, Threat Warning

System) Tone Control Knob
Intercom Volume
Control Knob HOT MIC CIPHER Switch
HOT MIC / OFF / CIPHER
COMM 2 (VHF) Radio Mode Knob

OFF / Squelch / Guard Frequency Audio 2 Control Panel
Provides control to the less frequently used
ILS (Instrument Landing communications system. 25
TACAN Power Knob
System) Power Knob
UHF (COMM 1) Radio Backup Control Panel
While most of your radio use will be through the integrated control panel,
UHF Radio Preset or ICP, and data entry display, or DED, on the instrument panel, a backup
Frequency Placard UHF radio control head is also available and must be used before engine
VIPER
start as it’s the sole radio that functions on battery power. This includes a
F-16C
door with the preset channel entry button behind it with the selected preset
channel to the right of the door. To the right of that is the knob to select a
UHF Radio Manual preset channel.
Frequency Indicator
UHF Radio Preset
Channel Indicator
UHF Radio Test

UHF Radio Preset
Display Button
Channel Selector Knob
UHF Radio Manual
Frequency Selectors
UHF Radio Status Button
UHF Radio Function Knob

OFF / Main / Both / ADF
(Automatic Direction Finder)
UHF Radio Mode Knob
UHF Radio Tone Button • MNL: Manual Frequency For the UHF backup radio to operate, the C&I switch
Functions related to anti-jam on the IFF (or AUX COMM) panel needs to be in the
• PRESET: Preset Frequency
frequency hopping BACKUP position.
• GRD: Guard Frequency
UHF Radio
UHF Radio Volume Control Knob Squelch Switch 26
Chaff/Flare Slap Button
Dispenses Chaff & Flare. This is a pushbutton programmed
to drop countermeasures Program No. 5. This gives you a
third countermeasures program immediately available
VIPER
without switching the PGRM knob on the CMDS.

F-16C
Throttle
JFS (Jet Fuel Starter) RUN Light

Illuminates within 30 seconds after initiating JFS start
to indicate that the JFS has attained governed speed.
Manual Pitch Override Switch

In case of a deep stall departure, the pitch

override switch allows you to command greater
authority from the stabs to help get the nose
Throttle Friction Wheel pointed downhill so you can pick up speed for
controlled flight.
JFS (Jet Fuel Starter) Switch

• OFF: Normal switch position. The JFS can be shut down at anytime by selecting OFF. The
switch returns to OFF automatically during a normal ground start at approx. 55 % RPM.
• START 1: Vents one of the brake/JFS accumulators to the hydraulic start motor.
• START 2: Vents both brake/JFS accumulators to the hydraulic start motor.
ENG CONT (Engine Control) Switch

• PRI: Primary Mode provides unrestricted engine operation throughout the entire flight envelope.
• SEC: Secondary Mode provides 70 to 80 % of normal MIL thrust. This level provides a measure of
protection against exceeding engine operating limits and provides sufficient thrust for safe flight
operations. Afterburner is inhibited.
AB (Afterburner) Reset Switch

Max Power Switch • AB RESET: Attempts to clear DEEC (Digital Electronic Engine Control) faults
Inoperative for F110-GE-129 engine • NORM: Normal (de-energized) position 27
• ENG DATA: Records engine data in the EDU (Engine Diagnostic Unit)
VIPER
F-16C
Canopy Control Switch

Canopy Switch Spider Guard

Canopy Switch Spider Shown: Guarded/Closed
Guard
Shown: Unguarded/Open
28
RWR SEARCH Control Button & Indicator
Allows ‘S’ search radar symbols to be displayed on the RWR
display if the EWS is powered and detects a search radar; by
default they are not. With SEARCH enabled a SAM radar in search
VIPER
mode will display as an ‘S’, well before you would expect to see its
F-16C
acquisition symbol if SEARCH was not enabled, giving you an early

warning in most cases.
Speed Brake Indicator

• Nine Dots (As Shown): Deployed
• Stripped Lines: Power OFF
• CLOSED: Retracted
RWR LOW ALTITUDE Control Button &
Indicator
• LOW: Priority to dangerous threats in low
altitude. When no LOW light is displayed, priority
is given to dangerous threats at high altitude.
• ALT: EWS (Electronic Warfare System) suite is

powered RWR ACT/PWR Indicator
• ACTIVITY: EWS (Electronic Warfare System) is
powered and detects a radar painting the aircraft.
• POWER: EWS (Electronic Warfare System) suite is
powered
Alternate Landing Gear Lever
RWR Dimming Control Knob
RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)

Indicator Control Power Button
29
VIPER
F-16C
Source Switch
GO / NO GO CMDS Status Light
Enables RWR data to be used by CMDS
(Countermeasures Dispensing System) for DISPENSE READY CMDS Status Light
dispensing in the SEMI or AUTO modes. Displayed when manual consent is required to dispense
countermeasures in the SEMI or AUTO mode.
JMR (Jammer) Source Switch

Expendable Category Power Switches &
Enables Jammer data to be used by CMDS
(Countermeasures Dispensing System) for Quantity Indicators
dispensing in the SEMI or AUTO modes. • O1: Not available on this F-16 variant.
• O2: Not available on this F-16 variant.
• CH: Chaff
• FL: Flares
Note: LO is displayed when quantity is low.
CMDS (Countermeasures Dispensing System) Mode Knob

• OFF
• STANDBY: release parameters and programming can be manually
MWS (Missile Warning System) changed using the UFC. It is the only mode allowing reprogramming.
Switch The CMDS cannot release countermeasures in this mode.
Not functional on Block 50 variant. • MAN: selected manual program may be dispensed by positioning the
CMS forward on the stick
• SEMI (Semi-Automatic): aircraft systems determine the program to be
Countermeasures Jettison Switch dispensed based on the threat. Consent to dispense must be given by
Jettisons countermeasures when position is set to positioning the CMS aft on the stick.
JETT (UP). Functions even when CMDS is turned OFF. • AUTO: aircraft systems determine the program to be dispensed based
on the threat. Countermeasures are dispensed automatically. This mode
must also be enabled by positioning the CMS aft on the stick. It may be
Countermeasures PRGM (Program) Selector Knob
disabled by selecting CMS right.
There are a total of 6 programs but only 1 – 4 can be selected
• BYP (Bypass): allows manual dispensing of countermeasures when
through the PRGM knob. PRG 5 is always activated by the slap
failures prevent the other modes from working.
switch on the left sidewall, while PRG 6 is the Bypass Program. HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing
The first 5 programs can be programmed through DTC, or the System) Symbology Brightness Knob 30
UFC whenever the CMDS mode in is STBY.
Landing Gear Indicator Lights
Green Lights: Gears are down and locked
Emergency Stores Jettison Button
VIPER
F-16C
Arresting Hook Switch

UP / DOWN
GND JETT (Ground Jettison)
Switch
• UP: Enables ordnance jettison while
aircraft is on the ground. Landing Gear Lever Note:
• DOWN: OFF • Handle is locked in the up position to prevent inadvertent
lowering of the gear. To lower the gear the pilot has to depress
STORES CONFIG (Stores Configuration) Switch the white pushbutton located on the landing gear handle.
Used to limit FLCS (Flight Control System) gains/limits
based on the stores configuration.
• CAT I: Used for air-to-air loadouts. Landing Gear Lever
• CAT III: Used for heavier air-to-ground loadouts or • A red warning light in the top of the handle illuminates when the
gas-heavy configurations. FLCS limits the angle of landing gear and doors are in transit or have failed to lock in
attack and onset rates in order to increase position.
departure resistance. • The red light also comes on below 10000 feet when all landing
gears are not down and locked, airspeed is less than 190 knots
and rate of descent is greater than 250 feet per minute.
Brakes Channel Selector

Toe brakes can be initiated by either electrical channel 1 or 2, Landing Gear Down Lock Release Button
which also operate the brake hydraulic valves. You will
normally keep this set to channel 1.
Parking Brake / Anti-Skid Switch
• UP: Parking Brake Mode ON holds the aircraft stationary without the use of toe brakes.
Landing Gear Horn Silencer Button The parking brakes are automatically de-energized when the throttle handle moves one
Turns OFF the audio horn when you get inch past the IDLE detent. The parking brakes disengage automatically above 80% RPM.
below 190 knots, below 10,000 feet, There is no parking brake status indicator aside from the position of the switch.
trailing flaps extended, and the landing • MIDDLE: Anti-Skid Mode ON.
gear is not down and locked. • DOWN: OFF
Note:
Landing & Taxi Lights Switch Considering that a lightly loaded jet can move at idle power, the parking brake can
• UP: Landing also be used for emergency braking if the toe brakes are inoperative. The parking
• MIDDLE: OFF brake is powered by battery bus No. 2 and system B hydraulics or one brake/JFS
• DOWN: Taxi accumulator (the brake/JFS accumulator which is not used for START 1). 31
RF (Radio Frequency) Switch
Allows you to control emissions from your aircraft.
• NORM: all electronic signals for the aircraft are enabled
• QUIET: radar, TACAN, and data link transmit but all other
VIPER
F-16C
emissions are inhibited.

• SILENT: all electronic signals for the aircraft are disabled, and
include the radar, radar altimeter, data link, TACAN transmit, and
ECM.
ECM Enable Light

Illuminates when ECM (Electronic
Laser Arm Switch Countermeasures) is transmitting.
Master Arm Switch ALT (Alternate) Release Button

• UP: Master Arm ON Functions as a back-up to the weapons release

• OFF button on the control stick in case of malfunction.
• DOWN: Simulate (Training) Mode.
ADV (Terrain Avoidance) Mode Switch &

Indicator Lights (Not functional on F-16 Block 50)
Autopilot Roll Mode Switch
• HDG SEL (Heading Select) Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch
• ATT HOLD (Attitude Hold) • ALT HOLD (Altitude Hold)
• STRG SEL (Steering to selected steer point in • A/P OFF (Autopilot OFF)
the DED, Data Entry Display) • ATT HOLD (Attitude Hold)
32
AOA (Angle of Attack) Indexer
• Top (Red) light: AOA is above 14° (on speed AOA too slow).
• Center (Green doughnut) light: AOA is between 11 and 14° (13° = on speed AOA for landing).
• Bottom (Yellow) light: AOA is below 11° (on speed AOA too fast for approach).
VIPER
F-16C
AOA (Angle of Attack) Indexer Brightness Control Lever
Master Caution Light (Push to Reset)
Eyebrow Lights
TF FAIL Light
Indicates Terrain Following Radar Failure.
F-ACK (Fault Acknowledge) Light

When a fault appears on the Pilot Fault List
Display, or PFLD, the fault acknowledge
button is pressed to clear the fault.
IFF IDENT (Identify-Friend-or-Foe

Identification) Light
Pressing the IFF identification button initiates an
IFF response to an interrogation or request from air
traffic control. 33
RWR Mode Selector Button
• PRIORITY: only shows the five highest threats
RWR Control HANDOFF Button • OPEN: display the 16 highest priority threats ALR-56M TWA (Threat Warning Azimuth) Indicator
VIPER
F-16C
Also known as RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
RWR MISSILE LAUNCH Light

Illuminates when a radar missile
launch is detected
RWR T (Target Separation) Button

Separates symbols that cover each other on the
azimuth indicator; the symbol with the highest
RWR UNKNOWN SHIP Toggle Switch threat priority remains in the right place.
Toggles display of emitter symbols of
unknown weapon systems on and off. RWR System Test Button
34
Boresight Cross
Pitch Ladder (deg)
HUD (Heads-Up Display)
Flight Path Marker
VIPER
F-16C
Steerpoint Steering Cue

Horizon Line
Acceleration (G) Barometric Altitude (ft AMSL,

Above Mean Sea Level)
Radar Altitude (ft AGL, Above Ground Level)

Steerpoint Symbol
Altitude Low Setting (ft)
Airspeed (kts)
Range Provider / Slant Range (nm)

• F: FCS (Fire Control System) is providing range
Master Arm Status
• R: Radar Altimeter is providing range
• B: Range computed using steerpoint
Mach elevation/barometric elevation
• T: Targeting Pod is providing passive range
Peak (Maximum) Aircraft G • L: Targeting Pod laser is firing and being used
TTG (Time to Go)

Master Mode Selected
Distance to Steerpoint (nm) > Steerpoint Number Selected
Bearing from Bullseye
to Aircraft
EGI (Embedded INS/GPS)
Distance from Bullseye Magnetic Heading
to Aircraft (nm) Roll Bank Angle Indicator
35
VIPER
F-16C
AVTR (Airborne Video Tape

Recorder) Camera
Records HUD (Heads-Up Display). Used for
mission debrief.
36
HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing HUD (Heads-Up Display)
System) Symbology Brightness Knob
VIPER
F-16C
Helmet Heading
HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System)
Note:
Night Vision Goggles and HMCS are mutually exclusive
helmet-mounted devices; you can only equip one or the
37
other. You can select what to equip via Ground Crew request.
ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
Also referred as UFC (Upfront Control)
VIPER
F-16C
DED (Data Entry Display)

MFD (Multifunction Display)

38
COM1 (UHF Radio), COM2 (VHF Radio), IFF (Identify-
Friend-or-Foe) and LIST Override Buttons A-A (Air-to-Air) and A-G (Air-to-
Ground) Master Mode Buttons
VIPER
F-16C
Reticle Depression Control Wheel

Used for Backup Bombing Mode
HUD Symbology Intensity Wheel

FLIR Polarity Button (WX)

ICP Keypad &
Priority Function Buttons FLIR Increment/Decrement Switch
HUD Raster Contrast Wheel
HUD Raster Brightness Wheel

FLIR Gain/Level Switch
GAIN/LEVEL/AUTO
Increment/Decrement Switch Drift Cutout / Warning Reset Switch
Increases or decreases values for the field • DRIFT C/O: Maintains Flight Path Marker in the
DCS (Data Control Switch, also nicknamed “Dobber”)
selected on the current DED page. Values that center of the HUD regardless of wind drift
• Used to move the asterisk on DED pages, sequence through
can be increased or decreased are identified by • NORM: Normal mode, used before landing
different data fields, toggle wind data on the CNI page, and
an up and down arrow next to them on the • WARN RESET: resets the HUD WARN message
return to the CNI page from other pages
display. The DCS is used to cycle between
• Positions: UP/DOWN/RETURN (LEFT)/SEQUENCE (RIGHT)
available fields. 39
Priority Function Pages LIST Sub-Pages
T-ILS: TACAN and ILS (Instrument Landing System) DEST (Destination): Allows changing
Settings coordinates of Steerpoints
VIPER
F-16C
ALOW: Altitude Low Page, settings for altitude BNGO (BINGO): input for Joker/Bingo fuel.
advisory system
VIP: Visual Initial Point page
STPT: Navigation Steerpoint information.
INTG: Interrogator Settings Page
CRUS: Cruise page provides 4 sub-modes: TOS (Time
Over Steerpoint), RNG (Range), HOME and EDR
(Endurance). Page gives information for navigation, NAV: Accuracy of navigation system (drift)
time and fuel while cruising.
MAN: Adjusts gun EEGS (Enhanced Envelope
TIME: allows the pilot to set a HACK timer and a Gun Sight) funnel width manual setting for
DELTA TOS for ROLEX calls. cannon firing.
MARK: creates markpoints INS: Inertial Navigation System page

MISC Sub-Pages
FIX: Navigation Fix page. DLNK: Datalink page CORR: Correction page
ACAL: Altitude Calibration page. CMDS: Countermeasures Dispenser System MAGV: Magnetic Variation at this aircraft location.
page
MODE: Allows an alternate way of changing OFP: Operational Flight Program page
Master Mode without using the ICP A-A or A-G
Override Button Pages buttons. INSM: Inertial Navigation System Memory page
CNI (Communication, Navigation & Identification) VRP: Visual Reference Point page
LASR: Laser System page (used to set Targeting Pod and Laser Spot
COM1 – UHF Radio 1 Tracker laser codes and modes)
MISC (Miscellaneous): Access to
additional sub-pages GPS: Displays information on the Global Positioning System
COM2 – VHF Radio 2
DRNG: Not Simulated
IFF – Identify-Friend-or-Foe
BULL: Bullseye reference point information.
LIST: Access to additional sub-pages
HARM: AGM-88 High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missile settings
40
1 2
DED Pages – Priority Functions
RCL (Recall) Button
VIPER
F-16C
Depress this button once to erase the last digit that

ICP Keypad &
was entered, i.e. backspace key. Depress it a
Priority Function Buttons second time to restore the originally entered value.
T-ILS (TACAN-ILS) DED page ALOW (Altitude Low) DED page
4 5
STPT (Steerpoint) DED page CRUS (Cruise) DED page
6 7
ENTR (Enter) Button

Enters the numbers typed into
a field with the keyboard
DCS (Data Control TIME DED page MARK (Markpoint) DED page
Switch, or “Dobber”)
8 9
Note 1:
Priority functions are accessed by pressing the ICP Keypad Priority Function Buttons. As an example,
button “1” is for the T-ILS page, button “2” is for the ALOW page, etc.
Use the DCS (Data Control Switch, or “Dobber”) LEFT to return (RTN) to the main CNI
(Communications, Navigation & Identification) DED page.
Note 2 (very important): FIX (Navigation Fix) DED page ACAL (Altitude Calibration) DED page
To set the Dobber switch in a certain direction, left click on either the arrows above and below the 41
switch, or on the “RTN” and “SEQ” text to the left and right of the switch.
DED Pages – OVERRIDE Buttons
Note:
COM1, COM2, IFF and LIST Override Buttons A-A (Air-to-Air) & A-G (Air-to- OVERRIDE pages are accessed by pressing the COM1, COM2, IFF or
VIPER
F-16C
Ground) Master Mode Buttons LIST Override Buttons on the ICP.
DCS RTN COM1

CNI (Communications, Navigation & COM1 (UHF Radio) DED page

Identification) DED page
Accessed by toggling DCS (Data Control Switch)
to RTN (Return)
COM2 IFF
DCS (Data Control Switch,
or “Dobber”)
LIST DED page

Allows access to multiple sub-menus (see next page)
LIST
COM2 (VHF Radio) DED page IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) DED page
42
1 2 3
DED Pages – LIST Sub-Pages
VIPER
F-16C
LIST Override Button

ICP Keypad BINGO Sub-Page VIP (Visual Initial Point) Sub-Page
DEST (Destination) Sub-Page
RCL 4 5
SCAN INTG (Interrogator) Sub-Page NAV (Navigation) Sub-Page MAN (Manual Setting) Sub-Page
6 ENTR 7
LIST DED page

Allows access to multiple sub-menus. Press the LIST INS (Inertial Navigation System) DLNK (Datalink) Sub-Page CMDS (Countermeasures) Sub-Page
override button, then select desired LIST sub-page with
Sub-Page
the buttons on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) keypad.
8 9 0
MODE Sub-Page VRP (Visual Reference Point) MISC (Miscellaneous) Sub-Page

Sub-Page 43
1 2 3
DED Pages – LIST Sub-Pages
MISC Pages
VIPER
F-16C
LIST Override Button

ICP Keypad CORR (Correction) Sub-Page MAGV (Magnetic Variation) OFP (Operational Flight Program)
Sub-Page Sub-Page
4 5 6
INSM (Inertial Navigation System LASR (Laser System) Sub-Page GPS Sub-Page
Memory) Sub-Page
MISC DED page (LIST Sub-page)

Allows access to multiple sub-menus. Press the LIST
override button, then select MISC LIST sub-page with “0 7 8 0
M-SEL” button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
keypad. From there, you can select the desired MISC sub-
menu with the ICP keypad.
DRNG Sub-Page BULL (Bullseye) Sub-Page HARM (High-Speed Anti-Radiation

Missile) Sub-Page
44
OSB (Option Select Button)
VIPER MFD Gain Rocker Switch
F-16C
MFD Symbology Brightness

Rocker Switch
Main MFD Menu
Saved MFD Pages

Highlighted in White
when selected
SWAP is used to swap

left and right MFDs.
Note 1:
The three lower OSBs are Direct Access (DA) buttons (in pink) and provide direct access to the saved
MFD displays according to master mode. Up to three pages for each MFD may be assigned to the DA
buttons for each master mode. These pages are toggled by pressing the corresponding direct access OSB
button or they can be cycled even faster with the HOTAS buttons: DMS right for the right MFD and DMS
left for the left MFD.
Note 2:
To access a specific MFD page, press on one of these three OSBs once, then select desired page with its
respective OSB (shown in blue) from the Main Menu page.
DCLT is used to declutter
Note 3:
MFD Brightness Rocker Switch You cannot have the same page displayed on both MFDs at the same time, so if you try to display the
MFD Contrast Rocker Switch FCR on the right MFD while it is already being displayed on the left MFD the FCR will simply
45 be taken
from the left MFD leaving an empty DA slot where it was originally assigned.
VIPER
F-16C
FCR Page Selected
HSD Page Selected

FCR TEST DTE SMS HSD FLCS
Saved but not

displayed on MFD Displayed on MFD
Displayed on MFD Saved but not displayed on MFD
LEFT MFD RIGHT MFD
DMS (Display Management Switch)

DMS left cycles pages for the left MFD
DMS right cycles pages for the right MFD
46
MFD (Multifunction Display) Pages
FCR: The Fire Control Radar is basically the radar SMS: The Stores Management System page will be
VIPER
display. different depending on the Master Mode you are in

F-16C
when it is selected (NAV, A-A, A-G or S-J).

TGP: Targeting Pod page. HSD: Horizontal Situation Display page is used for
navigation.
WPN: Weapon Sensor page, used for AGM-65 DTE: Data Transfer Equipment page is used to load
Maverick and AGM-88 HARM sensor feed. the Data Cartridge prepared during mission planning
in into the aircraft computer. Loading is done (usually
at ramp start right after or just before switching the
CNI to UFC) by depressing OSB (Option Select
Button) next to LOAD.
TFR: Terrain Following Radar page. TFR is only TEST: Test page shows multiple BITs (Built-In Tests)
available on F-16s carrying an AN/AAQ-13 LANTIRN

navigation pod (on the left chin station). The TFR is a
short range (36000ft) forward and down radar that
allows you to follow the terrain at very low altitude
with automatic fly up protection.
FLIR: The FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared) page is FLCS: Flight Control System page.
only available on F-16s carrying an AN/AAQ-13
LANTIRN navigation pod (on the left chin station).
The FLIR is a forward looking infrared camera used
for low level night navigation. The FLIR is housed in
the navigation pod of the LANTIRN system mounted
alongside the TFR system.
BLANK: Turns off the MFD. Can be helpful when you RCCE: Reconnaissance page that interfaces with
need only one MFD page active from the Direct Reconnaissance pods.
Access row for a specific Master Mode.
HAD: HARM Attack Display page is used for operating RESET: Not simulated.
the AGM-88 HARM (High-Speed Anti-Radiation
Missile) missile. 47
VIPER
F-16C
FCR (Fire Control Radar) Page TGP (Targeting Pod) Page WPN (Weapon) Page
SMS (Stores Management Set) Page HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) Page 48 Page
DTE (Data Transfer Equipment)
VIPER
F-16C
TEST Page FLCS (Flight Control System) Page BLANK Page
TFR FLIR HAD

PLACEHOLDER PLACEHOLDER PLACEHOLDER
(only available on F-16s carrying an (only available on F-16s carrying an
AN/AAQ-13 LANTIRN navigation pod) AN/AAQ-13 LANTIRN navigation pod)
49
TFR (Terrain Following Radar) Page FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared) Page HAD (HARM Attack Display) Page
VIPER
F-16C
RCCE
PLACEHOLDER
RCCE (Reconnaissance) Page
RESET
PLACEHOLDER
50
RESET Page
Primary vs Standby Indications
The HUD in all C-model Vipers is certified as a primary flight
VIPER
F-16C
reference. However, it is not allowed to be used to recover from

unusual attitudes while flying at night or in IMC (Instrument
Meteorological Conditions). Most indications on the central HUD (Heads-Up Display)
console can be used as primary indications as well.
Standby Indications
51
VIPER Barometric Pressure Setting Control Knob
F-16C
VNE (Not to Exceed Speed)

Servo-Pneumatic Altimeter (ft)
Indicator (red triangle)
Altimeter Barometric Pressure

Setting Indicator (in Hg)
Airspeed Bug (green triangle,
set by the Bug Setting Knob)
Altimeter Mode Switch
Three-position switch, springloaded to return from RESET. In the

Mach Indicator ELECT (primary, left position) operating mode, the altimeter is
electrically driven by the CADC (Central Air Data Computer). In the
Airspeed Indicator (kts) PNEU (secondary, right position) operating mode, the altimeter is
pneumatically operated by static pressure supplied by the pitot-
static system. Should the CADC or altimeter servo malfunction, the
Airspeed Indicator Bug Setting Knob altimeter automatically reverts to the pneumatic mode and the
PNEU flag appears on the face of the altimeter. The PNEU flag
may also appear when accelerating or decelerating through the
transonic region or while performing high g maneuvers.
AOA (Angle of Attack)

Indicator (deg)
VVI (Vertical Velocity Indicator)
(x1000 ft/min)
ADI (Attitude Direction Indicator)

Pitch Trim Knob
Used to center the instrument along the fixed
Slip Indicator horizontal reference (according to the seating 52
position of the pilot.
Current Heading (Lubber Line)
EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator) Course Setting
Aircraft Symbol
VIPER
F-16C
MRK BCN (Marker Beacon) Light
Range Indicator (nm) Course Deviation Scale
Course Pointer Fuel Quantity Selector Knob

• TEST: places both pointers at 2000 lbs, and
Bearing Pointer totalizer should display 6000 lbs
• NORM: AL pointer indicates remaining fuel in
Heading Bug the aft left reservoir and the A-1 fuselage tank,
and the FR pointer indicates the sum fuel in the
forward right reservoir tank and the F-1 and F-
2 fuselage tanks.
Course Deviation Line • RSVR: moves the AF and FR pointers to display
fuel in the aft and forward reservoir tanks
Heading Bug • INT WING: Indicates quantity for interior left
Setting Knob and right wing-mounted external fuel tanks
• EXT WING: Indicates quantity for exterior left
and right wing-mounted external fuel tanks
• EXT CTR: Indicates quantity for exterior
fuselage-mounted center tank
Pedal Adjustment Handle

External Fuel Transfer Switch
• NORM
EHSI Mode Selector Button • Wing First
Toggles between the following modes:
• NAV: Navigation
Course Setting Knob (when OUT)
• PLS/NAV: Precision Landing System (ILS) / Navigation
• TCN: TACAN EHSI Brightness Control Knob (when pressed IN)
• PLS/TCN: Precision Landing System (ILS) / TACAN Scroll mousewheel to turn knob, left click to press in.
EHSI Mode Selected
53
RDY Light
Illuminates when AR (Air Refueling) system is ready for air-to-air refueling (i.e. when AR door is open)
AR / NWS Light
• AR illuminates when aircraft is in the air and the RDY / AR / NWS / DISC Indicator Brightness Control Lever
VIPER
F-16C
air refueling boom is inserted and has good

contact with the AR receptacle DISC Light
• NWS illuminates on ground when Nosewheel Illuminates during AR (Air Refueling) when pilot commands a disconnect from the boom
Steering is engaged, allowing the pilot to steer the
Eyebrow Lights ENG FIRE Light
aircraft using rudder pedals to control direction
Engine fire detected
HYD/OIL PRESS Light

• Low Oil Pressure: Illuminates when oil pressure has been below approximately
10 psi for 30 sec. Extinguishes when oil pressure exceeds 20 psi approx.
• Low Hydraulic Pressure: Illuminates when hydraulic pressure for either system A
or B decreases below 1000 psi.
FLCS Light
Indicates a dual malfunction in the FLCC (Flight Control

Computer) electronics or that a leading edge flaps are locked, or
that the FLCS BIT (Built-In Test) has failed.
ENGINE Light CANOPY Light

RPM and FTIT indicator signals indicate that an engine Illuminates when canopy is not locked in place
overtemperature or flameout has occurred. Illuminates when
the RPM decreases below IDLE, or approximately 2 seconds
after FTIT indication exceeds 1100 °C.
DBU ON Light
Illuminates when Digital Backup (DBU) software state
of the FLCS (Flight Control System) is active.
TO/LDG CONFIG (Takeoff/Landing Configuration) Light

Illuminates in flight whenever pressure altitude is less than 10000 feet,
airspeed is less than 190 knots, rate of descent is greater than 250 fpm and
either of the following conditions exists:
• Trailing Edge Flaps are not fully down OXY LOW Light
• Nose Landing Gear or either Main Landing Gear is not down and locked Illuminates when oxygen regulator pressure has dropped
(accompanied by landing gear warning horn) below 5 psi or when the BIT (Built-In Test) has detected a fault
54
Fuel Flow Indicator
(lbs/hour)
VIPER
F-16C
SAI (Standby Attitude Indicator)
SAI Caging Knob

• Left Click to Cage
• Scroll Mousewheel to adjust aircraft reference symbol
Engine Oil Pressure

Indicator (psi)
Engine Nozzle Position

Indicator (% Open)
Engine RPM Indicator (% RPM)
FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet Temperature)

Indicator (x100 deg C)
55
VIPER
F-16C
Ejection Grip
Emergency Manual Chute

Deployment Handle
56
Weapon Release Button
Trim Hat Switch
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
VIPER
F-16C

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
TMS (Target Management Switch)

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
Camera/Gun Trigger
(Two Stages)
NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button

• NWS: Nosewheel Steering Activation
• A/R: When in flight and the AIR REFUEL switch
in the OPEN position, depressing the button
disconnects boom latching
• MSL (MISSILE) STEP: When in flight, depressing
CMS (Countermeasures the button in EO or A-A mode selects the next
Switch) weapon station. Depressing the button in A-G
FWD/AFT/LEFT/RIGHT Mode cycles between CCRP, CCIP and DTOS.
Paddle Switch
Overrides Autopilot
when depressed
Expand/FOV (Field-of-View)
Button
57
Fuel Quantity Indicator (x100 lbs)
F/R (Front Right) Pointer

A/L (Aft Left) Pointer
Note: indicates center fuel tank load
VIPER
F-16C
when Selector Knob set to EXT CTR

Total Fuel Quantity Indicator (lbs)
Magnetic Compass
Pilot Fault List Display

The Pilot Fault List Display, or PFLD, lists all FLCS (Flight Control
System) detected faults. Two types of PFLDs are displayed: warning
level and caution level. Warnings are associated with the FLCS and
have a bracket around them. Cautions are associated with other FLCS
elements, engine, and avionics systems. To clear a PFLD fault, the fault
acknowledge (F-ACK) button is pressed.
Hydraulic Pressure Indicator (x1000 psi) – System A

58
Hydraulic Pressure Indicator (x1000 psi) – System B
Caution Advisory Lights
FLCS FAULT ENGINE FAULT AVIONICS FAULT SEAT NOT ARMED
Flight Control System Engine fault detected Fault detected in Ejection seat lever is UP (not
VIPER
F-16C
Fault detected avionics systems. armed).
ELEC SYS SEC EQUIP HOT NWS FAIL

Electrical system failure. Engine is operating in Avionics equipment Nosewheel Steering System has
Check ELEC panel. secondary mode (see if ENG cooling is insufficient: failed and steering with the nose
CONT switch is set to SEC) check AIR SOURCE knob gear is not possible.
position is set to NORM.
PROBE HEAT FUEL/OIL HOT RADAR ALT ANTI SKID

Probe heater failure or Temperature of fuel going to Malfunction of the A failure affecting anti-skid
monitoring system failure. the engine or engine oil is radar altimeter. braking performance is detected
excessive. while the aircraft is moving above
5 kts ground speed.
CADC INLET ICING IFF HOOK

Central Air Data Computer Engine Inlet Icing detected There is a condition that Arresting hook is not up and
failure. prevents IFF (Identify locked.
Friend or Foe) Mode 4
operation.
STORES CONFIG OVERHEAT NUCLEAR OBOGS

STORES CONFIG switch on FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet Malfunction in the On-Board Oxygen Generating
the gear panel is not in the Temperature) Overheat NUCLEAR control System caution indicates ECS
correct position for the detected circuitry. (Environmental Control System)
current loadout. air supply has dropped below 10
psi.
ATF NOT ENGAGED EEC CABIN PRESS

Automatic Terrain Electronic Engine Controller Cockpit pressurization is above
Following system failure. caution, not applicable in F- 27000 ft. Check AIR SOURCE knob
16C Block 50. ---------- for NORM position. If caution light
remains illuminated, descend
below 25000 ft and reduce speed
to 500 kts max.
FWD FUEL LOW BUC

Forward reservoir Backup Control caution, not
---------- ----------
contains less than 400 lbs applicable in F-16C Block 50
of fuel.
AFT FUEL LOW

Aft reservoir contains less ---------- ---------- ----------
59
than 400 lbs of fuel.
F-16C
Elbow Support (Lift to Rotate)
60
VIPER EPU (Emergency Power Unit) Fuel Quantity (%)
F-16C
Clock
Cabin Pressure Altitude

Indicator (x1000 ft)
61
Right HDPT (Hardpoint) Power Switch FCR (Fire Control Radar) Power Switch RADALT (Radar Altimeter) Power Switch
Power for right chin intake pylon, targeting • FWD: ON • FWD: Radar Altimeter ON
pod can be installed • AFT: OFF • MIDDLE: Standby
• FWD: ON • AFT: Radar Altimeter OFF
VIPER
F-16C
• AFT: OFF
HUD Depressible Reticle Switch
Left HDPT (Hardpoint) Power Switch • FWD: STBY (Standby) displays the standby reticle and
Power for left chin intake pylon, targeting pod removes all other HUD symbology
can be installed • MIDDLE: PRI (Primary) displays the primary reticle but does
• FWD: ON not remove any HUD symbology
• AFT: OFF • AFT: OFF
DED (Data Entry Display) Data Switch

• FWD: DED (Standby) allows data from DED to be visible on
the HUD
• MIDDLE: PFL (Pilot Fault List) allows data from PFLD (PFL
Display) to be visible on the HUD
• AFT: OFF, displays neither DED nor PFLD data on HUD.
HUD Test Switch
HUD Scales Switch HUD Brightness Control Switch

• FWD: VV/VAH displays the Vertical • FWD: Day Mode
Velocity, Velocity, Altitude and Heading • MIDDLE: Automatic Brightness Adjustment
on the HUD. • AFT: Night Mode
• MIDDLE: VAH displays Velocity, Altitude
and Heading information only. HUD Altitude Switch
• AFT: OFF • FWD: ALT RADAR displays radar altitude on HUD
• MIDDLE: BARO displays the barometric altitude on HUD
HUD Flight Path Marker (FPM) Switch • AFT: OFF/Automatic Mode displays radar altitude when
HUD Velocity Switch
• FWD: ATT/FPM displays both the flight path above ground altitude is below 1500 ft (displays
• FWD: CAS displays calibrated airspeed on HUD
marker and attitude reference bars. barometric altitude when above 1500 ft)
• MIDDLE: TAS displays true airspeed on HUD
• MIDDLE: FPM displays the flight path marker only. 62
• AFT: GND SPD displays ground speed on HUD
• AFT: OFF
Nuclear Consent Arming Switch Note:
• FWD: ARM/REL The NUCLEAR CONSENT panel controls consent for nuclear
• MIDDLE: OFF weapons release. Placing this switch in ARM/REL gives the airplane
• AFT: REL ONLY consent to arm and release nuclear weapons (if loaded). In REL
VIPER
F-16C
ONLY, the airplane will release but not arm nuclear weapons. Take
note that nuclear weapons are not modelled in DCS.
Seat Adjustment Switch
Nuclear Consent PLAIN Cipher Switch
• FWD: CRAD 1
• MIDDLE: PLAIN
• AFT: CRAD 2
63
Air Source Selector Knob
MAL & IND LTS (Malfunction & • OFF: engine bleed air valves close.
Indicator Lights) Brightness Switch • NORM: air conditioning system sets for automatic
temperature and pressure regulation, cockpit and
VIPER
F-16C
Primary Data Entry Display (DED)

fuel tanks are pressurized and avionics are cooled.
Brightness Control Knob • DUMP: cabin pressurisation is terminated and the
cockpit is vented to outside air pressure. This
Primary Instrument Panel means cockpit pressure altitude will increase above
Brightness Control Knob 8000 feet MSL.
• RAM: engine bleed air valves close. Cabin
pressurization is terminated and the cabin is vented
to outside air pressure as above. Ram air valves are
opened to ventilate the cockpit and avionics. All
Primary Consoles Brightness other ECS functions such as external fuel tank
Control Knob pressurisation & cooling are disabled.
Flood Lights - Instrument

Panel Brightness Control Knob
Air Conditioning Temperature

Control Knob
ZEROIZE Switch
Used in case of crash landing into enemy
territory; erases all sensitive data from all
systems like secure voice, GPS keys, and others.
• FWD: OFP (DTC,, GPS, AIFF, PDG and RWR
data are purged) Flood Lights - Consoles
• MIDDLE: OFF Brightness Control Knob VMS (Voice Message
• AFT: DATA (DTC, GPS, and AIFF data is purged) 64
System) Switch
FILL Select Knob
VIPER
F-16C
• 1-6: Selects position to be loaded with

FILL Connector data
• Z 1 – 5: Selects position in which data will
be zeroed (erased)
• Z ALL: Zeroes (erases) data in ALL positions
KY-58 Radio Encryption Mode Selector

• P: Plain Mode
• C: Cipher Mode
• LD: Enables loading data into KY-58
• RV: Receiver Variable
KY-58 Radio Encryption Volume

KY-58 Radio Encryption Power Knob
Control Knob
• ON
• OFF
• TD: Power is turned ON for the system if
Cipher Mode has been selected and a time
delay is selected for data processing
65
VIPER
F-16C
Oxygen Flow Indicator

Flow is active when indicator
alternates between white and black
Oxygen Emergency Lever

• Emergency
• Normal
Oxygen Pressure Indicator (psi)
• Test Mask
Oxygen Supply Lever
• PBG: Pressure Breathing for G provides pressure breathing
Oxygen Diluter Lever above 4g's to enhance g tolerance and reduce pilot fatigue.
• 100 % • ON: Provides oxygen supply to mask, helmet bladder, and
• NORM (Normal) vest. Pressure breathing as a function of g is not available 66
• OFF: Turns OFF Oxygen
UHF Radio Antenna
IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) Selection Switch
Upper/Norm/Lower Antenna
VIPER
Antenna Selection Switch

F-16C
MFD (Multifunction Display) Power Switch
Engine Anti-Ice Switch

ON/AUTO/OFF UFC (Upfront Control) Power Switch
Provides power to ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
Map Power Switch

(not used on Block 50 F-16C)
ST STA (Store Stations) Power Switch

MIDS (Multifunctional Information Distribution System)
MMC (Modular Mission LVT (Low Volume Terminal) Datalink Selector Switch
Computer) Power Switch • ZERO: Zeroize (erase) all MIDS information
• OFF: MIDS is OFF
• ON: MIDS is ON
EGI (Embedded GPS/INS (Inertial Navigation DL (Datalink) Power Switch

System)) Selector Switch Not used for Block 50 variant of the F-16C
• OFF
• ALIGN STOR HDG: Stored Heading Alignment GPS Receiver Power Switch
• ALIGN NORM: Normal Alignment
• NAV: Navigation Mode, normal operation
• IN FLT ALIGN: In-Flight INS Alignment can be
performed in flight if GPS data is available.
• ATT: Attitude mode allows you to correct INS
alignment by flying a stable attitude to allow the
GPS to update the INS. 67
VIPER
F-16C
DTU (Data Transfer Unit) DTC (Data

Transfer Cartridge) Receptacle
68
F-16C
69
VIPER Position/Formation Light (Green)
F-16C
Position/Formation Light (Red)
70
Aft: Air Refueling Flood Light
VIPER Front: Formation Light (White)
Air Refueling Trap Door

F-16C
Anti-Collision Strobe Light (White)
Fuselage Formation Light

Vertical Tail-Mounted
Floodlight
Fuselage Formation Light
Position Light (White) 71

VIPER
F-16C
Position Light (Red)
Position/Formation Light (Red)

Position Light (Green)
Position/Formation Light (Green)

Formation Light (White) 72
F-16C
Landing Light
73
F-16C
Taxi Light
74
VIPER
F-16C
Engine Intake Splitter Plate

Controls airflow into the engine by diverting
the boundary layer away from the engine intake
Structural Strut
75
VIPER
F-16C
Radar Warning Antenna Threat Warning (Radar

Warning Receiver) Antenna
IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) Antenna Array
Radome
Static Port Pitot Head / Air Data Probe

Pitot Head / Air Data Probe 76
Angle of Attack Sensor
VIPER
F-16C
Angle of Attack Sensor

M61A1 20 mm Gun
Radar Warning Antenna
77
Speed Brake
VIPER
Speed Brake
F-16C
Speed Brake Switch

3-Position, Aft Momentary
78
VIPER
F-16C
Static Dischargers
Static Dischargers
79
Static Dischargers
Note:
other. You can select what to equip via Ground Crew request.
VIPER
F-16C
Night Vision Goggles (NVG) Controls:

• RSHIFT+H: On/Off
• RSHIFT+RALT+H: Gain Night Vision Goggles Down
• RSHIFT+RCTRL+H: Gain Night Vision Goggles Up
80
F-16C
81
F-16C
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE VIPER
82
AIRCRAFT START-UP SUMMARY
VIPER
F-16C
A. Provide Aircraft Power

B. Perform Aircraft Pre-Start Setup
C. Engine Start
D. Set Up Avionics
E. Perform INS (Inertial Navigation System) Alignment
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE
F. Set Up Datalink
G. Set Up IFF
H. Complete Aircraft Setup
I. (Optional) Perform Aircraft Post-Start Checks
83
A – PROVIDE AIRCRAFT POWER
1. Set Ejection Seat Lever – DOWN & ARMED (Note: this step is typically done just before takeoff)
VIPER
2. Test that the FLCS (Flight Control System) functions properly on battery power only
F-16C
a) (Mandatory) MAIN PWR Switch – BATT/MIDDLE (Right Click)

Note: This will connect the aircraft’s battery to essential systems and provide power to engine
igniters.
b) (Mandatory) Verify that the FLCS RLY (Flight Control System Relay) light is illuminated. This
confirms that the FLCS’s fault monitoring system operates properly.
c) (Optional) Set and hold FLCS PWR TEST switch to TEST position (Right Click and hold). 1a
d) (Optional) While FLCS PWR TEST switch is set to TEST, confirm that: Disarmed 1b
i. The four FLCS PWR (Power) lights illuminate Armed
ii. The FLCS RLY (Relay) light extinguishes
iii. The TO FLCS light illuminates (battery power is powering FLCS)
iv. The FLCS PMG (Permanent Magnet Generator) light illuminates
e) (Optional) Release FLCS PWR TEST switch to NORM position (release Right Click).
3. Set MAIN PWR Switch – MAIN PWR/FWD (Right Click)
Note: This will connect the aircraft’s battery to essential systems and provide power to engine igniters.
Note: The amount of power available from the battery is limited; do not leave the MAIN PWR switch in BATT
or MAIN PWR for more than 5 minutes. Start the engine or apply external power if more time is needed.
3
2a
2diii
2b 2dii
2c
2div
2di 84
A – PROVIDE AIRCRAFT POWER 5 4
MAIN PWR
4. MAIN PWR prepares the aircraft to run off the engine-mounted generator, but electrical power is not available
VIPER
until the engine is running (IDLE RPM). For that reason the following warning lights should be illuminated:
F-16C
a) ENGINE warning Light

b) HYD/OIL PRESS warning light
c) ELEC SYS caution light
d) SEC caution light
e) FLCS RLY light
5. On EPU (Emergency Power Unit) Panel, verify that EPU GEN (Generator) and EPU PMG (Permanent Magnet
Generator) lights are OFF.
4e
Note: Illumination of either light indicates criteria for EPU activation are met, which means that the EPU could
activate and create a hazardous condition if the EPU safety pin is removed by the ground crew.
4a
4d
4c 4b
85
B – PERFORM AIRCRAFT PRE-START SETUP
6. Set Parking Brake / Anti-Skid Switch – PARKING BRAKE (UP)
VIPER
Note: the parking brake holds the aircraft stationary without the use of toe brakes. It can
F-16C
also be used for emergency braking if the toe brakes are inoperative. The parking brake
is powered by battery bus No. 2 and system B hydraulics or one brake/JFS accumulator
(the brake/Jet Fuel Starter accumulator which is not used for START 1).
7a
7. Hold the Canopy Control Switch DOWN to close the Canopy (LCTRL+C).
8. Close the Canopy Switch Spider Guard (Left Click) 9
9. Confirm canopy is closed and locked with the CANOPY light being extinguished.
7b Canopy Control Switch

8b
Canopy Switch Spider Guard
Shown: Guarded/Closed
8a Canopy Switch Spider Guard

Shown: Unguarded/Open 86
B – PERFORM AIRCRAFT PRE-START SETUP
VIPER
F-16C
87
C – ENGINE START 12
10. Set ENGINE FEED Selector – NORM OFF Detent
VIPER
This will turn on all fuel pumps, which will also

F-16C
automatically control the aircraft CG (Centre of Gravity).

11. Set AIR SOURCE Selector Knob – NORM
This will open the engine bleed air valves when engine is
spooled up, which sets automatic air temperature control,
cockpit pressure regulation, and avionic systems cooling.
12. Verify that throttle is at the OFF detent
Note: you can use RSHIFT+END to set throttle to OFF.
13. Set JFS (Jet Fuel Starter) switch AFT to START2 (Left Click).
Note: START1 and START2 refer to the number of
compressed air bottles use to start the JFS. Normally, one
should be sufficient in cold conditions. However, you may
need to use two bottles on hot days or high altitudes to
generate enough air pressure to spool up the JFS.
14. When the Jet Fuel Starter reaches IDLE RPM (within 30
seconds):
a) The JFS RUN green light should illuminate 10
b) FLCS RLY (Flight Control System Relay) light should
extinguish
c) FLCS PMG (Permanent Magnet Generator) should
illuminate 14a
d) TO FLCS light should illuminate
14d
11
14c
14b
13 88
C – ENGINE START 15
15. When JFS (Jet Fuel Starter) is operational, a clutch

VIPER
inside the Accessory Drive Gearbox (ADG) will engage,

F-16C
driving the General Electric F-110 engine through the

accessory drive gearbox and PTO (Power Takeoff) shaft.
Engine RPM will increase, gradually spooling up to 20-
25% RPM.
16. When engine RPM reaches between 20% and 25 %,
move throttle from OFF position to IDLE position
(RSHIFT+HOME). Moving throttle too early may result
in an engine hot start.
17. The engine should light-off within 10 seconds. Engine
RPM and FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet Temperature) should
increase. Only the RPM and FTIT indicators will function
until the standby generator comes online.
16c
16a IDLE Detent
OFF Detent
16b
89
18 19
C – ENGINE START SEC Caution Light Extinguished ENGINE Warning Extinguished
18. The SEC caution light goes off at 20 % Engine RPM

VIPER
19. The standby generator becomes operational at

F-16C
22a
approximately 60% RPM. This should extinguish the
ENGINE warning light and the STBY GEN light.
20. Five to ten seconds after the standby generator comes
online, the main generator comes online (MAIN GEN
light extinguishes) and the standby generator goes
offline.
21. The JFS should have automatically shut down at 22g
approximately 55% RPM. Turn the JFS off if that did
not occur. 22c
22b
22. Verify engine parameters stabilize as follows:
a) HYD/OIL PRESS warning light – Off
b) Fuel Flow– 700-1700 pph
22d
c) Oil pressure – 15 psi (minimum)
d) Nozzle Position – Greater than 94 %

e) Engine RPM – 62-80 %
f) FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet Temperature) –
650 deg C or less
g) Hydraulic Pressure (Systems A & B) – 22e
2850-3250 psi
21
22f
20
MAIN GEN Caution Extinguished
19 90
STBY GEN Caution Extinguished
D – SET UP AVIONICS 26
24 25
23 28
Very important Note: Verify that engine is running and Air Source Selector Knob is set to NORM since
VIPER
engine bleed air cooling is required before turning on avionic systems.

F-16C
23. Set MMC (Modular Mission Computer) Power Switch – ON

24. Set ST STA (Store Stations) Power Switch – ON
25. Set MFD (Multifunction Display) Power Switch – ON
26. Set UFC (Upfront Control) Power Switch – ON
27. Set GPS (Global Positioning System) Receiver Power Switch – ON
28. DL (Datalink) Receiver and MAP switches can be left to OFF since they have no function on the F-16C
Block 50.
29. A series of BITs (Built-In Tests) will be performed as avionic systems are powered.
29a 27
28
Air Source Selector
29b 29c
91
D – SET UP AVIONICS
30. Set LEFT HDPT (Left Hardpoint) Power Switch – ON (FWD) if a HTS pod (HARM (High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missile)
VIPER
Targeting System) is equipped on the left chin hardpoint. However, for now it should be left to OFF since the HTS pod
F-16C
is not available yet.

31. Set RIGHT HDPT (Right Hardpoint) Power Switch – ON (FWD) if a targeting pod is equipped on the right chin
hardpoint.
32. Set FCR (Fire Control Radar) Power Switch – FCR/ON (FWD). The Fire Control Radar system will then enter a Built-In
Test (BIT) that should take a few minutes to complete.
Note: While on the ground, radar operation is inhibited.
33. Set RDR ALT (Radar Altimeter) Power Switch – STBY (MIDDLE). 32b
Note: While on the ground, Radar Altimeter functionality is inhibited.
31
30 1a
33
32a
Targeting Pod (Right Chin Hardpoint) 92

D – SET UP AVIONICS
34. Set COMM1 UHF and COMM2 VHF Radio Power/Volume knobs – ON (Volume as required)
VIPER
35. Set COMM1 UHF and COMM2 VHF Radio Mode Switches – SQL (Squelch)
F-16C
36. Set UHF Backup Radio Function Knob – BOTH (or MAIN, as desired)
37. Scroll HUD (Heads-Up Display) Symbology Intensity Wheel (SYM) to turn on the HUD.
38. Set C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and Identification) Switch to UFC (Upfront Control).
This enables control of primary communications, navigation and identification functions from the
upfront controls.
Heads-Up Display (HUD)

36
38 34
34
37
35 35
93
E – PERFORM INS (INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM) ALIGNMENT
• Note: You can either use a Normal alignment (takes roughly 8 minutes) or a Stored
VIPER
Heading alignment (takes roughly 2 minutes), which is quicker but accumulates drift error
F-16C
more rapidly.
• NORMAL alignment is done with the EGI Selector set to ALIGN NORM. Aircraft coordinates INS (Inertial Navigation System) Alignment Status
need to be confirmed. Alignment is done when INS Alignment Status reaches “6”. • 99: Initialization
• STORED HEADING alignment is done with the EGI Selector set to ALIGN STOR HDG. • 90: Valid Altitude data, coarse alignment begins
Aircraft coordinates do not need to be confirmed since they are already entered in the • 79: Valid heading data
system. Alignment is done when INS Alignment Status reaches “10”. • 70: Degraded navigation state, steady RDY displayed on DED, steady ALIGN displayed
on HUD (Heads-Up Display)
39. Set EGI (Embedded GPS/Inertial Navigation System) Selector Switch to ALIGN NORM for • 60-20: Estimated position error compared to fully aligned state
Normal Alignment or STOR HDG for Stored Heading Alignment. This will perform the
• 60 = 6.0 times normal
Inertial Navigation System Alignment.
• A normal alignment will take approximately 8 minutes for a full alignment, while • 20 = 2.0 times normal
a stored heading alignment will take approximately 2 minutes. • 10: INS fully aligned, RDY flashes on DED, ALIGN flashes on HUD
40. The INS (Inertial Navigation System) Alignment Status is available on the DED (Data Entry • 6: INS fully aligned and enhanced to 0.6 times normal precision with GPS data or
Display) INS page, which is selected automatically when INS alignment is in progress. other techniques
Time Into INS Alignment (minutes)
40
Latitude Coordinates
Longitude Coordinates
Ground Speed (kts)
System Altitude (ft)
True Heading
INS (Inertial Navigation System) DED (Data Entry Display) page

39
94
E – PERFORM INS (INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM) ALIGNMENT 41b
Note: This step is Mandatory for NORMAL alignment, but not required for STORED HEADING
VIPER
alignment.
F-16C
41. Enter and confirm aircraft coordinates used for INS alignment.
a) IMPORTANT: You must either enter or confirm the latitude and longitude
coordinates of your aircraft on the INS DED page within two minutes after 41c 41f
starting an alignment. Failing to do that within 2 minutes will result in a
degraded INS alignment.
b) Check the aircraft coordinates via the F10 map.
c) The “*” symbols next to LAT indicate that the LATITUDE field is selected. Confirm
that coordinates entered there match the aircraft coordinates. Normally, these
coordinates should match and should not need to be corrected.
d) Press “ENTR” button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to enter/confirm
LATITUDE coordinates.
e) Press the DCS (Data Control Switch, also called “Dobber”) DOWN to select the
LNG (LONGITUDE) field.

f) The “*” symbols next to LNG indicate that the LONGITUDE field is selected.
Confirm that coordinates entered there match the aircraft coordinates. Normally,
these coordinates should match and should not need to be corrected.
g) Press “ENTR” button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to enter/confirm
LONGITUDE coordinates.
41d
41g
41b
41e 95
42. FOR NORMAL ALIGNMENT: When Alignment Status indication reaches “6 RDY”, INS alignment is complete.
VIPER
FOR STORED HEADING ALIGNMENT: When Alignment Status indication reaches “10 RDY”, INS alignment is complete.
F-16C
42c
42a
HUD (Heads-Up Display) ALIGN Indication

42b
Alignment Status
6 RDY = COMPLETE!
INS (Inertial Navigation System) Alignment Status
• 99: Initialization Time Into INS Alignment (minutes)
• 90: Valid Altitude data, coarse alignment begins
• 79: Valid heading data
• 70: Degraded navigation state, steady RDY displayed on DED, steady ALIGN displayed on HUD (Heads-Up Display)
• 60-20: Estimated position error compared to fully aligned state
• 10: INS fully aligned, RDY flashes on DED, ALIGN flashes on HUD
• 6: INS fully aligned and enhanced to 0.6 times normal precision with GPS data or other techniques 96
43. When INS alignment is complete, set EGI (Embedded GPS/Inertial Navigation System) Selector Switch to NAV (Navigation).
VIPER
F-16C
43
97
F – SET UP DATALINK 44c
44. Set up LINK-16 Datalink

VIPER
a) Power up Datalink by setting MIDS LVT

F-16C
(Multifunctional Information Distribution

System Low Volume Terminal) switch to ON
b) You can leave the DL (Datalink) Switch to OFF
since it is not used on the Block 50 variant of
the F-16.
c) On HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) page,
select Datalink Transmission Option (XMT) to
L16 by toggling the OSB (Option Select Button)
next to XMT.
44b 44a
45. (Optional) If desired, consult Datalink page to
customize settings
a) Press the LIST button on the ICP (Integrated
Control Panel) 45a
b) Select Datalink (DLNK) page by pressing the

ENTR (E) button.
c) On the DED (Data Entry Display) Datalink page
1 (P1), you can consult Datalink Network
Status and time references.
45b
45a
45b
45c
Datalink Network Status
GPS Time Reference
Pilot Entered Time

Network Time Reference
98
Network Synchronization Status
F – SET UP DATALINK
YOU - Flight Member Track Number:
45. (Optional) If desired, consult Datalink page to customize settings 00201 (#1, Flight Lead, Dodge 2-1)
VIPER
d) Press the DCS (Data Control Switch, also called “Dobber”) RIGHT (SEQ) select the DED Datalink
F-16C
page 2 (P2).
e) On the DED Datalink page 2, you can consult Datalink MIDS Radio Options. Most MIDS settings
Flight Member Track Number:
can be left as is.
00202 (#2, Dodge 2-2)
f) If desired, you can modify your MIDS settings by selecting a field with the “Dobber” switch UP or
DOWN. “*” symbols will indicate which data field is selected. Then, enter the field value on the
ICP keypad, then press “ENTR” button on the ICP to modify the field. Flight Member Track Number:
g) Press the DCS (Data Control Switch, “Dobber”) RIGHT (SEQ) select the DED Datalink page 3 (P3). 00203 (#3, Dodge 2-3)
h) On the DED Datalink page 3, you can consult Datalink Flight Management data .
i) If desired, you can modify your Own ID Number on your flight’s Datalink Network. As an
example, you can select the “OWN” field with the “Dobber” switch UP or DOWN. “*” symbols
will indicate which data field is selected. Then, enter the field value on the ICP keypad, then
press “ENTR” button on the ICP to modify the field. In this example, we are Ship #1, which has a
Track Number of 00201.
45e Callsign (DE 21 = Dodge 2-1)

MIDS Radio Options
Flight Lead (FL) Identifier
Fighter Channel (FC) Selection
Transmission Power (XMT)
Mission Channel (MC) Selection
Surveillance Channel (SC) Selection
Flight Member Track Numbers Own Flight Position

(Shown: 1)
45h
Flight Management 99
45d 45g
G – SET UP IFF (IDENTIFY-FRIEND-OR-FOE)
46. To turn on the IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) system, set IFF Master Switch to NORM.
VIPER
47. To consult your IFF Mode codes, press “IFF” button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel). This will display the IFF DED (Data Entry Display) page.
F-16C
48. By default, all IFF transponder/interrogator codes should already be set and do not need to be updated. In the case that IFF codes differ from your default values, as could be listed in a
mission briefing, consult the “DATALINK & IFF” section.
47a 47b
46
100
H – COMPLETE AIRCRAFT SETUP
49. Uncage SAI (Standby Attitude Director Indicator) by turning the
VIPER
caging knob to the MIDDLE position. Red “OFF” flag should

F-16C
disappear when SAI is uncaged.

50. Set appropriate Fly-By-Wire control mode by setting STORES
CONFIG switch as per ordnance loadout:
• CAT I: Air-to-Air loadouts without external wing tanks
• CAT III: Air-to-Ground loadouts, or any loadout with
external wing tanks
51. Set Oxygen Supply Lever – ON 49b
49a
52. Set Oxygen Emergency Lever – NORMAL
53. Set Oxygen Diluter Lever – NORMAL
54. Confirm that Oxygen Pressure Indicator is in the green range
55. Confirm that Oxygen Flow Indicator blinks, which confirms that
oxygen supply to mask is adequate
56. In real life, you would need to request the ground crew to
remove the EPU (Emergency Power Unit) Safety Pin, however

this is not simulated.
54
55
52 53
50
51
101
57. Press the Threat Warning Azimuth / Radar Warning Receiver (TWA/RWR) Power Button. The
VIPER
RWR will enter a Built-In Test sequence.

F-16C
58. Set CMDS RWR (Countermeasure Dispensing System Radar Warning Receiver) Switch – ON
(UP)
59. Set CMDS JMR (Countermeasure Dispensing System Jammer) Switch – ON (UP)
60. Note: MWS (Missile Warning System) Switch can be left to OFF (switch is not applicable on
Block 50 variant of the F-16)
61. Set CMDS (Countermeasure Dispenser System) CH (Chaff) Switch – ON (UP)
62. Set CMDS (Countermeasure Dispenser System) FL (Flares) Switch – ON (UP)
63. Set Countermeasure Mode Selector to desired release mode. In that case, we will choose
SEMI-AUTOMATIC mode. However, MANUAL or AUTOMATIC could also be selected if
desired.
64. Set Countermeasure PRGM (Program) Selector to desired Program (i.e. Program 1)
61
58 62
59
ALR-56M TWA (Threat Warning Azimuth) Indicator
60
57
64 63
102
H – COMPLETE AIRCRAFT SETUP 65e
65. Equip either HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) helmet or NVGs (Night
VIPER
Vision Goggles) as required.

F-16C
a) Press “\” (communication menu binding) to contact ground crew

b) Press “F8” to select “Ground Crew”
c) Press “F5” to “Change helmet-mounted device”.
d) Press either “F1” for HMCS or “F2” for NVGs.
e) If you want to use the HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System), set
the HMCS SYMBOLOGY INTENSITY knob to INC.
65
65e
65e
103
66. Load the Data Transfer Cartridge (DTC) data via the DTE (Data Transfer Equipment) page.
VIPER
a) (Not Simulated Yet) Verify that DTC is inserted

F-16C
b) (Not Simulated Yet) Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to “DTE” to select the DTE (Data
Transfer Equipment) page
c) (Not Simulated Yet) Press OSB next to “LOAD” to load data saved in the DTC (includes IFF
codes, Datalink settings, Weapon Profiles, Countermeasure Programs, Inventory Data,
Communication Preset Frequencies, Navigation Flight Plan, etc.)
104
67. Clear avionic faults on the TEST page.
VIPER
a) (Not Simulated Yet) Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to “TEST” to select the Test page
F-16C
b) (Not Simulated Yet) Press OSB next to “CLR” to clear any faults listed in the MFL (Malfunction Fault List)
105
I – PERFORM AIRCRAFT POST-START CHECKS
Note: The entirety of the post-start checks are optional and can be skipped. Normally,
68a
VIPER
these checks are performed after the engine start, but for simplicity we will leave the
F-16C
post-start checks at the end of the Start-Up Procedure section.
68. (Optional) Verify Pitot Probe Heater system operation

a) Set PROBE HEAT switch to PROBE HEAT position. 68b
b) Verify PROBE HEAT caution light is OFF. Illumination means one or more
probe heaters are inoperative.
c) Set PROBE HEAT switch to TEST position.
d) Verify PROBE HEAT caution flashes 3 to 5 times per second.
e) Return PROBE HEAT switch to OFF position. Leaving it to ON while on the
ground could risk overheating the probe; we will set it on 2 minutes prior to 68c
takeoff.
69. (Optional) Verify Fire & Overheat Detection system operation
a) Press and hold the FIRE & OHEAT DETECT button
b) While button is pressed, verify that the ENG FIRE warning light and the
OVERHEAT caution light are illuminated
c) Release the FIRE & OHEAT DETECT button
68d
69a
68e 69b
69b
106
70. (Optional) Verify Malfunction & Indicator Lights
VIPER
system operation
F-16C
a) Press and hold the MAL & IND LTS button

b) Verify all cockpit warning, caution &
indicator lights illuminate when button is
pressed
c) Confirm VMS (Voice Message System) audio
alerts are audible (“PULLUP”, “ALTITUDE”,
“WARNING”, “JAMMER”, “COUNTER”,
“CHAFF FLARE”, “LOW”, “ALT”, “LOCK”,
“CAUTION”, “BINGO”, “DATA”, “IFF”.). A
brief Landing Gear warning horn should be
heard prior to the “WARNING” and 70a
“CAUTION” words.
d) Release the MAL & IND LTS button
107
71. (Optional) Verify SEC (Secondary Engine Control) system operation. This
VIPER
mode is selected in the case of failure of the engine-mounted digital

F-16C
computer that controls fuel flow scheduling.

a) Take note of the initial engine RPM and Nozzle position in PRI
(Primary) engine control mode
b) Raise ENG CONT (Engine Control) switch Guard, then set switch to
SEC (Secondary) 71g
71b 71b
c) Verify the SEC caution light illuminates and engine RPM is stabilized.
RPM may drop up to 10 % from PRI (Primary engine operation) value
before stabilizing. Stabilized SEC IDLE RPM may be up to 5 % lower
than in PRI (Primary) IDLE.
d) Hold wheel brake pedals. The parking brake switch automatically
disengages if engine RPM is greater than 85 %.
e) Slowly advance throttle towards MIL (Military) Power detent and wait
for engine RPM to increase to 85 %.
f) When at 85 % RPM, snap throttle back to IDLE and check for normal
indications and smooth operation. Nozzle should be 5 % or less within
30 seconds after selecting SEC.
71h
g) Set ENG CONT (Engine Control) switch back to PRI (Primary) and 71c
lower switch guard.
h) Check that the SEC caution light extinguishes and nozzle position
returns to greater than 94 %.
Throttle Stripe
71a 71c Indicates Throttle MIL (Military)
71e 71f 71h
Position on Quadrant Power Detent
108
IDLE Detent
I – PERFORM AIRCRAFT POST-START CHECKS FLCS warning light extinguished
72. (Optional) Verify FLCS (Flight Control System) operation

VIPER
a) Cycle all your flight controls with the stick and rudder pedal input. Maximum stick inputs warm hydraulic fluid and
F-16C
removes air bubbles, making a test failure less likely.

b) Set FLCS BIT (Flight Control System Built-In Test) Switch – BIT
c) RUN light on the Flight Control Panel illuminates for the duration of the test.
d) Approximately 45 seconds later, the RUN light extinguishes if the completion of the FLCS BIT is successful.
e) The FLCS BIT switch will automatically spring back to OFF. The FAIL light and FLCS warning light should remain off.
72d
FAIL light extinguished
72c
72b
72e
109
73a 73b
73. (Optional) Verify Fuel Quantity Indicating system operation
VIPER
a) Set FUEL QUANTITY knob to TEST

F-16C
b) On fuel quantity indicator, verify that FR and AL pointers

indicate 2000 (+/- 100) lbs.
c) On fuel quantity indicator, verify that Fuel Totalizer
indicates 6000 (+/- 100) lbs.
d) Verify that FWD FUEL LOW and AFT FUEL LOW caution
lights illuminate.
e) Cycle FUEL QUANTITY knob to other positions and verify
that quantity readouts in all other positions match the
aircraft’s actual fuel load.
f) Set FUEL QUANTITY knob to NORM.
74. (Optional) Verify DBU (Digital Backup Software) system operation. 73c
The DBU is used if problems arise with the primary Flight Control 73d
System (FLCS) software.
a) Set DIGITAL BACKUP switch to BACKUP

b) Verify that DBU ON warning light illuminates.
c) Operate flight controls with the stick and rudder and 73e
confirm that all control surfaces respond normally. 73f
d) Set DIGITAL BACKUP switch to OFF. A/L (Aft Left) Pointer
e) Verify that DBU ON warning light extinguishes. 73f
74a
Total Fuel Quantity Indicator (lbs) F/R (Front Right) Pointer

74b when Selector Knob set to EXT CTR
110
I – PERFORM AIRCRAFT POST-START CHECKS 75g
75. (Optional) Verify Trim system operation

VIPER
a) Set TRIM/AP DISC (Trim/Autopilot Disconnect) switch to DISC

F-16C
b) Use your trim hat on the stick to trim in both pitch and roll axis.
c) Verify that there is no control surface motion and no movement on
the TRIM wheel or indicators.
d) Set TRIM/AP DISC (Trim/Autopilot Disconnect) switch to NORM 75c
e) Use your trim hat on the stick to trim in both pitch and roll axis. 75f
f) Verify that there is control surface motion and movement on the 75d
TRIM wheel or indicators. 75a
g) Center trim for pitch and roll, then use YAW TRIM knob to check and 75g
center trim for yaw.
76. (Optional) Verify MPO (Manual Pitch Override) system operation
a) Push the stick full forward and hold it in that position. Horizontal tail 75g
should deflect down.
b) Set and hold MPO (Manual Pitch Override) switch to OVRD position.
c) Verify that horizontal tail trailing edges move farther down.

d) Release stick and MPO switch (it will spring back to NORM). 76b
e) Confirm that horizontal tail returns to its original position.
75b
75e
76d
76a
76a
111
77e
I – PERFORM AIRCRAFT POST-START CHECKS 77d
77. (Optional) Verify EPU (Emergency Power Unit) system operation. This test
VIPER
will verify that the EPU can provide electrical power in case of an engine
F-16C
failure, and it also tests the EPU generator and EPU PMG (Permanent
Magnet Generator) output to FLCS on the ground without using hydrazine.
a) Check EPU Fuel (Hydrazine) Quantity reads between 95 and 102 %
b) Set OXYGEN switch to 100 %
c) Hold down wheel brakes and increase engine RPM 10 % above
normal IDLE power
d) Set EPU/GEN TEST (Emergency Power Unit/Generator) switch to 77f
EPU/GEN and hold it in position.
e) Verify that EPU AIR light illuminates 77i
f) Verify EPU RUN light illuminates for a minimum of 5 seconds
g) Verify EPU GEN (Generator) light remains extinguished (may come
on momentarily at the start of the test) 77g
h) Verify EPU PMG (Permanent Magnet Generator) light remains
77h
extinguished (may come on momentarily at the start of the test)
i) Verify FLCS PWR (Flight Control System Power) lights illuminate
j) Release EPU/GEN TEST switch – OFF 77b
k) Return throttle to IDLE
l) Set OXYGEN back to NORMAL
77j
77a 77c
77l
112
TAXI
1. Verify that Parking Brake / Anti-Skid Switch is DISENGAGED
VIPER
(ANTI-SKID).
F-16C
Note: The parking brake automatically disengages if engine RPM

is greater than 85 % (which you reached when performing the
engine run-up checks) or if the switch is manually set to the ANTI-
SKID (Middle) position.
2. Turn on Taxi Light (DOWN) 3
3. Press the NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button (Nosewheel
Steering, Air Refueling Disconnect & Missile Step) on the stick to
engage nosewheel steering for taxiing; this will allow you to turn
using rudder pedals. The “NWS” Status light indicates nosewheel
steering is active.
PART 5 – TAXI & TAKEOFF
2
113
TAXI
4. Set Formation, Anti-Collision & Position Lights – As Required.
VIPER
a) Set Anti-Collision Switch – 1 (or any other flash pattern setting)

F-16C
b) Set Position Lights Switch – FLASH (when parked or during taxi)

c) Set Wing/Tail Position Lights Switch – BRT (Bright)
d) Set Fuselage Position Lights Switch – BRT (Bright)
e) Set Formation Lights Brightness Control Knob – BRT (Bright)
f) Set Master Lights Switch – NORM (sets pattern with visible
strobes) for day operations
5. Throttle up slightly above IDLE to start taxiing.
6. Perform taxi turns at 10 kts or less.
7. Taxi speed is generally kept below 25 kts.
4a 4b
4c
4d
4e
4f
114
TAKEOFF
1. Line up on the runway
VIPER
2. Turn OFF taxi light (MIDDLE).

F-16C
3
3. Set Position Lights Switch - STEADY
4. Set Probe Heat switch – PROBE HEAT
5. Verify Nosewheel Steering is engaged
6. Check that Speed Brakes are CLOSED (Retracted)
7. Check the Status panel and confirm that correct Flight
Control System mode is selected
• CAT I for air-to-air loadouts
• CAT III for air-to-ground/heavy loadouts 5
8. Set RADAR ALTIMETER switch to ON (FWD) 6
8
2
6
115
TAKEOFF
9. Hold wheel brakes
VIPER
10. Throttle up to 90 % RPM

F-16C
11. Confirm that engine spools up correctly

a) HYD/OIL PRESS warning light is OFF
b) Oil pressure is between 25 and 65 psi
11a
c) FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet Temperature) is 935 deg C or less
d) Hydraulic Pressure for systems A & B is between 2850
and 3250 psi
12. Throttle up to either MIL (Military) Power if using a light load or
Full Afterburner if using heavy loads or using a short runway.
13. Release wheel brakes
11b
MAX AB
10
12
11c
11d
MIL (Military)
IDLE Detent
Power Detent
AB (Afterburner) Detent 116

TAKEOFF
14. When reaching 70 kts, press the NWS A/R DISC & MSL
VIPER
STEP Button on the stick to disengage nosewheel

F-16C
steering. Confirm that NWS indication extinguishes 14

15. Your takeoff speed is a function of your aircraft weight,
which can be obtained from the ground crew when
choosing your loadout.
• In our case, we have a takeoff weight of approx.
34,000 lbs
• Using the Takeoff Speed table, we can determine
that our takeoff speed for 34,000 lbs is approx.
173 kts
16. Gently pull back on the stick and establish a takeoff
attitude (8-12 degrees of pitch).
• When using MIL power, pull back on the stick at
approx. 10 kts below the takeoff speed (163 kts
in our case)
• When using afterburner, pull back on the stick at
approx. 15 kts below the takeoff speed (158 kts)
15b Takeoff Speed Table

14
Aircraft Weight (lbs) 20000 24000 28000 32000 36000 40000 44000
14
Takeoff Speed (kias) 128 142 156 168 178 188 198
15a
117
TAKEOFF
17. Ensure a positive rate of climb, and then raise the
VIPER
landing gear.
F-16C
• Trailing edge flaps retract at the same

time as the landing gear and may cause
the aircraft to settle and scrape the
runway when lift is lost.
• Make sure the landing gear is retracted
before reaching 300 kts, since higher
airspeeds may cause structural damage to
the landing gear doors.
Landing Gear Down & Locked Landing Gear Lever UP

Landing Gear In Transition
Landing Gear Up & Locked
Landing Gear Lever UP
Landing Gear Lever Down
118
F-16C
PART 5 – TAXI & TAKEOFF VIPER
TAKEOFF
119
F-16C
PART 6 – LANDING VIPER
120
LANDING PATTERN
1.Initial Approach
VIPER
F-16C
2.Overhead Break
3.Downwind Leg
4.Base Turn
5.Final Turn
6.Short Final
7.Roll-Out
PART 6 – LANDING
121
2d
Acceleration (G)
LANDING 1a
Horizon Line
1. Initial Approach
VIPER
a) Set RADAR ALTIMETER switch to ON (FWD)

F-16C
b) Align your aircraft with the landing runway Flight Path Marker
at 1500 ft above ground level and maintain
300 kts
2. Overhead Break
a) Break left or right over the desired
touchdown point
b) Set throttle to 80 % RPM
c) Deploy Speedbrakes
d) Fly the break at about 70 deg of bank, pulling 1b
approx. 3 to 4 Gs.
e) Align the HUD (Heads-Up Display) Flight Path
Marker with the Horizon Line to maintain a
level turn Bank Angle
Airspeed (kts)
Radar Altitude (ft)
PART 6 – LANDING
2c Speed Brake Deployed
2c
122
3b
LANDING Flight Path Marker
3. Downwind Leg
VIPER
a) Roll out on the downwind leg opposite the landing

F-16C
heading at about 200-220 kts and 1500 ft AGL

b) Extend landing gear
c) Turn on LANDING light (UP). AOA Indexer
d) Reduce speed as required to prevent excessive
airspeed buildup in the base turn
e) Trim to an angle of attack (AOA) of 11 deg. Angle of
3c
Attack can be monitored with the three following
indications:
HUD AOA Bracket
• The AOA Indicator
• The AOA Indexer
• The HUD (Heads-Up Display) AOA Bracket (with 3e 3b
Flight Path Marker)
AOA Indicator (deg)

PART 6 – LANDING
123
LANDING
4. Base Turn
VIPER
a) Initiate base turn when abeam the rollout point. You may estimate this position by starting the turn when your wingtip is at the end of the runway.
F-16C
b) Lower the nose to 8-10 deg of pitch and fly the turn at 11 deg AOA
5. Final Turn
a) Use throttle to control airspeed while using the stick to maintain a pitch of 8-10 deg nose low and 11 deg AOA through the turn
b) Roll out on final and raise the nose to maintain proper glide path (300 ft AGL, 1 nm from the touchdown point)
c) Align the HUD Flight Path Marker and the 2.5 deg pitch ladder lines with the runway threshold to ensure proper glidepath while maintaining 11 deg AOA
5c
2.5 deg Pitch Ladder Line

Flight Path Marker
2.5 deg Pitch Ladder Line
AOA Indexer
PART 6 – LANDING
HUD AOA Bracket
124
LANDING
6. Short Final
VIPER
a) When flying over the “overrun” (portion of the runway before the primary surface starts), shift the Flight Path Marker forward to a point 300-500 ft down the runway.
F-16C
b) Gently pull back on the stick to flare and reduce the descent rate. DO NOT level off!
c) Pull the throttle back to IDLE and touchdown with a maximum AOA of 13 deg (green circle). More than 15 deg AOA during the landing roll-out may cause the speedbrakes or engine
nozzle to smash the runway.
Runway
6c
Threshold
“Overrun”
AOA Indexer
HUD AOA Bracket Flight Path Marker

PART 6 – LANDING
125
LANDING
7. Roll-Out
VIPER
a) Maintain 13 deg nose-up attitude for a two-point aerodynamic

F-16C
braking until your airspeed has reduced to approx. 100 kts. This
step is very important since the F-16’s brakes are not very
effective.
b) Reduce back stick pressure and lower the nosewheel to the runway.
c) Open speedbrakes fully and maintain full aft stick for maximum
braking effectiveness.
d) Apply moderate to heavy braking to slow the aircraft.
e) Engage nosewheel steering when below 30 kts and taxi off the
runway.
7e
PART 6 – LANDING
126
F-16C
PART 6 – LANDING VIPER
LANDING
127
F-16C
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT VIPER
128
GENERAL ELECTRIC F110-GE-129 ENGINE
The F-16C modelled in DCS is powered by the General Electric F110-GE-129 afterburning turbofan engine. The F110
VIPER
F-16C
powers more than 70% of today’s most advanced USAF F-16C/D aircraft. Derivatives of the F110 also powered the F-14B
and the South Korean F-15K.
Initially, the F-16 entered service powered by the Pratt & Whitney F100. Seeking a way to drive unit costs down, the
USAF implemented the Alternative Fighter Engine (AFE) program in 1984, under which the engine contract would be
awarded through competition.
Initial orders were for the F110-GE-100 rated at 28,000 lbf (125 kN). Later versions of the F110 include the F110-GE-129
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT
delivering 29,000 lbf (129 kN) thrust.
F110-GE Engine
Credit: F-16.net forums
129
GENERAL ELECTRIC F110-GE-129 ENGINE
The twin-spool F110 turbofan assembly has a 3-stage fan, 9 high-pressure compressor stages, a single high-pressure turbine stage and 2 low-pressure turbine stages. The engine is equipped with an
VIPER
F-16C
annular combustion chamber and an augmentor (afterburner). The pressure ratio at maximum power is 30.7, while the Thrust-to-Weight Radio is 7.29.
Take note that the F-16 is not equipped with any auto-throttle system.
Compressor Assembly
Fan Assembly
Augmentor Exhaust Duct
Turbine Frame A8 Actuator
(Afterburner) Liner
Forward Fairing (4 each)
Chamber
Exhaust
Exhaust Nozzle
Turbine Turbine
F110-GE-129 Engine Cutaway Actuator Duct
Assembly Frame
Credit: USAF AIB Hydraulic Lines 130
(United States Air Force Aircraft Investigation Board)
ENGINE INSTRUMENTS & PARAMETERS Fuel Flow Indicator
(lbs/hour)
HYD/OIL PRESS Light
VIPER
F-16C
• Low Oil Pressure: Illuminates when oil pressure has

ENG FIRE Light
been below approximately 10 psi for 30 sec.
Engine fire detected
Extinguishes when oil pressure exceeds 20 psi approx.
• Low Hydraulic Pressure: Illuminates when hydraulic
pressure for either system A or B decreases below 1000
psi.
Engine Oil Pressure
Indicator (psi)
Engine Nozzle Position

ENGINE Light Indicator (% Open)
RPM and FTIT indicator signals indicate that an engine overtemperature or flameout has occurred. Illuminates
when the RPM decreases below IDLE, or approximately 2 seconds after FTIT indication exceeds 1100 °C.
ENGINE FAULT Caution

SEC Caution
Engine RPM Indicator (% RPM)
FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet Temperature)

Fuel/Oil Hot Caution Indicator (x100 deg C)
131
EEC Caution
VIPER
F-16C
ENGINE LIMITS
ENGINE LIMITS (ON GROUND)

CONDITION FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet Temperature) RPM Oil Pressure Remarks
(deg C) (%) (psi)
Engine Start 935 - - During cold start, oil pressure may be 100 psi for up to 2 minutes
Idle 650 - 15 (minimum) -

MIL/AB (Military/Afterburner) 980 108 25-65 At MIL power and above, oil pressure must increase 10 PSI minimum above IDLE oil pressure
Transient 980 109 25-65 -
Fluctuation +/- 10 +/- 1 +/- 5 Must remain within steady-state limits. Nozzle fluctuations limited to +/- 2 %
ENGINE LIMITS (IN FLIGHT)

CONDITION FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet Temperature) RPM Oil Pressure Remarks
(deg C) (%) (psi)
Engine Start 935 - - -
Idle - - 15 (minimum) -
MIL/AB (Military/Afterburner) 980 108 25-65 Oil pressure must increase as RPM increases
Transient 980 109 25-65 -
Fluctuation +/- 10 +/- 1 +/- 5 Must remain within steady-state limits. Zero oil pressure is allowable for periods up to 1
minute during flight at less than +1 G.
132
THROTTLE QUADRANT
Throttle Stripe Throttle Cutoff Release
VIPER
Indicates Throttle Position on Quadrant

F-16C
Pressed by using “RSHIFT+HOME” (throttle goes

to IDLE) or “RSHIFT+END” (throttle goes to OFF)
Throttle
MAX AB
OFF Detent AB (Afterburner) Detent

IDLE Detent
MIL (Military) Power Detent
133
ENGINE CONTROL MODES
There are two main engine modes, which are controlled by the Engine Control (ENG CONT) switch:
VIPER
F-16C
• PRI (Primary): Primary Mode provides unrestricted engine operation throughout the entire flight envelope.
• SEC (Secondary Engine Control): Secondary Mode provides 70 to 80 % of normal MIL thrust. This mode may
be set manually with the ENG CONT switch or automatically in case of certain failures being detected by the
DEEC (Digital Electronic Engine Control). This level provides a measure of protection against exceeding engine
operating limits and provides sufficient thrust for safe flight operations. This mode also closes exhaust nozzle
and inhibits afterburner operation. ENG CONT (Engine Control) Switch
• PRI: Primary Mode

Note: the MAX POWER Switch (also known as “VMax Switch”) is not functional on the F110-GE-129 engine • SEC: Secondary Mode
installed on our airplane. In certain Pratt & Whitney engines, this function is available and was mainly used as a
“Hail Mary switch” to get away as fast as possible. This mode could destroy the engine in a matter of minutes,
which is why it was mainly safetied off or completely disconnected/inhibited from the engine altogether.
AB (Afterburner) Reset Switch

• AB RESET: Attempts to clear DEEC (Digital
Electronic Engine Control) faults
• NORM: Normal (de-energized) position
• ENG DATA: Records engine data in the EDU
(Engine Diagnostic Unit)
Max Power Switch

Inoperative for F110-GE-129 engine
134
AFTERBURNER / AUGMENTOR AB (Afterburner) Detent
The afterburner is engaged by throttling past the MIL (Military) Power gate on the throttle quadrant. MAX AB (Afterburner) Detent
VIPER
F-16C
The geometry of the throttle quadrant means that depending on the position on the throttle on the
quadrant, the orientation/angle of the throttle must be varied to access certain power detents. To
push the throttle past the MIL Power Detent, the throttle needs to be angled to allow the throttle
stripe past the detent. Within DCS, this is done automatically for you as you throttle up.
Throttle Stripe
MIL (Military) Power Detent
AB – Afterburner ON
MAX AB (Afterburner) Detent
MIL Power – Afterburner OFF MAX AB – Afterburner ON 135

AFTERBURNER / AUGMENTOR Fuel Flow Indicator (lbs/hour)
There is no “afterburner” indication in the cockpit, but you can

VIPER
F-16C
monitor the fuel flow indication and the Nozzle Position

indications. Keep in mind that the fuel flow consumption will Engine Nozzle Position
increase dramatically; keep an eye on that fuel gauge!
Indicator (% Open)
Afterburner OFF Afterburner ON

136
EPU (EMERGENCY POWER UNIT)
The EPU is a hydrazine-powered, self-contained unit that can provide emergency
VIPER
F-16C
hydraulic and electrical power for flight control systems, when bleed air alone is not
enough. The EPU has enough fuel to run for about 10 to 15 minutes.
You would most often use this if you lose your engine, and the EPU would provide power
to the hydraulic and electrical systems, allowing you to keep flying the aircraft since the
flight control systems are not mechanically linked to the stick.
The main requirements for the EPU are that it should be simple, maintenance free, supply
power immediately and consistently for the required time. Use of Hydrazine assures this
while requiring careful handling, but it is very toxic and inflammable. EPU Exhaust Port
Important note: the EPU has a safety pin set on the ground, which needs to be removed
by the ground crew prior to the flight. This safety pin is not modelled yet in DCS.
Here is an interesting video on the EPU: https://youtu.be/o8SdArJGWt8
EPU Location
137
EPU (EMERGENCY POWER UNIT)
There are three main operating modes for the EPU, which are controlled by the EPU Switch.
VIPER
F-16C
During normal operation, you should leave the EPU switch to NORM.
• NORM: EPU HYDRAZN (Hydrazine) Light

• When in NORM mode, EPU system is armed for automatic operation (except during Illuminates when the EPU is commanding
engine shutdown on the ground). EPU (Emergency Power Unit) Switch hydrazine for operation (whether hydrazine is
• If an engine flameout is detected, the EPU will automatically run. • OFF available or not) or if a primary speed control
• With the Weight-On-Wheels and throttle in OFF, the EPU will not activate when the • NORM failure has occurred.
main and standby generators go offline. • ON
• ON:
• When ON, the EPU is commanded to run regardless of failure conditions.
• OFF:
• When on ground, prevents or terminates EPU operation
• When in flight and switch has remained OFF since takeoff, EPU operation is terminated EPU Air Light
or inhibited (except when main and standby generator failure is detected). Illuminates whenever the EPU has been
• OFF will not prevent or terminate EPU operation in flight for main and standby commanded to run with the EPU safety
generator failures if switch was cycled or placed to NORM any time since takeoff pin removed. It remains on even when the
EPU is augmented by hydrazine.
EPU (Emergency Power Unit)

Switch Split Safety Guard
EPU Fuel (Hydrazine)

Quantity Indicator (%)
EPU RUN Light

• Illuminates when the EPU turbine runs within the proper
range and the EPU hydraulic pressure is above 2000 psi
138
A windmilling start is used when 1
ENGINE RELIGHT PROCEDURE enough altitude and airspeed is
available. Otherwise, a JFS (Jet Fuel
Starter)-assisted start is required.
WINDMILLING RELIGHT
VIPER
F-16C
1. When engine flameout occurs, the EPU (Emergency Power Unit) will automatically
activate (provided the EPU switch is set to NORM) to provide you electrical and hydraulic
power for the flight control system. The EPU will be running until it runs out of
fuel/hydrazine (about 10 minutes). FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet
2. Verify ENGINE FEED Selector is set to NORM Temperature) Indicator
3. Throttle back to IDLE, then set throttle to CUTOFF (RSHIFT+END). (x100 deg C)
4. Immediately nose down to gain enough airspeed for the engine’s compressor blades to
generate enough RPM due to windmilling (air flow drives compressor blades). Ensure
you have enough airspeed to maintain a windmilling engine RPM above 20-25 %. Engine RPM
5. When engine RPM is windmilling above 20-25 %, move throttle from OFF position to Indicator (% RPM)
IDLE position (RSHIFT+HOME).
6. Confirm engine RPM and FTIT increase
7. When engine RPM increases above 60 %, throttle up and resume normal operation.
3
OFF Detent
5
IDLE Detent
139
A windmilling start is used when 1
ENGINE RELIGHT PROCEDURE enough altitude and airspeed is
available. Otherwise, a JFS (Jet Fuel
Starter)-assisted start is required.
JFS-ASSISTED RELIGHT
VIPER
F-16C
1. When engine flameout occurs, the EPU (Emergency Power Unit) will automatically
activate (provided the EPU switch is set to NORM) to provide you electrical and
hydraulic power for the flight control system. The EPU will be running until it runs out of
fuel/hydrazine (about 10 minutes). FTIT (Fan Turbine Inlet
2. Verify ENGINE FEED Selector is set to NORM Temperature) Indicator
3. Throttle back to IDLE, then set throttle to CUTOFF (RSHIFT+END). (x100 deg C)
4. Set aircraft flight parameters within JFS (Jet Fuel Starter) operation envelope:
• Altitude should be below 20000 ft, airspeed should be below 400 kts
5. Set JFS (Jet Fuel Starter) switch AFT to START2 (Left Click). Engine RPM
6. When the Jet Fuel Starter reaches IDLE RPM (within 30 seconds), the JFS RUN green Indicator (% RPM)
light should illuminate.
7. When JFS is operational, the Jet Fuel Starter accumulators will drive the hydraulic
starter motor to start the engine. Engine RPM will increase. 2
8. When engine RPM reaches 20 %, move throttle from OFF position to IDLE position
(RSHIFT+HOME).
9. The engine should light-off within 10 seconds. Engine RPM and FTIT (Fan Turbine
Inlet Temperature) should increase.
10. When engine RPM increases above 60 %, throttle up and resume normal operation.
3 8
OFF Detent IDLE Detent
140
FUEL SYSTEM
The F-16 is equipped with 6 internal tanks (left wing, right wing, aft fuselage, aft fuselage reservoir, forward fuselage, forward fuselage reservoir). External fuel tanks can be equipped under the
VIPER
F-16C
fuselage (300 Gal) and under the wings (370 Gal). Total fuel quantity is displayed on the fuel indicator. The Fuel Quantity Selector knob is used to choose what fuel quantity you wish you display.
TK370 External Drop Tank

(370 Gal / 2516 lbs)
TK300 External Drop Tank

(300 Gal / 2040 lbs) TK370 External Drop Tank 141
(370 Gal / 2516 lbs)
VIPER
F-16C
FUEL SYSTEM
A/L (Aft & Left) Pointer

F/R (Front & Right) Pointer

Fuel Quantity Selector Knob

• TEST: places both pointers at 2000 lbs, and totalizer should display 6000 lbs
• NORM: AL pointer indicates remaining fuel in the aft left reservoir and the A-1 fuselage tank, and the FR
pointer indicates the sum fuel in the forward right reservoir tank and the F-1 and F-2 fuselage tanks.
• RSVR: moves the AF and FR pointers to display fuel in the aft and forward reservoir tanks
External Fuel Transfer Switch • INT WING: Indicates quantity for interior left and right wing-mounted external fuel tanks
• NORM: allows external centerline tank to empty first • EXT WING: Indicates quantity for exterior left and right wing-mounted external fuel tanks
• Wing First: allows the external wing tanks to empty first. • EXT CTR: Indicates quantity for exterior fuselage-mounted center tank 142
VIPER
FUEL SYSTEM Centerline External Tank

F-16C
Ground Receptacle
A/L (Aft & Left) Pointer
F1 Fwd
Fuselage Tank
F2 Fwd
F/R (Front & Right) Pointer
External Wing Tank Fuselage Tank
Note: indicates center fuel tank load External Wing Tank

Air Receptacle
Fwd Reservoir
Aft Reservoir
Tank
Tank
Left Wing Tank Right Wing Tank
Forward & Right Fuel System

A1 Aft Fuselage
Aft & Left Fuel System Tank
Fuel Transfer on Aft & Left system

To Engine
Fuel Transfer on Fwd & Right system
Inbound transfer from Air Receptacle and Ground Receptacle
To Engine
Main Fuel
Shutoff Valve Fuel Flow Transmitter
143
VIPER
F-16C
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Master Switch

Guarded in MASTER position. When placed in OFF the fuel shutoff Tank Inerting Switch
valve is closed, preventing fuel from reaching the engine. Reduces internal tank pressurisation when ON. This will pump non-volatile Halon
1301 gas into the fuel tanks to reduce internal pressure and reduce risk for fire
during an emergency… like battle damage.
Air Refueling Door Control Switch

Open / Close
Also sets flight control gains to takeoff & landing mode
Engine Feed Selector Switch

Controls the way the fuel is pumped to the engine. Note that the fuel goes to the engine by gravity feed,
so the engine will not starve when the fuel pumps are OFF. Use of the pumps prevents fuel starvation
during negative G maneuvers and allows manual fuel balance whenever necessary.
• OFF - all fuel pumps are off.
• NORM - all pumps are on, the CG (Centre of Gravity) is maintained automatically.
• AFT - aft pumps are on. Fuel is transferred from the AFT tank to the engine. The CG moves forward.
• FWD – forward pumps are on. Fuel is transferred from the FWD tank to the engine. 144CG moves back.
BINGO FUEL
BINGO fuel is the amount of fuel that once reached triggers an immediate return to home
VIPER
F-16C
plate (home base). It takes into account the fuel needed to fly the return leg of the flight, the
5
fuel required to fly the briefed approach, the fuel to go to the alternate (if necessary) and the
emergency fuel which is not supposed to be used except in an emergency.
JOKER fuel is usually set above BINGO as a warning that the bingo is approaching. We usually
set it 1000 lbs above Bingo to allow 1 minute of combat time in afterburner.
Your “BINGO FUEL” can be set by:

1. Pressing the LIST button
2. Pressing “2” on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to select BNGO (Bingo Fuel) DED Page.
3. Entering the desired BINGO FUEL value via the ICP keypad, then pressing ENTR.
4. Setting the FUEL QTY SEL knob to NORM to ensure BINGO fuel warning computation is
based on fuselage fuel.
5. When fuel state falls below BINGO fuel limit, a FUEL caution will appear in the HUD and
the VMS (Voice Message System) will give a “BINGO, BINGO” aural cue.
2a 4
2a
3b
2b
3a
3c
145
F-16C
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT VIPER
FLIGHT PLAN BINGO FUEL CALCULATION
146
F-16C
PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS VIPER
147
AERODYNAMICS & AIRCRAFT LIMITS
AIRSPEED LIMITS
VIPER
F-16C
• Maximum Airspeed (VNE): 800 kts at sea level or Mach 2.05 above 30000 ft
• Canopy Open or in Transit: 70 kts (includes ground wind velocity)
• Landing Gear Extended or In Transit: 300 kts / Mach 0.65 (whichever is less)
• Air Refueling Door Opening/Closing: 400 kts / Mach 0.85 (whichever is less)
• Air Refueling Door Open: 400 kts / Mach 0.95 (whichever is less)
• Flight in Severe Turbulence (+3 G): 500 kts
• Crosswind limit: 25 kts
G LIMITS
PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS
• Structural Limits for the aircraft are +9 G / - 3 G.

• Takeoff & Landing:
• +4 G / 0 G for symmetric loadout
• +2.0 G / 0 G for asymmetric loadout
• Landing Gear Retraction & Extension:
• +4 G / 0 G for symmetric loadout
• +2.0 G / 0 G for asymmetric loadout
• If landing gear handle is raised near 2 Gs approaching 300 kts, actuator power may be insufficient to completely retract the landing gear until G load factor is reduced
• Negative G limits (with both reservoir tanks full)
• Afterburner thrust: 10 seconds
• MIL (Military) Power thrust or below: 30 seconds
• There can be an engine flameout if the afterburner is engaged for over 5 seconds during a negative G condition (or for over 12 seconds in zero G condition).
WEIGHT LIMITS
Maximum Takeoff Weight: 48,000 lbs
FLIGHT ENVELOPE
Service Ceiling: 59000+ ft 148

ALOW (ALTITUDE-LOW) ADVISORY SYSTEM Barometric Pressure Setting Control Knob
The Altitude-LOW (ALOW) page allows you (no pun intended) to set low altitude advisory settings. Here is a quick summary of how the system works.
VIPER
F-16C
1. Make sure CNI (Communication, Navigation & Identification) DED page is displayed, which can be selected by pressing Dobber Switch LEFT (RTN).
2. RDR ALT (Radar Altimeter) switch should be set to ON (FWD) for the ALOW system to be active.
3. Select ALOW page by pressing ALOW (2) button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
4. Altitude restrictions can be on the steerpoint of your choice, which can be selected with the DED Increment/Decrement Switch.
5. CARA ALOW (Combined Altitude Radar Altimeter – Altitude Low) is used as a warning setting for low altitude flying. When below this altitude setting,
the “AL” notation flashes and VMS (Voice Message System) gives an aural “ALTITUDE” call.
6. MSL FLOOR is your Minimum Safe Level Floor, and is used as a warning setting for approaches. A MSL FLOOR of 18,000 ft is generally used as a
reminder when flying below Transition Altitude, which is the altitude below which the pilot needs the switch to local barometric pressure setting
(QNH) for the altimeter calibration setup. The MSL FLOOR can be set at any altitude of your choice, and descending below this altitude will trigger a
VMS (Voice Message System) aural “ALTITUDE” call. Altimeter Barometric Pressure
7. CARA ALOW or MSL FLOOR settings can be modified by selecting their data field with the Dobber Switch UP/DOWN (asterisks indicate which field is
Setting Indicator (in Hg)
selected), then entering the desired value on the ICP keypad, then pressing ENTR button.
4 Steerpoint Selected for Altitude Restrictions
5 CARA ALOW Setting (Selected)

3
6 MSL FLOOR Setting
Dobber Switch 1
4 DED Increment/Decrement Switch 149
VIPER
F-16C
ALOW (ALTITUDE-LOW) ADVISORY SYSTEM
Pull Up Cues (X)

CARA ALOW (Altitude Low)

Height (ft)
150
VMS (VOICE MESSAGE SYSTEM)
The VMS (Voice Message System), also nicknamed “Bitching Betty”, provides aural warning messages. The system is
VIPER
F-16C
controlled with the VOICE MESSAGE switch.
Note: Setting the VOICE MESSAGE switch to INHIBIT (AFT) will mute all voice messages.
Voice Message System (VMS) Warnings

WARNING MESSAGE PRIORITY SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION
PULLUP 1 Ground proximity warning is activated.

ALTITUDE 2 Descent is occuring after takeoff, or radar altitude is below

entered radar ALOW value, or Barometric altitude is below the
entered MSL ALOW value.
WARNING 3 Any glareshield-mounted warning light is illuminated
JAMMER 4 Advises that a threat should be jammed and pilot consent is
required.
COUNTER 5 Advises that a dispense command should be initiated (CMDS
semi-automatic mode only).
CHAFF-FLARE 6 CMDS has initiated a dispense program.
LOW 7 Advises that expendable (countermeasure) low quantity exists.
OUT 8 Advises that expendable (countermeasure) type is completely
VMS (Voice Message System) Switch
spent.
• FWD: ON
LOCK 9 Radar has locked on to target. • AFT: INHIBIT (MUTED)
CAUTION 10 Any light on the caution light panel is illuminated (except IFF
caution light).
BINGO 11 Bingo fuel warning has been activated
DATA 12 Not simulated.
IFF 13 Identify-Friend-or-Foe system is not operable in flight (message
heard during ground test) 151
HOTAS
SSC (SIDE STICK CONTROLLER) CONTROLS
VIPER
F-16C
Weapon Release Button Trim Hat Switch

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
TMS (Target Management Switch) NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT • NWS: Nosewheel Steering Activation
Camera/Gun Trigger • A/R: When in flight and the AIR REFUEL switch
(Two Stages) in the OPEN position, depressing the button
• MSL (MISSILE) STEP: When in flight, depressing
the button in EO or A-A mode selects the next
weapon station. Depressing the button in A-G
Mode cycles between CCRP, CCIP and DTOS.
CMS (Countermeasures Switch)

PART 9 – HOTAS
FWD/AFT/LEFT/RIGHT
Paddle Switch
Overrides Autopilot
when depressed
Expand/FOV (Field-of-View) Button

Cycles through available field-of-view for the
sensor of system that is currently selected 152
HOTAS
SSC (SIDE STICK CONTROLLER) CONTROLS
VIPER
F-16C

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
PART 9 – HOTAS

FWD/AFT/LEFT/RIGHT
153
HOTAS Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way)
TQS (THROTTLE QUADRANT SYSTEM) CONTROLS • AFT: transmits on UHF radio
• FWD: transmits on VHF radio
VIPER
F-16C
• RIGHT (INBOARD) SHORT: Filters datalink information on Fire

Control Radar (FCR) display
• LEFT (OUTBOARD) SHORT: Toggles datalink tracks on and off

Can be rotated or depressed
• Functions depend on the master
mode and selected system
Dogfight Switch
• DOGFIGHT (Outboard): provides symbology on HUD for
both 20 mm gun firing and air-to-air missile delivery
• Missile Override (Inboard): provides symbology on HUD
for air-to-air missile firing only
• Center: Returns to last selected Master Mode
PART 9 – HOTAS
Radar Antenna Elevation Knob

Throttle
Speed Brake Switch

Radar Cursor/Enable Switch 3-Position, Aft Momentary
Depress, Multidirectional • Open (AFT): speed brakes open/deployed
• Used for slewing of the fire control radar cursor • Close (FWD): speed brakes close/retract
or targeting pod/weapon video. • Center: speed brakes remain in current position
154
F-16C
PART 10 – RADAR & SENSORS VIPER
155
SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 - Sensors • 3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT Targeting Pod
VIPER
F-16C
• 1.1 – Introduction to Sensors • 3.1 – Introduction

• 1.2 – Sensors Display Selection • 3.2 – Displays
• 1.3 – Sensor Master Modes • 3.3 – Controls
• 1.4 – HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) • 3.4 – Target Designation Clarifications
• 1.5 – My Sensors Control Setup • 3.5 – Start-Up & Lasing Procedure
• 3.6 – Steerpoint Slaving Mode & Cursor Zero (CZ)
• 2 - AN/APG-68 Fire Control Radar (FCR) • 3.7 – Snowplow Mode
• 2.1 – Air-to-Air Modes • 3.8 – Laser Spot Search (LSS) Mode
• 2.1.1 – Radar Display & Performance • 3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation
• 2.1.2 – Main Modes Overview • 3.9.1 – Operation Modes
• 2.1.3 – CRM (Combined Radar Mode) • 3.9.2 – Point Track (Slaved from Radar)
• 2.1.3.1 – RWS Mode • 3.9.3 – Target Correlation & Other Tips
• 2.1.3.2 – TWS Mode
•
PART 10 – RADAR & SENSORS
• 2.1.4 – SAM Mode 4 - AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile

• 2.1.5 – STT Mode (Radar Lock) • 4.1 – Displays
• 2.1.6 – ACM (Air Combat Mode) Modes • 4.2 – Controls
• 2.1.6.1 – Mode Selection
• 2.1.6.2 – Boresight (BORE) Sub-Mode
• 2.1.6.3 – Vertical Scan Sub-Mode
• 2.1.6.4 – HUD Scan Sub-Mode
• 2.1.6.5 – Slewable Sub-Mode
• 2.1.7 – EXP (Expand) Feature
• 2.1.8 – HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) Radar Lock
• 2.1.9 – Radar Lingo and Terminology
• 2.2 – Air-to-Ground Modes
• 2.2.1 – GM (Ground Mapping) Mode
• 2.2.2 – GMT (Ground Moving Target) Mode
• 2.2.3 – BCN (Beacon) Mode
• 2.3 – Air-to-Sea Modes
• 2.3.1 – SEA Mode
156
1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS
The F-16 is by definition one of the most versatile aircraft when it comes to armament and sensors. Here is an overview of how the Viper can “see” the outside world.
VIPER
F-16C
• AN/APG-68 FCR (Fire Control Radar): pulse-Doppler, look-down/shoot-down radar with both BVR (Beyond Visual Range) and close in ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering)
modes of operation for air-to-air combat. Air-to-Ground and Air-to-Sea modes are also implemented, which makes it a very powerful tool at your disposal.
• Air-to-Air Modes currently implemented are RWS (Range While Search), TWS (Track While Scan), SAM (Situational Awareness Mode), STT (Single Target Track) and
ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering).
• AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT Targeting Pod: Targeting system

developed to provide precision strike capability. Target
FCR (Fire Control Radar)
designation is achieved by using a laser designator/range
finder or an infrared laser marker, which can be created by
the pod itself. It is also capable of displaying a FLIR
(Forward-Looking Infrared) thermal imagery.
• AGM-65D Maverick Seeker Head feed: Maverick air-to-

ground missiles have seeker heads that have video

capability and that can be used as supplemental sensors.
• HTS (HARM Targeting System) Pod: This pod is used by

High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missiles (HARM) to home on
radar emitters for SEAD (Suppression of Enemy Air
Defenses) operations.
HTS (HARM Targeting System) Pod

LITENING AT Targeting Pod
157
This section will introduce you to various sensors. You will get the
VIPER
F-16C
« what », but the « how » will be demonstrated later in the

Weapons section since the use and application of sensors will
make more sense to you once you start using them for a specific
purpose. Just keep in mind that your sensors can be monitored
from the HUD (Heads-Up Display) and various displays, while they
can be operated from the HOTAS stick and throttle.
Sensor Power Panel

DISPLAYS
158
Radar Cursor/Enable Switch Radar Antenna Elevation Knob
VIPER
F-16C
FCR (Fire Control Radar) Page

Right MFD (Multifunction Display)

Displayed: HSD Page
Left MFD (Multifunction Display) Not set as SOI (no SOI Box)
Displayed: FCR (Fire Control Radar) Page
Set as SOI (Sensor of Interest)
TMS (Target Management Switch) 159

HUD SOI (Sensor of Interest) HUD Asterisk
1.2 – SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION
The SOI (Sensor of Interest) is the sensor or display for which the hands-on controls are currently
VIPER
F-16C
active. Similar functions are activated by the same switches, whenever possible, to provide consistent
operation regardless of the SOI or mode selected. The current SOI can be identified by the SOI Box
around the MFD (Multifunction Display) screen or the asterisk in the top left of the HUD.
The SOI is changed from display to display with the Display Management Switch (DMS). Basic
functionality as it applies to SOI is:
• DMS UP: SOI transitions to the HUD if in A-G Master Mode (asterisk will be visible on HUD when SOI)
• DMS DOWN: SOI transitions from the HUD to the highest priority MFD. DMS DOWN again swaps SOI
to the other MFD. A white “SOI” box will be visible on the display when MFD is SOI.
MFD SOI (Sensor of Interest) Box
A-G (Air-to-Ground)
Master Mode Button
A-A (Air-to-Air)
Master Mode Button 160
VIPER
F-16C
1.2 – SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION
MFD NOT SOI (Sensor is

not the Sensor of Interest)
161
1.3 – SENSOR MASTER MODES
There are three Master Modes in the F-16:
VIPER
F-16C
• A-A (Air-to-Air) Mode, which is used for air-to-air missile and radar employment.
• A-G (Air-to-Ground) Mode, which is used for air-to-ground weapons. Upon selection of the A-G
master mode, the SMS (Stores Management Set) Air-to-Ground (SMS A-G) page is displayed on the
right MFD.
• NAV (Navigation) Mode, which is used for navigation (shocking, I know!).
Notes
• Depressing the A-A button selects the Air-to-Air Master Mode,
and the A-G button selects the Air-to-Ground Master Mode. This A-A (Air-to-Air)
configures the aircraft systems and displays for the selected Master Mode Button
attack mode in one easy step.
• Depressing the same button a second time returns to the NAV
(Navigation) Master Mode. A-G (Air-to-Ground)
• When Dogfight or missile override mode is selected with the Dogfight Switch Master Mode Button
DOGFIGHT Switch, request for master mode changes via the 3-Position switch, Slide
Integrated Control Panel (ICP) buttons will be ignored.
NAV (Navigation) Master Mode A-G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode A-A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode
162
NO RAD indication
1.3 – SENSOR MASTER MODES Shows that the HUD Scan ACM Radar
Mode (30°x 20°) has been selected
There are two Override Modes: DGFT (Dogfight) and MSL OVRD automatically upon DGFT Mode selection
VIPER
F-16C
(Missile Override). Both can be selected with the Dogfight

Switch. 20 mm Gun Funnel Symbology
• DGFT (Dogfight) Override Mode is selected by pressing the Aircraft Acceleration
Dogfight switch Outboard to the DOGFIGHT position. Upon (G)
DGFT mode selection:
• A-A, A-G and NAV Master Modes are overridden DGFT Override
• ACM (Air Combat Mode) Radar mode is automatically selected
Mode Indication
• Symbology on the HUD is provided for both 20 mm gun firing
and air-to-air missile AAA (Attitude Awareness Arc)
• MSL OVRD (Missile Override) Override Mode is selected by Displays aircraft attitude. Extremities of
the arc line up on the horizon. Arc grows
pressing the Dogfight switch Inboard to the MSL OVRD
as aircraft nose is down and shrinks as
position. Upon mode selection: nose is up.
• A-A, A-G and NAV Master Modes are overridden
• Symbology on the HUD is provided for air-to-air missile
Dogfight Switch
• DOGFIGHT (Outboard): provides symbology on HUD for both 20 mm gun
firing and air-to-air missile delivery
ACM (Air Combat Mode) Indication
• Missile Override (Inboard): provides symbology on HUD for air-to-air
Automatically selected upon DGFT Mode selection
missile firing only
163
1.4 – HMD (HELMET-MOUNTED DISPLAY) HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing
The HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) can be used by turning the HMCS
VIPER
F-16C
Symbology Brightness Control Knob to BRT. The HMCS (Helmet-Mounted

Cueing System) allows the pilot to project the Heads-Up Display in his field
of vision at all times. It also allows the slaving of sensors and weapons to
the helmet’s line of sight.
In the F-16, the HMCS is very useful for using missiles like the AIM-9X, an
upgraded version of the AIM-9 with TVC (Thrust Vectoring Control)
allowing 80 deg off-boresight shots.
Note: The HMCS projection can be toggled on and off pressing the DMS
(Display Management Switch) DOWN LONG (for more than 0.5 sec).
HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System)

HUD Projection on Helmet

Note:
other. You can select what to equip via Ground Crew request. 164
1.5 – MY SENSORS CONTROL SETUP
Real Aircraft Controls

VIPER
F-16C

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT

Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way) • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In
• Transmit Switch – IFF IN (INBOARD): Cycles filter options • MAN RNG Counter-Clockwise: Zooms Out
• Transmit Switch – IFF OUT (OUTBOARD): Removes datalink tracks • UNCAGE (Depressed): Laser Spot Search
Mode (“C” binding)
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
Camera/Gun Trigger
(Two Stages)
Button
Radar Cursor/Enable Switch

Depress, Multidirectional

Dogfight Switch
• DOGFIGHT (Outboard): provides symbology on HUD
for both 20 mm gun firing and air-to-air missile
delivery
• Missile Override (Inboard): provides symbology on
HUD for air-to-air missile firing only165
1.5 – MY SENSORS CONTROL SETUP
My Controls
VIPER
F-16C
DMS UP
DMS RIGHT
DMS DOWN
DMS LEFT
ANT ELEV Knob (Radar Antenna Elevation)

TMS UP
Weapon
WPN Release
REL Button
TMS RIGHT
TMS DOWN
TMS LEFT
Camera/Gun Trigger Transmit Switch - UHF

(Two Detents)
Transmit Switch – IFF IN
S Transmit Switch - VHF ENABLE Switch (Enter)
S Transmit Switch
Transmit – IFF– OUT
Switch IFF IN
S RDR Cursor Switch – Y Axis
S Transmit Switch – IFF OUT RDR Cursor Switch – X Axis
Expand/FOV Button
UNCAGE Switch

MAN RNG Knob – CW (Zoom In) 166
FCR (Fire Control
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) Radar) Power Switch
2.1.1 – Air-to-Air Radar Display & Performance
VIPER
F-16C
The air-to-air radar uses a B-Scope representation, which is a top-down view of what’s in front of you. A-A (Air-to-Air)
Master Mode Button
• Radar Data can be shown on the FCR (Fire Control Radar) page and on the HUD (Heads-Up Display).
• The FCR Power Switch must be set FWD and the Master Mode needs to be set to A-A (Air-to-Air) for the radar to be
functional. Take note that FCR is inhibited while aircraft is on the ground.
B-Scope (Top-Down) Representation

ACQ (Acquisition) Cursor
Forward
Contact
Left/Right (Azimuth)
167
Dogfight Switch
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) 3-Position switch, Slide
• DOGFIGHT (Outboard): provides symbology on HUD for both 20 mm gun firing and air-to-air missile delivery
2.1.1 – Air-to-Air Radar Display & Performance • Missile Override (Inboard): provides symbology on HUD for air-to-air missile firing only
VIPER

F-16C
• You can slew your radar using the Radar Cursor/Enable Switch. This will move the ACQ (Acquisition) cursor
on the FCR page.
• The Radar Antenna Elevation Knob on the throttle is used to control where your radar is scanning vertically.
• The DMS (Display Management Switch) is used to select which display (Multifunction Display or Heads-Up
Display) is the current Sensor of Interest (SOI).
• The TMS (Target Management Switch) is used for RWS (Range While Search) spotlight, Target Rejection,
Target Interrogation, TWS (Track While Scan) Bug Step and RWS/TWS swap functionalities.
• TMS UP is used to radar lock a target
• TMS DOWN is used to unlock a locked target
• The Expand/FOV Button is used to “expand” (zoom in) on a specific section of your radar screen.
• The DOGFIGHT Switch is used to select HUD Symbology for either DOGFIGHT mode (used for gun & air-to-
air missile delivery) or MISSILE OVERRIDE mode (use for air-to-air missile delivery only).
• Used for slewing of the fire control radar cursor Radar Antenna Elevation Knob
or targeting pod/weapon video. Rotates, Center Detent

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ACQ (Acquisition) Cursor

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT

Cycles through available field-of-view for the 168
sensor of system that is currently selected
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) Range: 160 nm
2.1.1 – Air-to-Air Radar Display & Performance Total Azimuth: 120 deg
VIPER
F-16C
The F-16’s radar has a range of 160 nautical miles, a horizontal

arc of 120 degrees and a variable vertical arc that is
customizable. You can control the radar scan pattern (bars),
which will give you a narrower or wider scanning area.
The numbers next to the Acquisition Cursor (ACQ) correspond

to the altitudes (in thousands of feet) of the top and bottom of
the radar beam at the distance of the target designator. As you
move the cursor closer and further you will see the numbers
change. The practical application is that the radar will not detect
targets above or below these altitudes which is why you need to
slew the radar antenna up and down to do a complete search.
Note: Ranges are not to scale
Acquisition (ACQ) Cursor

Upper number: Upper altitude covered by radar (46000 ft)
Lower number: Lower altitude covered by radar (-27000 ft)
Range: 160 nm
169
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR)
VIPER
F-16C

Lower number: Lower altitude covered by radar (-27000 ft)
Range: Full Scale (80 nm)

Increase Range Scale
Range Scale Reference: 80 nm

(can be set to 5/10/20/40/80/160 nm)
Range: 3/4 Scale (60 nm)
Decrease Range Scale
Radar Contact
Based on Azimuth and Range Scale, we can deduce that
the contact is 44 nm in front of us, 15 degrees to our right

Radar Azimuth (Total Coverage from left to right)
(can be set to +/- 10/20/25/30/60 deg) Range: 1/2 Scale (40 nm)
A3 stands for “Azimuth 30 degrees”
Spotlight Scan Lines

Elevation Bar Scan
Cycles between 1, 2, 3 and 4 bars of faster scanning
4B stands for “4 bars”. Range: 1/4 Scale (20 nm)
Antenna Elevation Caret
IFF Interrogation Mode Selected

M4: Mode 4
Range: 0 nm
Bearing & Range from Ownship to Bullseye
• 28: you are 28 nm from Bullseye
• 018: you have a bearing of 18 degrees from
Bullseye Radar Operational Status B-Sweep (Instantaneous azimuth
position of radar antenna) 170
VIPER
F-16C
Radar Sub-Mode Selector FCR Mode: OVRD Function: Radar Override Button prevent the
Normal or Expanded Mode radar from transmitting in any mode
RWS: Range While Search
TWS: Track While Scan
CNTL: Accesses FCR Control Menu
Radar Mode Selected

• CRM: Combined Radar Mode
• ACM: Air Combat Mode
• GM: Ground Mapping
• GMT: Ground Moving Target
• SEA: Sea Mode
• BCN: Beacon Mode
• STBY: Standby Mode
Radar Contact
Navigation Steerpoint
Horizon Line
SOI (Sensor of Interest) Control Indication Box
The current SOI can be identified by the box around the MFD
screen. The SOI is changed from display to display with the
Display Management Switch (DMS).
• DMS DOWN swaps Multifunction Displays (MFDs) as the
SOI
• DMS UP sets the Heads-Up Display (HUD) as the SOI
Radar Contact Vector Line
(Direction of Target) FCR Page Selector 171
VIPER
F-16C
The F-16 Spotlight Scan lines can be visible on both the FCR page and on the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) page as well.
Radar Spotlight Scan Lines

FCR (Fire Control Radar) Page 172

HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) Page
VIPER
F-16C
Track symbols displayed on the FCR page may be filtered using the UHF/VHF Transmit switch. This affects tracks
displayed on the radar display only and does not affect those displayed on the HSD.
Positioning the Transmit switch inboard short (less than .5 sec) rotates between three filter options.
Positioning the Transmit Switch outboard short (less than .5 sec) selects NONE and removes all datalink tracks.
Selecting outboard short again returns to the previously selected filter option.
Datalink Tracks
Filter Options
• ALL: All Datalink symbols are displayed
• FTR+: Datalink Surveillance tracks are removed
Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way)
• TGTS: Datalink Surveillance and PPLI tracks are
• Transmit Switch – IFF IN (INBOARD): Cycles filter options
removed
• Transmit Switch – IFF OUT (OUTBOARD): Removes datalink tracks
• NONE: No Datalink symbols are displayed
Datalink Contacts
filtered out
173
2.1.2 – Air-to-Air Main Modes Overview
VIPER
F-16C
CRM (Combined Radar Mode) ACM (Air Combat Mode)
RWS (Range While Search) TWS (Track While Scan) Vertical Scan Boresight HUD Scan Slewable
SAM (Situational Awareness Mode) STT (Single Target Track)

Acquisition Mode Acquisition Mode
174
VIPER
F-16C
The radar has the following main modes: BVR (Beyond Visual Range, used for long-distance engagements), and ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering, used for close air
engagements), and STT (Single Target Track).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BVR Search sub-modes include:
• CRM (Combined Radar Mode): CRM mode is selected by default at power-up. It is designed to reduce pilot workload by combining air-to-air submodes used for search
under one interface. CRM sub-modes include RWS (Range While Search) and TWS (Track While Scan). These may also be cycled using the HOTAS by holding TMS (Target
Management Switch) right for more than one second.
• RWS (Range While Search): RWS radar mode allows for detection of contacts in a large volume. It is the default search mode for air-to-air or when an air-to-air missile is
placed in priority. RWS mode provides all-aspect (nose-on, tail-on) and all altitude (look-up, look-down) target detection. The display shows range as the vertical axis and
azimuth angle on the horizontal.
• TWS (Track While Scan): TWS maintains an actual track on several aircraft while still searching for others. While in TWS mode, the radar can maintain up to 10 trackfiles
(targets). The radar allocates part of its power to tracking the target or targets while part of its power is allocated to scanning, unlike the straight tracking mode, when the
radar directs all its power to tracking the acquired targets. In the TWS mode the radar has a possibility to acquire additional targets as well as providing an overall view of
the airspace and helping maintain better situational awareness. Since the radar is sharing it's computing time between targets, the accuracy is less precise than for a single
target track (STT) mode of operation. TWS mode allows for trackfiles to be kept at a high update rate. To accomplish this, TWS artificially limits the scan volume
(bars/azimuth) and provides for automatic scan centering. It is also optimal for providing post-launch datalink for the AIM-120 AMRAAM missile while remaining in search.
• SAM (Situational Awareness Mode): SAM mode is a hybrid mode between RWS and STT. When locking a target in RWS mode, the radar enters SAM mode. In SAM mode,
radar will periodically scan the locked target while scanning the whole area, and the controls are basically the same as RWS. In other words, target acquisition and lock is
initiated by placing the acquisition cursor over a target, positioning the TMS on the stick forward once, then releasing the TMS. This starts the Situational Awareness Mode
(SAM) acquisition sequence. During acquisition, the antenna is directed to the last known target position, and a 4-bar, ±10-degree Spotlight search is performed.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
175
VIPER
F-16C
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STT
STT (Single Target Track): STT mode is a traditional radar "lock" where the radar continuously scans a single target, resulting in a very high update rate; this makes it the
primary method of providing guidance to air-to-air weapons. STT maintains a trackfile for its target and automatically designates it. The radar is slaved to this trackfile; as
such, manual antenna elevation control is inhibited and the B-sweep follows the trackfile. Only the trackfile that is placed in STT is visible and all onboard trackfiles are
dropped. In STT, the FCR page format is presented in azimuth along the horizontal axis and range along the vertical axis.
Single Target Track is obtained by:

• Placing the acquisition cursor over a target (with the Radar Cursor switch), positioning the TMS (Target Management Switch) on the stick FWD twice in quick succession,
then releasing the TMS.

• using an Air Combat Maneuvering mode
STT is exited by pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) on the stick AFT.
• TMS DOWN once returns to SAM mode with the target bugged.
• TMS DOWN twice returns to RWS mode.
• The radar is returned to the last-entered search mode.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXP
EXP (Expanded) Feature: The radar provides the ability to enter an expanded field of view display that allows sorting and resolution of closely grouped contacts. This can be
thought of as a zoom feature that provides a 4:1 scale view centered around the radar cursor. This feature is available in all radar modes.
176
VIPER
F-16C
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ACM sub-modes include:
• Vertical Scan: Radar will scan in a 10°× 60° vertical area. The scan center is 23° above the HUD’s gun cross. This mode is indicated by a vertical line extending from the gun
cross to the bottom of the HUD. The lock range is 10 nautical miles. The radar automatically locks on to the first target in this zone. When locked, the target is
automatically tracked in STT mode.
• BORE (Boresight): BORE scan pattern searches a small one-beamwidth area located 3° below the HUD’s gun cross. An additional Boresight Cross is displayed on the HUD at
the center of the radar scan zone to aid in positioning the target in the radar beam. BORE is useful for quickly locking a target within visual range (WVR) and allows a
degree fine control as to the target being locked. The first target detected within 20 nautical miles is locked and automatically tracked in STT mode.
• HUD (Heads-Up Display Area Scan): Radar will scan the HUD area (30°× 20°). The lock range is 10 nautical miles. The radar automatically locks on to the first target in this
zone. When locked, the target is automatically tracked in STT mode. There is no special HUD symbology for this submode. This submode is less precise than the BORE
submode and may take longer to achieve a lock because of the larger target area for the radar scan to cover.
• Slewable: The scan pattern is approximately 20° high x 60° wide. When selected, the scan is centered directly in front of the aircraft on the horizon. The scan is slewable
via the CURSOR/ENABLE control on the throttle until a target is acquired. The amount of slew is limited by the radar gimbal limits. As with the other submodes, the radar
automatically locks on to the first target in this zone. When locked, the target is automatically tracked in STT mode. This mode is useful when you have a direction to look,
for example ‘bandits 2 o’clock high’, but have not picked them up visually yet.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177
2.1.3 – Air-to-Air CRM (Combined Radar Mode) 1 FCR (Fire Control
VIPER
F-16C
Radar) Power Switch

The Combined Radar Mode (CRM) is selected by default at power-up. It is designed
to reduce pilot workload by combining air-to-air submodes used for search under
one interface.
If you are using another radar mode, CRM Mode can be selected by:
1. Verifying that the FCR Power Switch is ON (FWD)
2. Selecting FCR page
3. Pressing OSB (Option Select Button) next to Radar Mode Selector Field
4. Pressing OSB next to CRM
Radar Mode Selected
5. CRM Sub-Modes can be toggled using the OSB next to the Radar Sub-Mode • CRM: Combined Radar Mode
Selector Field. • ACM: Air Combat Mode
• GM: Ground Mapping
• SEA: Sea Mode
3 • BCN: Beacon Mode 5

Radar Sub-Mode Selector
2 178
2.1.3 – Air-to-Air CRM (Combined Radar Mode)
VIPER
F-16C
CRM Sub-modes are:

• RWS (Range While Search)
• TWS (Track While Scan) Radar Mode Selected
• CRM: Combined Radar Mode
• DMS DOWN: sets the FCR page as the Sensor of Interest (SOI) • ACM: Air Combat Mode
• TMS RIGHT LONG: Cycles between RWS and TWS sub-modes. • GM: Ground Mapping
Note: Cycling between RWS and TWS sub-modes can also be done by • SEA: Sea Mode
pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to RWS/TWS. • BCN: Beacon Mode
Radar Sub-Mode Selector

DOWN: Sets FCR page as SOI

RIGHT LONG: Cycles between TWS and RWS Sub-
Modes
179
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) FCR (Fire Control
Radar) Power Switch
2.1.3.1 – Air-to-Air RWS (Range While Search) Mode
VIPER
F-16C
The Range While Search (RWS) submode is used for long-range acquisition and engagement. The pilot can
set the acquisition range (10, 20, 40, 80, or 160 nautical miles) and change the azimuth width and
elevation. You can then select a specific track and lock it into STT mode.
RWS is selected in the following manner:

1. FCR Power Switch must be set to ON (FWD) Radar Mode Selected
2. Select FCR page, then press the DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set the FCR (Fire Control CRM: Combined Radar Mode Radar Sub-Mode Selector
Radar) page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). RWS: Range While Search
3. Select RWS mode by either:
a) Using the Radar Mode and Radar Sub-Mode selector OSBs (Option Select Button), or;
b) Pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT LONG to cycle between RWS and TWS
mode.
Note: from RWS Mode, you can either transition to SAM (Situational Awareness Mode) Mode or lock a
target using STT (Single Target Track) Mode. Consult relevant SAM and STT sections to know how to
transition to these modes. Radar Contact
SOI (Sensor of Interest) Control Indication Box

The current SOI can be identified by the box around the
MFD screen. The SOI is changed from display to display
with the Display Management Switch (DMS).
Radar Contact
DOWN: Sets FCR page as SOI

RIGHT LONG: Cycles between TWS and RWS Sub-
Modes FCR Page Selected
180
2.1.3.2 – Air-to-Air TWS (Track While Scan) Mode
VIPER
F-16C
INTRODUCTION
TWS (Track While Scan) mode combines the information unique to RWS and STT (Single Target Track)
modes. Generally, the TWS display is very similar to the RWS display. TWS mode allows for trackfiles to be
kept at a high update rate. To accomplish this, TWS artificially limits the scan volume (bars/azimuth) and
provides for automatic scan centering. It is also optimal for providing post-launch datalink for the AIM-120
AMRAAM missile while remaining in search.
When combined with the AIM-120, TWS provides a powerful ability to engage multiple targets quickly.
Nevertheless, the target tracking reliability is less than STT. Unlike STT though, a TWS launch with an
AMRAAM will not provide the enemy aircraft with a radar lock and launch indication. As such, the first
warning the enemy pilot will likely get is when the active radar seeker of the AIM-120 missile goes active
near the target.
TWS has several restrictions. The radar will attempt to build track files for each contact, but given a large
scan volume, there will be a sizable refresh time between scans. During each scan the radar will try to
predict the position of the contact for the next scan. If, however the target takes evasive, high-G
maneuvers and quickly changing its trajectory and speed, the radar can lose the track by making an
incorrect track file prediction. Using such a defensive tactic, the hunter can quickly become the hunted.
Since TWS mode is one of the more complex (yet powerful!) radar modes, this section will be divided in
the following sub-sections:
• A: Information Display
• B: Symbology & Target Types
• C: TWS Scanning
• D: TWS Designation
181
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) Bugged Target
Steering Cue
2.1.3.2 – Air-to-Air TWS (Track While Scan) Mode (16 deg right)
VIPER
F-16C
A – INFORMATION DISPLAY
TWS (Track While Scan) “Track Files” (fancy term for radar contacts) are established on up to 10 targets based
on information received on each radar sweep. The radar scan volume options are identical to those used for
RWS but are reduced to 3-bar, ±25 degrees when a target is designated.
TWS Mode Selected
Target 2 Target 3
Altitude: 9000 ft Altitude: 7000 ft
Target 1
Altitude: 7000 ft
Target 2
Altitude: 9000 ft
Target 1 Target 3
Altitude: 7 = 7000 ft Altitude: 7000 ft

Lower number: Lower altitude covered by radar (-2000 ft) Target 4
Altitude: 9000 ft
Target 4
Altitude: 9000 ft You
182
2.1.3.2 – Air-to-Air TWS (Track While Scan) Mode Bugged Target
Bugged Target Airspeed (kts)
VIPER
F-16C
Aspect Angle Bugged Target

B – SYMBOLOGY & TARGET TYPES Ground Track
Bugged Target
Four types of target symbols are available to help sort contacts in order of priority: Closure Speed (kts)
Search Target, Track Target, System Target and Bugged Target.
• Search Target: These are radar contacts that have not been resolved well enough
to build a track. These are displayed as a small box in much the same way as in
RWS. These targets disappear after a few sweeps if a track cannot be obtained. If a
valid track is obtained, usually after being detected on two consecutive sweeps,
the contact becomes a Track Target.
Track Target
• Track Target: These targets are displayed as large filled boxes with a velocity Search Target
vector line showing their direction of travel. Their altitude is displayed just below System Target
each contact. Up to 10 of these tracks may be present at one time. Track targets
can be considered the baseline contact type. Other options become available after
a contact has reached this stage. Contacts that are determined to be friendly
through IFF interrogation or other means may be left as a Track Target. Contacts Bugged Target
that require closer attention can be transitioned to System Targets.
• System Target: The purpose of system targets is to ease designation and tracking
of the contacts considered most important. These are displayed as empty boxes
and include the velocity vector line and altitude.
• Bugged Target: This is the highest priority of all the tracked targets and the target
an AIM-120 missile fired at that moment will engage. It is displayed as a contact
with a circle around it.

183
Search Target Track Target
System Target
VIPER
F-16C
B – SYMBOLOGY & TARGET TYPES Acquisition (ACQ) Cursor
Now that we know what different target types there are, how do we transition from
one to the other?
Bugged Target
Search Target Track Target System Target Bugged Target Radar STT Lock
If a valid track is obtained from Track targets can be transitioned to System Targets can be designated as the A Bugged Target may be transitioned to an
a Search Target, usually after system targets in two ways: bugged target by placing the Acquisition STT (Single Target Track Radar Lock) track by
being detected on two Cursor over it with the Radar Cursor selecting TMS UP with the Acquisition
consecutive antenna sweeps, • Place the Acquisition Cursor over a Switch and TMS UP on the stick. This Cursor over the bugged target.
the contact becomes a Track track target with the Radar Cursor transitions the scan to 3-bar, ±25 degrees • Selecting TMS DOWN from STT returns
Target automatically. Switch and select TMS UP on the stick centered on the bugged target to provide to the TWS mode. Each subsequent TMS
to transition only that target faster updates and reduce the chance of DOWN downgrades the status of the
Or… losing the track. track files.
• TMS RIGHT on the stick to transition all • TMS RIGHT will also select the
track targets to system targets if no closest system target as the bugged
other system targets are displayed. target.
• Subsequent presses of TMS RIGHT
will cycle through all displayed
system targets, making each the
bugged target in turn.

• Used for slewing of the fire control radar cursor 184
or targeting pod/weapon video.
Radar Elevation Scan Limits
VIPER
F-16C
C – TWS SCANNING
• The azimuth scans, depending on the mode, can be ±60° (the whole width of the
radar scope) centred about the nose, or ±30°, ±25°, ±20° or ±10° centered about the
acquisition (ACQ) cursor anywhere within the ±60° gimbal limits.
• The ±25° azimuth (3 bar) scan is exclusive to Track-While-Scan (TWS) mode.
Radar Azimuth Limits
Antenna Elevation Caret

B-Sweep (Instantaneous azimuth

position of radar antenna)
Radar Azimuth (Total Coverage from left to right)

(can be set to +/- 10/20/25/30/60 deg)
A2 stands for “Azimuth 25 degrees”
Elevation Bar Scan

Cycles between 1, 2, 3 and 4 bars of faster scanning
3B stands for “3 bars”.
185
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) DMS (Display Management Switch) 2b

VIPER
F-16C
D – TWS DESIGNATION
1. FCR Power Switch must be set to ON (FWD)
2. Select FCR page, then press the DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to
set the FCR (Fire Control Radar) page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). TMS (Target Management Switch)
3. Select TWS mode by either:
a) Using the Radar Mode and Radar Sub-Mode selector OSBs (Option
Select Button), or; Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
b) Pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT LONG to cycle Depress, Multidirectional
between RWS and TWS mode. • Used for slewing of the fire control radar cursor
4. Adjust radar range, azimuth and bar setting as desired. or targeting pod/weapon video.
5. Search targets will first appear when valid tracks (radar contacts) are obtained.
6. After being detected on two consecutive antenna sweeps, Search Targets
become Track Targets automatically.
Track Target
SOI (Sensor of Interest) Control 2b
Search Target 6
Indication Box
The current SOI can be identified by the box 5
around the MFD screen. The SOI is changed
from display to display with the Display 4
Management Switch (DMS).
1 FCR (Fire Control

Radar) Power Switch 2a 186
VIPER
F-16C
7. Transition Track Targets into System Targets, which can then be “bugged”
subsequently. You can use two different procedures to do this:
i. PROCEDURE I: Establish a Cursor Target on the desired Track TMS (Target Management Switch) 7i b 7ii a
Target(s)
a) Use the Radar Cursor/Enable switch to move the
Acquisition Cursor over the desired Track Target. Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
b) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to set selected Depress, Multidirectional
Track Target into a System Target. 7i a
• Used for slewing of the fire control radar cursor
c) Previous steps can be repeated to set other existing Track or targeting pod/weapon video.
Targets into System Targets.
ii. PROCEDURE II: Transition all Track Targets into System Targets
using TMS RIGHT SHORT
a) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT SHORT

b) All existing Track Targets will transition into System Targets
7i 7ii
System Target
Track Target
System Targets
187
8i
System Target
VIPER
F-16C
D – TWS DESIGNATION Acquisition (ACQ) Cursor
8. Designate the desired System Target as a “Bugged Target”. You can perform this in two ways:
i. PROCEDURE I: Bug System Target with Acquisition Cursor
a) Use the Radar Cursor/Enable switch to move the Acquisition Cursor over the desired System Target.
b) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to set selected System Target into a Bugged Target.
ii. PROCEDURE II: Bug the closest System Target to you using TMS RIGHT SHORT
a) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT SHORT Bugged Target
b) System Target closest to you will automatically be selected as the Bugged Target.
c) Subsequent presses of TMS RIGHT SHORT will cycle through all displayed System Targets, making each the
Bugged Target in turn.
9. When a “Bugged Target” is designated, the radar automatically transitions the scan to 3-bar, ±25 degrees centered on the
bugged target to provide faster updates and reduce the chance of losing the track. Bugged Target information (Aspect Angle,
Ground Track, Airspeed (kts), Closure Speed (kts)) will be displayed on the upper region of the FCR page.
9
8ii
9
TMS (Target Management Switch) 8i b 8ii a
Bugged Target
(Closest to you)
9
8i a • Used for slewing of the fire control radar cursor 188
VIPER
F-16C
10. Depending on the direction of the target, either a Steering Cue (Tadpole) or a TD (Target Designator) Box towards the Bugged Target is displayed on the Heads-Up Display. Bugged
Target Range (nm) and Closure Speed (kts) are also displayed.
• Note: The use of the A-A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode is not mandatory but strongly recommended if you want to use air-to-air missile symbology.
Bugged Target Steering Cue Bugged Target Target

(16 deg to your right) Designator (TD) Box
Bugged Target Closure Speed (kts)

• 040.6: Bugged Target is 40.6 nm away
A-A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode Button

189
VIPER
F-16C
11. A Bugged Target may be transitioned to an STT (Single Target Track Radar Lock)
Track by setting the Acquisition Cursor over the Bugged Target with the Radar
Cursor Switch, then pressing TMS UP. Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
12. Selecting TMS DOWN from STT returns to the Track While Scan mode. Each
subsequent TMS DOWN downgrades the status of the track files.
Bugged Target locked

in STT Mode
Bugged Target
190
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) DMS (Display Management Switch) 2b
2.1.4 – Air-to-Air SAM (Situational Awareness Mode)

VIPER
F-16C
SAM (Situational Awareness Mode) is an “acquisition mode” (some sort of hybrid

mode between RWS (Range While Search) and STT (Single Target Track/Radar Lock)).
When locking a target in RWS mode, the radar enters SAM mode.
In SAM mode: TMS (Target Management Switch)

• Radar will periodically scan the locked target while scanning the whole area.
• The controls are basically same as RWS.
• During acquisition, the antenna is directed to the last known target position, and a
4-bar, ±10-degree Spotlight search is performed. Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
2. Select FCR page, then press the DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set
the FCR (Fire Control Radar) page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). 3
a) Using the Radar Mode and Radar Sub-Mode OSBs (Option Select Button), 3
or;
b) Pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT LONG to cycle
between RWS and TWS mode.
4. Adjust radar range, azimuth and bar setting as desired.
5. Search targets will first appear when valid tracks (radar contacts) are obtained.
4
5 Search Target
1
FCR (Fire Control SOI (Sensor of Interest) Control 2b
Radar) Power Switch Indication Box
The current SOI can be identified by the box
around the MFD screen. The SOI is changed 2a
from display to display with the Display
191
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) Search Target
VIPER
F-16C
6. Acquire target and designate it as a “Bugged Target”

a) Use the Radar Cursor/Enable switch to move the Acquisition Cursor over the
desired Search Target.
b) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP, then release it to set selected
Search Target into a Bugged Target.
7. Once target is designated as a “Bugged Target”, the Situational Awareness Mode
(SAM) acquisition sequence is initiated.
8. During acquisition, the radar antenna is directed to the last known target position,
and a 4-bar, ±10-degree Spotlight search is performed. 6a Acquisition (ACQ) Cursor
9. Bugged Target information (Aspect Angle, Ground Track, Airspeed (kts), Closure
Speed (kts)) will be displayed on the upper region of the FCR page.
• Note: While in SAM, target is tracked but the radar continues to scan the area and Bugged Target Aspect Angle
display additional targets. This is commonly referred to as ‘designating’ or ‘bugging’ a
target. An AIM-120 AMRAAM will guide on the bugged target even without an STT
lock.
Bugged Target Magnetic Heading
TMS (Target Management Switch) 6b 8
Bugged Target 6b
Radar Cursor/Enable Switch Altitude (15 = 15000 ft)
6a • Used for slewing of the fire control radar cursor 192
VIPER
F-16C
10. Depending on the direction of the target, either a TLL (Target Locator Line) or a TD (Target Designator) Box towards the Bugged Target is displayed on the Heads-Up Display. Bugged Target
Range (nm) and Closure Speed (kts) are also displayed.
• Note: The use of the A-A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode is not mandatory but strongly recommended if you want to use air-to-air missile symbology.
Bugged Target Target

Designator (TD) Box
Bugged Target
Target Locator Line
(10 deg to your left)

A-A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode Button

193
VIPER
F-16C
11. A Bugged Target may be transitioned to a STT (Single Target Track Radar Lock)
Track by pressing TMS UP a second time.
12. Selecting TMS DOWN from STT returns to the Range While Search mode.


in STT Mode
Bugged Target
194
2.1.5 – Air-to-Air STT (Single Target Track) Radar Lock TMS (Target Management Switch)
VIPER
F-16C
STT (Single Target Track) mode is a traditional radar "lock" where the radar continuously scans a single target, resulting in a very high update rate;
this makes it the primary method of providing guidance to air-to-air weapons. STT maintains a trackfile for its target and automatically designates it.
The radar is slaved to this trackfile; as such, manual antenna elevation control is inhibited and the B-sweep follows the trackfile. Only the trackfile
that is placed in STT is visible and all onboard trackfiles are dropped. In STT, the FCR page format is presented in azimuth along the horizontal axis and
range along the vertical axis.
Single Target Track is obtained by:

• Placing the acquisition cursor over a target (with the Radar Cursor switch), positioning the TMS (Target Management Switch) on the stick FWD
twice in quick succession, then releasing the TMS.
• using an Air Combat Maneuvering mode
STT is exited by pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) on the stick AFT.
• TMS DOWN once returns to SAM mode with the target bugged.
• TMS DOWN twice returns to RWS mode.
• The radar is returned to the last-entered search mode. Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
Search Target
in STT Mode
Altitude (17 = 17000 ft)
Acquisition (ACQ) Cursor Bugged Target
195
HSD (Horizontal Situation Display)
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) also displays Bugged Target
2.1.5 – Air-to-Air STT (Single Target Track) Radar Lock
VIPER
F-16C
When the locked target is outside the HUD field on view as shown below, a Target Locator Line (TLL) extends from the Gun Cross and points directly
at the target. The Relative Angle is displayed next to the Gun Cross showing the number of degrees in tens between the cross and the target.
Bugged Target
Bugged Target
Target Locator Line
Target Designator (TD) Box
(10 deg to your left)
Bugged Target
Closure Speed (kts)
Bugged Target Magnetic Heading
Bugged Target Aspect Angle
Range Provider / Slant Range (nm) Bugged Target locked

• F: FCS (Fire Control System) is providing range in STT Mode
• 041.5: Bugged Target is 41.5 nm away Altitude (17 = 17000 ft)
196
2.1.6 – Air-to-Air ACM (Air Combat Mode) Modes
VIPER
2.1.6.1 – Mode Selection

F-16C
There are four main ACM (Air Combat Mode) Modes, which are used for close range air-to-air
engagements. FCR Power Switch needs to be set to ON (FWD). Selection of ACM Sub-modes can
FCR (Fire Control
be done as follows: 1 2b DMS (Display Management Switch)
Radar) Power Switch
2. Select FCR page, then press the DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set the FCR (Fire Dogfight Switch
Control Radar) page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). 3-Position switch, Slide
3. ACM Mode can be selected in two ways: • DOGFIGHT (Outboard) 3ii
i. Using the Main Radar Mode selector OSB (Option Select Button) on the FCR page, or; • Missile Override (Inboard)
ii. Pressing the Dogfight Switch Outboard (DGFT) • Center: Returns to last selected Master Mode
3i a Main Radar Mode Selection

3i c
2b
ACM Sub-Mode Selection

• 20: 30 x 20 deg HUD Scan
3i b • 60: 10 x 60 deg Vertical Scan
• BORE: Boresight
ACM Mode Selection • SLEW: Slewable
2a
197
2.1.6 – Air-to-Air ACM (Air Combat Mode) Modes TMS (Target Management Switch)
VIPER
2.1.6.1 – Mode Selection

F-16C
• UP: Boresight (BORE) Sub-mode

• DOWN:
4. ACM Sub-Mode can be selected in two ways: • Without target lock: Vertical Scan Sub-mode
a) Using the TMS (Target Management Switch), or; • With target lock: Target Reject and HUD Scan NO RAD Sub-mode.
b) Using the ACM Sub-Mode Selection OSB • RIGHT: HUD Scan Sub-Mode
• LEFT: No Function 4a
4b

• 60: 10 x 60 deg Vertical Scan
• BORE: Boresight
• SLEW: Slewable
198
Scan Region
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) Bore Cross
VIPER
2.1.6.2 – Boresight (BORE) Sub-Mode

F-16C
BORE scan pattern searches a small one-beamwidth area located 3° below the HUD’s gun cross. An additional
Boresight Cross is displayed on the HUD at the center of the radar scan zone to aid in positioning the target in
the radar beam. BORE is useful for quickly locking a target within visual range (WVR) and allows a degree fine
control as to the target being locked.
• BORE can be selected in two ways:

• From FCR Page – ACM Sub-Mode OSB, or;
• TMS (Target Management Switch) UP
• The first target detected within 20 nautical miles is locked and automatically tracked in STT mode.
• If STT lock is acquired, TMS DOWN can reject the target lock (unlock)

• UP: Boresight (BORE) Sub-mode STT Lock
Acquired

• BORE: Boresight
• SLEW: Slewable
STT Lock
• Altitude: 6 = 6000 ft
199
Closure Rate (kts)
Scan Region
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) 10 x 60 deg

VIPER
2.1.6.3 – Vertical Scan Sub-Mode

F-16C
Gun Cross
Vertical Scan Radar mode will scan in a 10°× 60° vertical area. The scan center is 23° above the HUD’s gun
cross. This mode is indicated by a vertical line extending from the gun cross to the bottom of the HUD. When
locked, the target is automatically tracked in STT mode.
• Vertical Scan can be selected in two ways:

• Without STT radar lock being active, set TMS (Target Management Switch) DOWN
Vertical Scan
• The first target detected within 10 nautical miles is locked and automatically tracked in STT mode.
• If STT lock is acquired, TMS DOWN can reject the target lock (unlock)
Selected HUD Line

TMS (Target Management Switch) • 004.4: Bugged Target is 4.4 nm away
• DOWN (without target lock):
Vertical Scan Sub-mode STT Lock
Acquired
• BORE: Boresight
• SLEW: Slewable
STT Lock Closure Rate (kts)

200
VIPER
2.1.6.4 – HUD Scan Sub-Mode

F-16C
The HUD (Heads-Up Display Area Scan) mode will scan the HUD area (30°× 20°).
This ACM submode is the default selection commanded upon entry into ACM from
any other mode. There is no special HUD symbology for this submode. This
submode is less precise than the BORE submode and may take longer to achieve a
lock because of the larger target area for the radar scan to cover.
• The HUD Scan submode is entered in a non-radiating (NO RAD) state by default
HUD Scan NO RAD
when ACM mode is selected. Radiating mode can be selected in two ways:
• Set TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT
• The first target detected within 10 nautical miles is locked and automatically
tracked in STT mode. Scan Region
• If a target is locked in STT mode, TMS DOWN can reject the target lock (unlock). 30 x 20 deg

However, it will also revert the ACM mode to the HUD Scan non-radiating NO • F: FCS (Fire Control System) is providing range
RAD sub-mode. • 002.8: Bugged Target is 2.8 nm away

• DOWN (with target lock): Target Reject and HUD Scan
NO RAD Sub-mode STT Lock
• RIGHT: HUD Scan Sub-Mode Acquired

• BORE: Boresight
• SLEW: Slewable
STT Lock Closure Rate (kts)

201
VIPER
2.1.6.5 – Slewable Sub-Mode

F-16C
The scan pattern is approximately 20° high x 60° wide. When selected, the scan is centered directly in front of the aircraft on the horizon. The scan is slewable via the CURSOR/ENABLE
control on the throttle until a target is acquired. The amount of slew is limited by the radar gimbal limits. As with the other submodes, the radar automatically locks on to the first target in
this zone. When locked, the target is automatically tracked in STT mode. This mode is useful when you have a direction to look, for example ‘bandits 2 o’clock high’, but have not picked
them up visually yet.
Not yet implemented.

202
Group of contacts
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) Normal Mode Selected (closely grouped)
2.1.7 – Air-to-Air EXP (Expand) Feature
VIPER
F-16C
The radar provides the ability to enter an expanded field

of view display that allows sorting and resolution of
closely grouped contacts. This can be thought of as a
zoom feature that provides a 4:1 scale view centered
around the radar cursor. This feature is available in all
radar modes.
The expanded display may be toggled on or off by
selecting the OSB (Option Select Button) next to
NORM/EXP or by depressing the Expand/FOV Button
(pinky switch) on the stick while the FCR is sensor of
interest.
The expanded display features a 2 nm x 2 nm reference

box centered on the Acquisition Cursor, which is

controlled by the Radar Cursor Switch. Basic functions
and symbology are unchanged from the normal display.
Expanded Mode Selected
2 nm x 2 nm Reference Box
Group of contacts
(zoomed in with Expanded Mode)

or targeting pod/weapon video. 203
Dogfight Switch
2 - AN/APG-68 FIRE CONTROL RADAR (FCR) 3-Position switch, Slide
3
2.1.8 – Air-to-Air HMCS Radar Lock

VIPER
F-16C
To perform a radar lock with the HMCS:
1. The system Helmet-Mounted Cueing System (HMCS) is powered with the

HMCS Symbology Brightness Knob.
2. Make sure the FCR (Fire Control Radar) switch is ON (FWD)
3. Select DGFT Mode with the Dogfight Switch (Outboard)
4. Select BORE (Boresight) ACM (Air Combat Mode) Search Sub-Mode by
pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) UP.
5. The HMCS Bore Ellipse will appear when BORE is selected. HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing 4b
6. Move your helmet to put the HMCS Ellipse on the target. Then, press TMS 1 6 TMS (Target Management Switch)
(Target Management Switch) UP to radar lock the target. Radar will enter 8
STT (Single Target Track) Lock Mode.
7. A Target Designation Box will appear on the locked target.
8. You can unlock the target and exit BORE Search mode by pressing TMS 2 • F: FCS (Fire Control System) is providing range
(Target Management Switch) DOWN. • R: Radar Altimeter is providing range
• B: Range computed using steerpoint

elevation/barometric elevation
• T: Targeting Pod is providing passive range
HUD Scan Search Mode (Selected • L: Targeting Pod laser is firing and being used
by default in DGFT Mode)
BORE Search Mode 5 HMCS Bore Ellipse
4a 6
(Selected with TMS UP)
4c
Target Designation Box (STT Radar Lock)

Dynamic Aiming Cross 26: Target Altitude in thousands of feet
204
2.1.9 – Air-to-Air Radar Lingo & Terminology
VIPER
F-16C
• BANDIT: Identified Enemy Aircraft

• BOGEY: Unidentified Aircraft
• SPIKE: Air-to-Air radar is locked on you
• BUDDY SPIKE: Friendly radar is locked on you
• NAILS: RWR contact, which emits radar waves but does not have a radar lock
on you
• FOX 1: semi-active radar missile (27R/ER + AIM-7)
• FOX 2: heat-seeking infrared missile (27T/ET + AIM-9 + R-73/60)
• FOX 3: active radar missile, meaning the missile tracks to an aircraft’s radar
up to a certain distance, then its internal radar activates (pitbull) (AIM-
120/R-77)
• RIFLE: AGM-65 Air-to-Ground missile
• RAYGUN: When locking a target with your radar, it is good practice to say
“RAYGUN” so your teammates are aware that you are locking someone. It is
often used to identify a contact as friend or foe. If a person yells “BUDDY
SPIKE!”, it’s very likely that you are locking a friendly contact.
• IFF: meaning “Is he friendly or bandit (enemy)?”
• PITBULL: Any FOX 3 (active radar) missile that starts using its onboard radar
for tracking
205
2.2.1 – GM (Ground Mapping) Mode
VIPER
F-16C

206
2.2.2 – GMT (Ground Moving Target) Mode
VIPER
F-16C

207
2.2.3 – BCN (Beacon) Mode
VIPER
F-16C

208
2.3.1 – SEA Mode
VIPER
F-16C

209
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD
3.1 – Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
The AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT targeting pod system is a self-contained, multi-sensor targeting and surveillance system. The LITENING enables aircrews to detect, acquire, auto-track and
identify targets at long ranges for weapon delivery or non-traditional intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance missions. LITENING's FLIR, charged-coupled device (CCD), laser imaging
sensors, advanced image processing and digital video output provide useful imagery of targets on the ground, allowing aircrews to identify and engage targets under a wide range of
battlefield conditions.
LITENING AT Targeting Pod

210
Override (OVRD) Select
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD • Overrides any current mode and returns
3.2 – Displays to STBY.
• The last selected mode is returned to
VIPER
F-16C
when OVRD is selected a second time. Targeting Pod Control (CNTL) Page Selector
Field-of-View Setting
Targeting Pod Mode Selected Used to set targeting pod settings
Narrow/Wide
• A-G: Air-to-Ground
• A-A: Air-to-Air MFD Symbology Brightness Rocker Switch
• STBY: Standby
Sensor Type
• TV / CCD (Charge Coupled Device)
MFD Gain Rocker Switch
• WHOT: White Hot FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared)
• BHOT: Black Hot FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared)
Grayscale Option
Track Polarity
Displays a grayscale color strip for
• NT (Neutral Track) allows both white and black
calibrating the level and gain.
targets to be point tracked. Default A-G mode.
• WT (White Track) only allows white point targets
to be tracked. Default A-A mode
• BT (White Track) allows black point targets to be
SOI (Sensor of Interest) Box tracked.
SP (Snowplow) Mode
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Option Snowplow mode is stabilized on the
horizon, following our aircraft heading. It is a basic
“look and designate” mode that is done through
AGM-65 (Maverick Missile) Handoff Submode the targeting pod feed.
• MAN: The AGM-65 will be slaved to the Line of
Sight of the TGP but will not automatically be CZ (Cursor Zero) Function
handed off the lock. Pilot must manually change Pressing CZ erases the cursor slew and returns the
SOI to AGM-65 and command lock manually. SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) to the currently
• AUTO: TMS UP creates a point track, which selected steerpoint.
automatically triggers an automatic hand off
attempt. Sighting Option
Alternatively: TMS RIGHT, with TGP SOI, will Cycles between TGT-OAP1-OAP2 where OAP is the Offset
repeat hand off the lock to the AGM-65 if the Aim-Point, which can be added to each steer point. An
target contrast and size meet criteria of missile OAP can be useful if the target is obscured by weather,
lock. but the OAP is in the clear. By selecting OAP1 or 2, the
TGP (Targeting Pod) Page Selector
targeting pod slaves to the clear OAP and the aiming can
be confirmed, although the steering and weapon delivery
MFD Brightness Rocker Switch DCLT (Declutter) Function calculations will be to the target. 211
MFD Contrast Rocker Switch
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD North Arrow / Ground Plane
• Regular line indicates ground plane relative to the FLIR
3.2 – Displays orientation.
• Arrow points to the north and increases in length as a
VIPER
F-16C
Situational Awareness Cue function of how far the FLIR is below (or above) the horizon.
Zoom Factor
• 0Z: Zoomed Fully Out
• 9Z: Zoomed Fully In Aircraft Radar Altitude (ft)
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Data
• Coordinates (North/South)
• Coordinates (East/West)
• Mean Sea Level Altitude (ft)
Targeting Pod Reticle (Crosshairs)

Laser Spot Search (LSS) Code
Yardstick (Meterstick) Indication (meters)

Field-of-View Indicators Distance of one of the reticle lines relative to the
ground is provided in meters. This provides a sense
of scale for where the targeting pod is currently
Track Mode looking.
• POINT: Point Track
• AREA: Area Track Time To Go
• INR: Inertial Rate, TGP will remain fixed on a geographic reference point This shows the time to the next event depending on the
aircraft status.
Slant Range to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) (nm) • Time to reach the steerpoint is displayed if in NAV
The preceding letter indicates the source of the range data. master mode.
• L: Laser (priority over all other sources) • Time to release weapon is displayed if in A-G mode if a
• T: Targeting Pod passive ranging target has been designated in an auto-delivery mode.
• (blank): Sensor that is not the TGP is providing range (for • Time to impact is displayed if a weapon has been
example, FCR A-G ranging) released.
Targeting Pod Laser Code Laser Status

Laser code used by your targeting pod Flashing: Laser Designator is firing
when designating a target.
212
Situational Awareness Cue
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD This is where the targeting pod is
3.2 – Displays looking in relationship to your aircraft
VIPER
F-16C
Waterline symbol
Steering Cue
This line must be centered with the Waterline symbol in
order to fly the aircraft towards the SPI (Sensor Point of
Interest). In this example, the steering line tells you to steer
right to line up the target.
213
3.2 – Displays
VIPER
F-16C
Targeting Pod A-G Control (CNTL) Page

Not Yet Implemented
214
3.2 – Displays
VIPER
F-16C
TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP

Designation Box
TGP (Targeting Pod) Reticle Steering Information

Shown: Designation Box is 30 degrees to our right
CCRP (Continuously Computed

Release Point) Bomb Release Mode
TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP Designation Box

Crossed Out = Beyond Heads-Up Display Limits
215
3.2 – Displays
VIPER
F-16C
The Targeting Pod View Relative Direction symbol on the TGP display can give you a good idea of where the pod is pointing in relationship to your aircraft. This view direction
is represented in a top-down view.
Targeting Pod is
looking here
Target Coordinates
Situational Awareness Cue (Targeting

Pod View Relative Direction)
© Max Waldorf, F-16 Guru Extraordinaire
216
3.2 – Displays
VIPER
F-16C
TV / CCD Mode WHOT (White Hot) FLIR Mode BHOT (Black Hot) FLIR Mode
217
3.2 – Displays Gain Control Button
VIPER
F-16C
When using the FLIR in either BHOT (Black Hot) or WHOT (White Hot) modes, you can either
use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) or control the gain manually with MGC (Manual Gain
Control) by pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to it, then using either the Gain
Control Button on the top left of the display or the OSBs next to the Gain Level indicator.
MCG (Manual Gain

Control) Selected Gain Level 7
AGC (Automatic Gain

Control) Selected
Gain Level 4
Gain Control OSBs
218
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In
• MAN RNG Counter-Clockwise: Zooms Out
3.3 – Controls • UNCAGE (Depressed): Laser Spot Search
VIPER
F-16C

Some useful HOTAS functionalities when using the targeting pod:
• DMS (Display Management Switch):

• DOWN: Swaps SOI (Sensor of Interest) to the left or right display.
• TMS (Target Management Switch):

• UP: Selects Point Track (POINT, tracks an object like a high-contrast
vehicle).
• LEFT: Toggles TV camera and infrared polarity (TV/Charged-Coupled
Device, WHOT/White Hot, BHOT/Black Hot) Depress, Multidirectional
• RIGHT: Selects Area Track (AREA)
• DOWN: Target Reject
• MAN RNG (Manual Range) Knob:

• CCW (Counter-Clockwise): Zooms OUT
• CW (Clockwise): Zooms IN DMS (Display Management Switch)
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
• Expand/FOV Button: Toggles between narrow and wide field-of-view
• Camera/Gun Trigger First Detent: Fires Laser TMS (Target Management Switch)
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
• Radar Cursor Switch: Slews targeting pod reticle Camera/Gun Trigger
(Two Stages)
• Uncage Switch (Depressed): Laser Spot Search Mode
Button
219
3.4 – Target Designation Clarifications
VIPER
F-16C
There are a few methods to point a target with the targeting pod.
• Snowplow mode is the default mode when no Target designation exists in NAV and A-G Master Modes. Slewing is disabled; however, it is possible to ground-stabilize by pressing TMS (Target
Management Switch) UP. This will exit SP mode and enter a normal AREA track.
• Waypoint Slaving (TGP snaps to a selected navigation waypoint) is available using the Horizontal Situation Indicator page (see relevant section).
• Area Track is used to keep track of a specific area. This is best used for buildings of fixed targets. Area Track can be set from any other pointing method. Use TMS UP.
• Point Track is used to keep track of a specific moving point. This is best used for moving targets. Point Track can be set from any other pointing method. Use TMS RIGHT.
Targeting Pod Reticle Targeting Pod Reticle Targeting Pod Reticle Targeting Pod Reticle
Snowplow Waypoint Slaved Point Track Area Track
220
VIPER
F-16C
Area Track Area Track

(can be slewed with Radar Cursor Switch) TMS DOWN (can be slewed with Radar Cursor Switch)
Target Reject / Un-Designates
TMS RIGHT
TMS RIGHT
Slaved to Waypoint Targeting Pod Snowplow Mode
(cannot be slewed with is Powered Up (cannot be slewed with Radar
Radar Cursor Switch) 1. A-G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode is selected 1. Available in NAV and A-G modes while the
2. Targeting pod A-G mode is selected TGP is not tracking Cursor Switch)
3. A valid steerpoint is selected 2. Targeting pod A-G mode is selected
CCIP Release Mode Selected

4. CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) 3. SP is displayed adjacent to the OSB (Option
release mode is selected via the SMS (Stores Select Button)
TMS UP
TMS UP
Management Set), or toggled with the NWS 4. Press OSB next to SP (White = Selected)
A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button
5. The targeting pod will automatically slave to
the active steerpoint
Point Track Point Track

(can be slewed with Radar Cursor Switch) Slaved to CCIP Pipper (can be slewed with Radar Cursor Switch)
(cannot be slewed with
Radar Cursor Switch)
221
3.4 – Target Designation Clarifications Designation Box
VIPER
F-16C
In the current Early Access implementation of the Targeting Pod,

there are different ways to visualize and/or designate a ground
target. Here are a few things to keep in mind.
a) The targeting pod functions available depend on what Master

Mode is selected (A-A, A-G, or NAV).
NWS A/R DISC &
MSL STEP Button
b) The targeting pod works differently based on your weapon
release mode like CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) CCRP Release Mode
or CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point), which can be Selected
set in the SMS (Stores Management Set) page. A valid weapon
(bombs, for instance) needs to be equipped for these release
modes to be available.
c) The use of the targeting pod in the F-16 relies heavily on

waypoints/steerpoints of your flight plan. Generally, you will

want to have a steerpoint already set near to a target, slave the
targeting pod to this waypoint, then find the target and
designate it. A-G TGP Mode
d) To slave the targeting pod to a waypoint, the following

conditions must be met: A-G Master Mode Button
• A-G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode must be selected
• Targeting pod A-G mode must be selected
• A valid steerpoint must be selected
• CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) release
mode must be selected via the SMS (Stores
Management Set), or toggled with the NWS A/R DISC
& MSL STEP Button
• The targeting pod will automatically slave to the active Steerpoint 2 Selected
steerpoint
Targeting Pod Reticle Steerpoint Selector Switch

(Slaved on Steerpoint 2) 222
VIPER
F-16C
e) When CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) release mode is selected, the targeting pod’s line of sight is slaved to the CCIP pipper location. The targeting pod cannot designate
anything in this mode, but it can be used to have a good visual cue of the target your are diving on.
CCIP Release Mode

Selected
CCIP Pipper
Targeting Pod Reticle

(Slaved to CCIP Pipper)
223
2
3.5 – Start-Up & Lasing Procedure
VIPER
F-16C
1. For the targeting pod features to be available, the following avionics systems
must be powered ON
• MMC (Modular Mission Computer) Switch – ON 4
• ST STA (Store Station) switch – ON
• MFD (Multifunction Display) switch – ON
• UFC (Up Front Controller) switch – ON 5
• EGI/INS switch - NAV
2. Select A-G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode. The SMS (Stores Management Set)
page will be set on the right MFD and the FCR (Fire Control Radar) will be set
on the left MFD.
3. Set desired MFD to the TGP (Targeting Pod) page. We will set the left MFD as
the TGP page.
4. Set Radar Altimeter Power Switch – ON (FWD)
1
5. Since the TGP is always installed on the right cheek of the fuselage, set RIGHT
HDPT (Right Hardpoint) ON (FWD) to power up the pod.
3b
3c
3a 224
Targeting Pod
(Press Twice)
VIPER
F-16C
6. A series of power-up self tests and FLIR sensor cooldown will be

initiated once the pod is powered.
• When the TGP is initially activated, the Standby page will be
displayed with a “NOT TIMED OUT” message displayed in
the upper center portion. Time is needed to run automatic
power-up self tests and for the FLIR sensor to cool down.
• (Not simulated yet) A “FLIR HOT” message is displayed in 6b
6a
white text on a black background with half the text height as
the “NOT TIMED OUT” message. After about three minutes,
the message will be removed, video will appear, and the
Standby mode page will be selected.
7. After about three minutes, video will appear, and the Standby
mode page will be selected.
6d
6c
225
VIPER
F-16C
8. Set targeting pod mode from STBY (Standby) to A-G

(Air-to-Ground). This will un-stow the camera.
8a 8c
8a
8b
8c
226
3.5 – Start-Up & Lasing Procedure 10 11c
VIPER
F-16C
9. Set Master Arm Switch – ON (UP)

10. Set Laser Switch – ARMED (UP)
11. Set the Targeting Pod’s Laser Code as desired. The default laser code is 1688, but in this case we will
choose 1655.
a) Press the LIST button
b) The LIST sub-menus will appear on the DED (Data Entry Display). Press the “0” button on the ICP
(Integrated Control Panel) to select the MISC (Miscellaneous) sub-menu. 11d
9
c) Press the “5” button on the ICP to select the LASR (Laser) sub-menu.
d) The TGP code is selected by default (asterisks indicate field is selected).
e) To change laser code to “1655”, type “1655” on the ICP keypad
f) Press “ENTR” button (Enter) to update laser code.
11a
11a
11e
11c
11f
11f
11b
227
VIPER
F-16C
12. Make sure a steerpoint is set in the vicinity of the

target (see Navigation section on how to create
steerpoints).
13. Select CNI (Communications, Navigation &
Identification) DED page by pressing the
DCS/Dobber (Data Control Switch) left to RTN
CCIP Release Mode
14. Select desired steerpoint using the DED (Data Entry
Selected
Display) Increment/Decrement Switch. We will
select Steerpoint 2.
15. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select
CCIP Pipper 14b
desired weapon (a valid weapon must be selected,
like the GBU-12 laser-guided bomb).
16. On the SMS page, CCIP (Continuously Computed
Impact Point) mode is selected by default. TGP is
currently slaved to the CCIP pipper.
13b 15
16
Targeting Pod Reticle 14a 13a

(Slaved to CCIP Pipper)
228
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD 17a

VIPER
F-16C
17. On SMS page, select CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point)

weapon release mode. You can do this through the SMS page or
toggle release modes with the NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP button 17b
17
on your stick.
18. Pod will automatically be slaved to the selected steerpoint. NWS A/R DISC &
19. Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set TGP page MSL STEP Button
as the SOI (Sensor of Interest)
19a

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
SOI (Sensor of Interest) Control 19b
Indication Box
The current SOI can be identified by the box
around the MFD screen. The SOI is changed

from display to display with the Display

Designation Box
17c

CCRP Release
Mode Selected 229
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In 23
Designation Box
3.5 – Start-Up & Lasing Procedure • MAN RNG Counter-Clockwise: Zooms Out
• UNCAGE (Depressed): Laser Spot Search Mode (“C” binding)
VIPER
F-16C
20. Press TMS RIGHT to set an Area Track (or TMS UP for a Point Track) on
the steerpoint location. Then, slew the targeting pod using the Radar
Cursor switch
21. Select desired Sensor Mode using the TV/BHOT/WHOT OSB (Option
Select Button) or using the TMS (Target Management Switch) LEFT.
22. Set Field of View as desired using the NARO/WIDE OSB or using the
Expand/FOV button.
23. Use the MAN RNG (Manual Range) Knob controls to set zoom level.
• CCW (Counter-Clockwise): Zooms OUT 20b
• CW (Clockwise): Zooms IN CCRP Release 26
Radar Cursor/Enable Switch (Flashing)
24. Select Tracking Mode using the TMS (Target Management Switch): TMS Mode Selected
UP for Point Track (POINT, tracks moving objects) or TMS RIGHT for Area
Track (AREA, tracks static objects).
22
25. Fire Laser by pressing and holding the Camera/Gun First Stage Trigger.
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Data
26. A flashing “L” indicates laser is being fired. You may now launch laser- • Coordinates (North/South)
guided weapons as per their release procedure. • Coordinates (East/West)
•
21
27. Release trigger to stop firing laser. Mean Sea Level Altitude (ft)
23
25 20b
Targeting Pod Cursor
Camera/Gun Trigger TMS (Target Management Switch) 24
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT Point Track
(Two Stages)
20a 21 24 26
(Flashing)
Slant Range to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) (nm)
The preceding letter indicates the source of the range data.
Expand/FOV (Field-of-View) • L: Laser (priority over all other sources)
• T: Targeting Pod passive ranging
Button Targeting Pod Laser Code 230
22 • (blank): Sensor that is not the TGP is providing range (for example,
FCR A-G ranging) Laser code used by your targeting pod when designating a target.
3.6 – Steerpoint Slaving Mode & Cursor Zero (CZ)
VIPER
You
F-16C
The F-16’s targeting pod is used primarily by slaving the pod on

waypoints/steerpoints of your flight plan. I highly recommend that you have
a steerpoint already set near a target. Then, you can slave the targeting pod
to this waypoint and find the target by slewing the pod reticle.
Steerpoint 2
Steerpoint 2
(Target)
231
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP
Designation Box slaved
3.6 – Steerpoint Slaving Mode & Cursor Zero (CZ) on Steerpoint 2
VIPER
F-16C
To slave the targeting pod to a waypoint, the in-depth procedure is explained

in the Lasing Procedure section. Here is a quick summary:
1. Targeting pod and radar altimeter must be powered on

2. A-G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode must be selected 6
3. Targeting pod A-G mode must be selected 4
4. A valid steerpoint must be selected NWS A/R DISC &
MSL STEP Button
5. A valid weapon must be selected Steerpoint 2 Selected
6. CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) release mode must be 8
selected via the SMS (Stores Management Set), or toggled with the NWS
A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button DMS (Display Management Switch)
7. The targeting pod will automatically slave to the active steerpoint UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
8. Set the TGP as the SOI using the DMS (Display Management Switch)
DOWN. CCRP Release Mode Selected
9. Press TMS RIGHT to set an Area Track on the steerpoint location. Then,
you can slew the targeting pod as desired using the Radar Cursor switch.
2 A-G Master Mode Button
Other TGP controls are as per the Lasing Procedure section.
3 A-G TGP Mode
CCRP Release Mode Selected
Targeting Pod Reticle GBU-12 Weapon Selected 5

Radar Cursor/Enable Switch 232

Depress, Multidirectional 8 TGP SOI Box
3.6 – Steerpoint Slaving Mode & Cursor Zero (CZ)
VIPER
F-16C
When the targeting pod is slaved to a steerpoint, the targeting pod’s reticle will create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest). Slewing the reticle of the pod will move the position of the SPI, which
will dynamically create steerpoint offsets, also referred as “deltas”.
System deltas are longitude and latitude offset values which reflect the horizontal difference between the SPI position and the currently selected steerpoint’s original position. The SPI
position is initially locked on the steerpoint position. Once SPI is moved (by slewing the TGP) system delta values change. These delta values are applied to all steerpoints, even though the
original steerpoint positions (including Bullseye) will still be displayed on the FCR (Fire Control Radar) and HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) pages.
The Cursor Zero function (which is available on the TGP page) allows you to erase any previously created system delta. All steerpoints will return to their original position, and will return the
SPI position to the current steerpoint position.
CZ has not been performed CZ has been performed

TGP Reticle has been slewed away from steerpoint, creating an offset (delta) TGP Reticle is slewed back directly on the steerpoint. No offset (delta) exists.
Selected Steerpoint Selected Steerpoint

Location Location
CZ (Cursor Zero)
has been pressed
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
233
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP
Designation Box
3.7 – Snowplow Mode
VIPER
F-16C
The “snowplow” (SP) mode is a basic “look and designate” mode that is done through the
targeting pod feed. This is more or less the secondary employment mode of the targeting pod.
• This mode is available in NAV and A-G modes while the TGP is not tracking. This mode is
available when SP is displayed adjacent to the OSB (not shown). When SP is pressed, both the
FCR and TGP are commanded to snowplow mode.
• In snowplow mode, the TGP line-of-sight is commanded straight ahead and angled
downwards to point to the ground ahead at half of the currently selected FCR (Fire Control
Radar) scale (for example, if selected FCR scale is 40 nm, the TGP will look at the point on the
ground 20 nm ahead). Because the location determined by the reticle is snowplowing, the SPI
(Sensor Point of Interest) itself will also snowplow.
• In snowplow mode, slewing is disabled; however, it is possible to ground-stabilize by pressing
TMS (Target Management Switch) UP. This will exit SP mode and enter a normal AREA track.
SP (Snowplow) Selected

(Snowplow mode)
234
1
3.7 – Snowplow Mode
VIPER
F-16C
In the eventuality that you have no waypoints to slave the

Targeting pod to, you can:
1. Select A-G Master Mode

2. On the SMS page, select desired weapon (a valid weapon
must be selected).
3. On the SMS page, select CCRP Mode
4. Set the TGP page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) by using
DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN
5. By default, the TGP should be slaved to the selected
steerpoint. Reject the target by using TMS (Target 4
Management Switch) DOWN
6. SP function should be available on the TGP page.
7. Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to SP to activate
Snowplow mode.
2
DMS (Display Management Switch) 7
4 UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
Targeting Pod Reticle 6

(Slaved to Steerpoint)
SP Mode Available
TMS (Target Management Switch) 235

5
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
3.7 – Snowplow Mode 8 10
VIPER
F-16C
8. The targeting pod’s line-of-sight is commanded straight ahead

and angled downwards to point to the ground ahead
9. Press TMS RIGHT to set an Area Track (or TMS UP for a Point TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP
Designation Box TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP
Track) on the location of the TGP reticle. This will exit SP Mode Designation Box
and make the SPI slewable.
10. Slew the targeting pod as desired using the Radar Cursor switch.
Other TGP controls are as per the Lasing Procedure section.
11. Rejecting the target by using TMS (Target Management Switch)
DOWN will slave the targeting pod back to the selected
steerpoint.
10 8 10 SP Mode Unavailable


(Snowplow Mode,
reticle is not slewable)
TMS (Target Management Switch) Targeting Pod Reticle

9 SP Mode Active (Area Track, Reticle Slewable)
236
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
2
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD 2
3.8 – Laser Spot Search (LSS) Mode
VIPER
7
F-16C
The targeting pod can also spot and track a laser from someone else (a friendly Hornet lasing his own target, or
a JTAC, Joint Tactical Air Controller, calling an air strike). To track another laser:
1. Find out what the laser code used by the friendly is (in our case, the friendly JTAC uses code 1688). Make
sure the friendly asset is lasing the target before attempting to track it.
2. Power up the Targeting Pod and set A/G Master Mode as per the previous Power-Up Procedure. 6
3. Select a valid air-to-ground weapon and CCRP release mode
4. Set the TGP page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) by using DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN
5. Uncage the targeting pod in boresight mode using TMS (Target Management Switch) DOWN
6. Set Master Arm Switch – ON (UP)
2
7. Set Laser Switch – ARMED (UP)
2
1
3
3
2
DMS (Display Management Switch) 4
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
SOI Box
4
TMS (Target Management Switch) 2 237

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
8c
3.8 – Laser Spot Search (LSS) Mode
VIPER
F-16C
8. Set the Targeting Pod’s LSS (Laser Spot Search) Code used by the JTAC. The default laser code is 1688.
a) Press the LIST button
b) The LIST sub-menus will appear on the DED (Data Entry Display). Press the “0” button on the ICP (Integrated Control
Panel) to select the MISC (Miscellaneous) sub-menu. 8d
c) Press the “5” button on the ICP to select the LASR (Laser) sub-menu.
d) The TGP code is selected by default (asterisks indicate field is selected).
e) Press the DCS/Dobber (Data Control Switch) DOWN to select the LST (Laser Spot Track) Code.
f) The default code of “1688” is already entered, but if we were to change the laser LST code to something else, we would
need to type the code (“1688”) on the ICP keypad,
g) Press “ENTR” button (Enter) to update LST code if required.
8a
8a
8e
11e
8c
8f
8g
11f
8b
8g
238
8e
• MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In 10
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD • MAN RNG Counter-Clockwise: Zooms Out
3.8 – Laser Spot Search (LSS) Mode • UNCAGE (Depressed): Laser Spot Search
VIPER
F-16C
9. Fly in the vicinity of the JTAC or laser designator. If a steerpoint is available next to the
JTAC, it is good practice to slave your TGP to this steerpoint to narrow the laser search
region and facilitate laser spotting.
10. Press the Uncage Switch (Depressed) on the MAN RNG/UNCAGE Knob to activate Laser
Spot Search Mode.
11. Once selected, the LSS (Laser Spot Search) indication will be boxed.
12. When targeting pod has found a friendly laser, targeting pod mode will switch from LSS
(Laser Spot Search) to LST (Laser Spot Track). It will actively track the JTAC laser.
13. Select Tracking Mode using the TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to toggle
13
between Point Track (POINT, tracks moving objects) or Area Track (AREA, tracks static
objects). This will allow you to designate this target. TMS (Target Management Switch)
14. You may now launch laser-guided weapons as per their release procedure. UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
15. When desired, press the Uncage Switch (Depressed) on the MAN RNG/UNCAGE Knob
to stop tracking the laser.
LSS Code (1688) TGP (Targeting Pod)

12 Designation Box
Laser Spotted!
12 Tracking Laser (LST)
Searching Laser (LSS)
11
239
3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation
VIPER
3.9.1 - Operation Modes

F-16C
The targeting pod can also be used in air-to-air modes in conjunction

with the radar. This is quite useful to perform visual identifications of
air targets. To use Air-to-Air mode, the LITENING TGP (Targeting Pod)
requires the A-A Master Mode to be active. The TGP is automatically
commanded to the radar line-of-sight when A-A master mode is
selected, and the radar is tracking a target. If the radar is not tracking
an aerial target, the pod directs its line-of-sight straight ahead at minus- Radar
3 degrees elevation. Here are the main A-A operation modes of the Targeting Pod
pod:
• Radar Slaved (Body): The TGP is slaved to radar’s

locked target.
• Point Track (POINT): The TGP itself is tracking a

target. Point Track is accessed by "bumping" the
Targeting Pod (TGP)
TMS UP (Target Management Switch) while the FCR (Fire Control Feed
TGP page is the SOI (Sensor of Interest), and will Radar) Page Feed
attempt to acquire a recognized target within the
reticle.
• Rate Track (RATES): This tracking mode is

automatically selected whenever the targeting
pod loses a track.
240
Bugged Target
3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD Target Designator
DMS (Display
3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation Management Switch)
(TD) Box
VIPER
3.9.2 – Point Track (Slaved from Radar)

F-16C
In order to track a target with the targeting pod:
1. Make sure the FCR (Fire Control Radar) and targeting pod are powered
2. Press the A-A Master Mode button. The Targeting Pod should automatically
switch to A-A (Air-to-Air) mode. TMS (Target
3. Select FCR (Fire Control Radar) and TGP (Targeting Pod) pages. Management Switch)
4. Press the DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set the FCR (Fire
Control Radar) page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
5. Acquire STT (Single Target Track) radar lock using the Radar Cursor switch
and TMS (Target Management Switch) UP twice in quick succession.
6. The targeting pod will automatically slew its reticle on the radar locked
target. However, Point Track is not yet active.
FCR SOI Box Radar Locked Target 2

(STT)
TGP Slaved to Radar

3 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT TARGETING POD MAN RNG/UNCAGE Knob/Switch
• MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In Designation is correlated 9
3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation • MAN RNG Counter-Clockwise: Zooms Out between the TGP and
VIPER
radar (FCR)
3.9.2 – Point Track (Slaved from Radar)
F-16C
7. Press the DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set the TGP (Targeting
Pod) page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
8. Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to attempt a Point Track.
9. Once the target is both locked by the FCR and tracked by the TGP in Point
Track mode, the target is “correlated” between sensors. On the Heads-Up
Display, a “broken” (dashed) box and a solid box will both overlay the target.
10. Select desired Sensor Mode using the TV/BHOT/WHOT OSB (Option Select
Button) or using the TMS (Target Management Switch) LEFT.
Expand/FOV button.
• CCW (Counter-Clockwise): Zooms OUT Situational Awareness Cue (Targeting
• CW (Clockwise): Zooms IN TGP SOI Box Pod View Relative Direction)

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
TGP Point Track
TGP Slaved to Radar
Button
242
DMS (Display
3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation Management Switch)
VIPER
3.9.3 – Target Correlation & Other Tips

F-16C
Designation is not
• Note 1: If you want to “dump” (undesignate) the target from the targeting pod, correlated between the
press TMS (Target Management Switch) DOWN while the TGP is the Sensor of TGP and radar (FCR)
Interest (SOI). Tracking mode will revert to RATES.
c
• Note 2: If you want to exit radar STT (Single Target Track) lock and designate the TMS (Target
target with the targeting pod only: Management Switch)
a) Press the DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set the FCR
(Fire Control Radar) page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
b) Press the TMS (Target Management Switch) on the stick DOWN twice
to exit STT and return to RWS (Range While Search) FCR mode
c) On the Heads-Up Display, the solid box will disappear and only a
“broken” (dashed) box will remain over the target. This means that the
target is no longer correlated between the targeting pod and the radar.
Target no longer in
FCR SOI Box Target in STT Lock
STT Lock
c Target tracked
by TGP only
a
b
243
3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation
VIPER
3.9.3 – Target Correlation & Other Tips

F-16C
• Note 3: If your target pod ever loses track of the target, the TGP will revert to RATES. In that case, set the FCR as the
SOI (Sensor of Interest) with DMS DOWN, exit STT radar lock, perform a STT radar lock again, then the TGP will be
slaved back to the target.
244
4 – AGM-65 MAVERICK AIR-TO-GROUND MISSILE
4.1 – Displays Maverick Delivery Option
• PRE: Pre-planned
VIPER
F-16C
The AGM-65 feed is displayed through the WPN (Weapon) page. • VIS: Visual
• BORE: Boresight
Weapon Field of View (FOV)
Maverick Mode Status

STBY/OPER
Missile Count & Type Selected
Maverick BSGT (Boresight) Function Track Polarity Option

For AGM65H/K:
Boresight correction for SLAVE modes
• WB: White-On-Black
(AGM-65D/G)
• BW: Black-On-White
For AGM-65D/G:
Horizontal Range • HOC: Hot-On-Cold Polarity Contrast

Narrow FOV Marker • COH: Cold-On-Hot Polarity Contrast
to Target (nm)
For AGM-65G/K:
• AREA: Force Correlate Option
Missile Pointing Cross
Missile Line-of-Sight
Missile Hand-Off Status Indication MLE (Missile Launch Envelope)

• C: Missile Handoff is Completed
• T: Targeting Pod has commanded the missile to track Missile Station (Not Boxed = Not Active)
• I: Missile handoff is incomplete
• S: Missile is slaved to the targeting pod but not tracking
Time To Go
Missile Station (Boxed = Active)

Missile Seeker Depression Angle Markers
Missile Status
245
4 – AGM-65 MAVERICK AIR-TO-GROUND MISSILE
4.1 – Displays
VIPER
F-16C
Horizontal Range
to Target (nm)
TD (Target Designator) Box

Targeting Pod designation box
MLE (Missile Launch Envelope) Range Scale (nm)
MLE (Missile Launch Envelope) Maximum Range

Maverick Missile LOS (Line

of Sight) Circle
MLE (Missile Launch Envelope)
MLE (Missile Launch Envelope) Minimum Range
Time To Go
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Range (nm)

SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Bearing
246
AGM-65 (Maverick Missile) Handoff Submode
4 – AGM-65 MAVERICK AIR-TO-GROUND MISSILE • MAN: The AGM-65 will be slaved to the Line of Sight of the TGP but will not automatically be handed off the
lock. Pilot must manually change SOI to AGM-65 and command lock manually.
4.2 – Controls • AUTO: TMS UP creates a point track, which automatically triggers an automatic hand off attempt.
VIPER
Alternatively: TMS RIGHT, with TGP SOI, will repeat hand off the lock to the AGM-65 if the target contrast and
F-16C
size meet criteria of missile lock.

• DMS (Display Management Switch):
• UP: Swaps SOI (Sensor of Interest) to the HUD (Heads-Up Display)
• DOWN: Swaps SOI (Sensor of Interest) to the left or right display.
• TMS (Target Management Switch) with WPN page SOI (Sensor of Interest):
• UP: Selects Point Track (POINT, tracks an object like a high-contrast vehicle).
• If AUTO Handoff is selected with an AGM-65D/G and point track is acquired,
automatic handoff is performed.
• LEFT: Toggles Polarity
• WB/BW for AGM-65H/K
• HOC/COH for AGM-65D/G
• AREA for AGM-65G/K
• RIGHT: With TGP SOI, will hand off the lock to the AGM-65 if the target contrast and
size meet criteria of missile lock.
• DOWN: Target Reject
• Expand/FOV Button with WPN page SOI: Toggles between narrow and wide field-of-view TGP (Targeting Pod Page)
• Radar Cursor Switch: Slews maverick reticle in VIS or BORE mode.

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
Radar Cursor/Enable Switch Expand/FOV (Field-of-View) 247

Depress, Multidirectional Button
F-16C
PART 11 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT VIPER
248
SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 - Introduction • 3 – Air-to-Air Weapons
VIPER
F-16C
• 1.1 – Introduction to Weapons

• 3.1 – M61A1 Gun
• 1.2 – Armament Overview
• 3.1.1 – EEGS (Enhanced Envelope Gun Sight) Introduction
• 1.3 – My Weapons Control Setup
• 3.1.2 – EEGS Level II (No Radar)
• 1.4 – SMS (Stores Management Set) Page
• 3.1.3 – EEGS Level V (With Radar)
• 1.5 – Bomb Delivery Modes
• 3.2 – AIM-9M Sidewinder
• 3.2.1 – Sidewinder Introduction
• 2 – Air-to-Ground Weapons • 3.2.2 – No Radar
PART 11 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT
• 2.1 – Unguided Bombs • 3.2.3 – Radar

• 2.1.1 – MK-82 Low Drag (CCIP) • 3.3 – AIM-9X HOBS Sidewinder (HMCS)
• 2.1.2 – MK-82AIR High Drag (Post-Designate CCIP) • 3.4 – AIM-120C AMRAAM
• 2.1.3 – MK-82 Snake Eyes (CCRP with Steerpoint) • 3.4.1 – AMRAAM Introduction
• 2.1.4 – MK-84 (CCRP with Targeting Pod) • 3.4.2 – Radar – Single Target
• 2.2 – CBU-87 Cluster Bombs (CCIP) • 3.4.3 – Radar – Multiple Targets
• 2.3 – GBU-12 Paveway II (Laser-Guided)
• 2.4 – Rockets • 4 – Ordnance Jettison
• 2.5 – M61A1 Gun (Air-to-Ground)
• 4.1 – Selective Ordnance Jettison
• 2.6 – AGM-65D/G/H/K Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile
• 4.2 – Emergency Stores Jettison
• 2.6.1 – Introduction
• 2.6.2 – AGM-65G (Pre-Planned Mode + Targeting Pod)
• 2.6.3 – AGM-65D (Boresight Mode)
• 2.6.4 – AGM-65H (Visual Mode)
• 2.7 – AGM-88C HARM Anti-Radiation Missile
• 2.7.1 – Introduction
• 2.7.2 – AGM-88C HAS (HARM As Sensor) Mode
• 2.7.3 – AGM-88C HAD/HTS (HARM Attack Display/HARM Targeting System Pod) Mode
• 2.7.4 – AGM-88C POS (Position) Mode
• 2.7.4.1 – PB (Pre-Briefed) POS Sub-Mode
• 2.7.4.2 – EOM (Equation of Motion) POS Sub-Mode
• 2.7.4.3 – RUK (Range Unknown) POS Sub-Mode
• 2.8 – GBU-38 JDAM (Not Available Yet)
• 2.9 – AGM-154C JSOW (Not Available Yet)
249
1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO WEAPONS
The F-16 carries a good variety of weapons. The strength of the Viper lies in its array of sensors: the FCR (Fire Control Radar) and Targeting Pod provide you a lot of information in order to use both
VIPER
F-16C
guided and unguided weapons with great precision. The Viper is a multirole aircraft by design, therefore the types of missions you can perform is quite extensive. Most of the weapon functions are
directly accessible from HOTAS (Hands On Throttle And Stick) controls. The workload should be relatively light while allowing you as many options to use your weapons as the mission requires.
250
VIPER
F-16C
1.2 – ARMAMENT OVERVIEW
BOMBS
WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE
MK-82 500 lbs low-drag unguided bomb CBU-87 Combined Effects Munitions (CEM) weighs 950 lbs and
Fuze Setting: is an all-purpose cluster bomb.
• Either Nose, Tail, or NSTL (Nose/Tail) for Fuze Setting:
redundancy. • NSTL (Nose & Tail): Bomblets dispense using settings

displayed on SMS page
• NOSE: Bomblets dispense immediately after release
• TAIL: Dud (Disarmed)
MK-82SE 500 lbs unguided low-drag retarded CBU-97 1,000-pound class weapon containing sensor-fused sub-
(Snake Eye) bomb munitions for specifically attacking armor.
Fuze Setting: Fuze Setting:
• NSTL (Nose & Tail): High Drag • NSTL (Nose & Tail): Bomblets dispense using settings
• NOSE: Low Drag displayed on SMS page
• TAIL: High Drag • NOSE: Bomblets dispense immediately after release
MK-82AIR 500 lbs high-drag unguided bomb BDU-33 25 lbs unguided training bomb
Fuze Setting: Fuze Setting:
• NSTL (Nose & Tail): High Drag • Either Nose, Tail, or NSTL (Nose/Tail) for redundancy.
• NOSE: Low Drag
• TAIL: High Drag
MK-84 2000 lbs low-drag unguided bomb AGM-154A/B Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided Joint Standoff
Fuze Setting: Weapon (JSOW) glide bombs
• Either Nose, Tail, or NSTL (Nose/Tail) for
JSOW
redundancy.
GBU-10/12/16 2000/500/1000 lbs laser-guided bomb GBU-38 Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided Joint Direct
Fuze Setting: Attack Munition (JDAM) bombs
PAVEWAY II • Either Nose, Tail, or NSTL (Nose/Tail) for
JDAM
redundancy.
251
VIPER
GUN POD AIR-TO-AIR MISSILES ROCKETS

F-16C
WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE

M61A1 Six-barrel 20 mm Gatling- AIM-9L/M Sidewinder Infrared guided air-to-air missile. 2.75 in 2.75 inches rocket, used for general
Vulcan type rotary cannon (512 Referred as “SRM” (Short Range purpose
rounds) Missile) on the HUD.
AIM-9X Sidewinder Infrared guided air-to-air missile

with thrust vectoring. Referred as
“HOB” (High Off-Boresight
Missile) on the HUD.
AIM-120 AMRAAM Advanced Medium Range Air-to-
Air Missile (AMRAAM), active
radar homing air-to-air missile.
Referred as “MRM” (Medium
Range Missile) on the HUD.
252
VIPER
AIR-TO-GROUND MISSILES
F-16C
WEAPON TYPE
AGM-65D Maverick – IR Seeker Air-to-Ground missile guided by imaging infrared system and used at night and during bad weather.
AGM-88C HARM Air-to-Surface High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missile (HARM) missile. Anti-radiation guidance homes in on radiowave emissions
from a radar, allowing it to attack surface-to-air missile (SAM) sites. Uses the HTS (HARM Targeting System) pod
253
1.3 – MY WEAPONS CONTROLS SETUP NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button
• NWS: Nosewheel Steering Activation
• A/R: When in flight and the AIR REFUEL switch in the OPEN position, depressing the
Real Aircraft Controls
VIPER
F-16C
button disconnects boom latching

• MSL (MISSILE) STEP: When in flight, depressing the button in EO or A-A mode
DMS (Display Management Switch) selects the next weapon station. Depressing the button in A-G Mode cycles between
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT CCRP, CCIP and DTOS.

• MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In

• UNCAGE (Depressed): Laser Spot Search
Mode or uncages sidewinder (“C” binding)
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
Camera/Gun Trigger
(Two Stages)
Button


Dogfight Switch
• DOGFIGHT (Outboard): provides symbology on HUD
for both 20 mm gun firing and air-to-air missile
delivery
• Missile Override (Inboard): provides symbology on
HUD for air-to-air missile firing only254
1.3 – MY WEAPONS CONTROLS SETUP
My Controls
VIPER
F-16C
NWS A/R DISC MSL STEP Button (hidden

grey button on right hand side) DMS UP
DMS RIGHT
DMS DOWN
DMS LEFT
TMS UP
Weapon
WPN Release
REL Button
TMS RIGHT
TMS DOWN
TMS LEFT
Camera/Gun Trigger ANT ELEV Knob (Radar Antenna Elevation)

(Two Detents)
ENABLE Switch (Enter)

Expand/FOV Button

UNCAGE Switch

MAN RNG Knob – CW (Zoom In)
255
1.4 – SMS PAGE
Note:
(STORES MANAGEMENT SET) • MAU stands for “MAU-12 Bomb Ejector Rack”.
VIPER
F-16C
• TER stands for “Triple Ejector Rack”.

The SMS (Stores Management Set) page can be accessed by clicking on the SMS OSB (Option Select Button). This page • L03 stands for “LAU-3 Rocket Pod”.
allows for viewing, configuration and status monitoring of loaded stores. This page acts like the A-10C’s DSMS (Digital • MRL stands for “Missile Rail Launcher”
Stores Management Systems) page and allows you to select your armament and program useful options like bomb
delivery mode or advanced air-to-air missile modes.
The display provides the number, type, and status of all stores loaded on the aircraft’s weapon stations.
• Different options are available depending on the type of weapons that are selected NAV Master Mode Selected
• If the NAV Master Mode is selected (neither A-A or A-G are selected), the Inventory Page is selected
by default.
• A Selective Jettison page (S-J) is also available that allows selected stores to be jettisoned in an
unarmed state.
Inventory
(NAV Master Mode Selected)
AIM-9X (A-9X)
AIM-9X (A-9X)
AIM-120C AIM-120C
(A120C) (A120C)
CBU-97 19 x M151 Rockets

(CB97B) (19M151)
SMS Menu OSB
S-J (Selective
2 x MK-82 Bomb 256
GBU-12 (GB12) Jettison) Menu OSB
(M82) Targeting Pod (TGP) External Fuel Tank (TK300)
Gun Rounds Remaining (51 = 512)
1.4 – SMS PAGE Ammunition Type (PGU28) INV (Inventory) Page Selected
(STORES MANAGEMENT SET)

VIPER
F-16C
• If the NAV Master Mode is selected (neither A-A or A-G are selected), the Inventory Page is Station 5
selected by default.
• If either A-A (Air-to-Air) or A-G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode is selected, you can access the
Inventory page by selecting the INV OSB.
Station 3 Station 6
• When SMS is selected and the Master Mode is A-G the SMS page displays only information
relevant to A-G weapons.
• When SMS is selected and the Master Mode is A-A the SMS page displays only information Station 3 Station 7
relevant to AAM (Air-to-Air Missile) weapons.
Station 2 Station 8
Station 1 Station 9
A-G Master Mode INV (Inventory) Page OSB A-A Master Mode INV (Inventory) Page OSB
Weapon Selected
This OSB toggles between different weapons
SMS Page
SMS Page A-A Master Mode Selected
A-G Master Mode Selected
A-A Master Mode Button
A-G Master Mode Button

M2M = Medium Range Missile, Station 2 Selected 257
1.5 – BOMB DELIVERY MODES
CCIP & CCRP
VIPER
F-16C
There are 5 main methods to deliver a bomb:

• CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point)
• CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point)
• DTOS (Dive Toss) – Not Simulated Yet
• LADD (Low Altitude Drogue Delivery) – Not Simulated Yet
• MAN (Manual) – Not Simulated Yet
CCIP mode is the traditional dive bombing approach: you dive on target and the reticle will
tell you where the bomb will impact.
However, dive bombing is a risky business, especially if anti-air defences are surrounding CCIP: Continuously Computed Impact Point
your target. The lower you go, the more vulnerable you are. This is why CCRP release
mode was invented.
CCRP mode allows you to fly straight and level without having to dive down. The HUD will
tell you when to release your bomb for the target you have designated with your radar. It
is a much safer way to release a bomb, but as you may have guessed already, it is less
precise.
CCRP: Continuously Computed Release Point
258
3a
2.1.1 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
1. Verify that FCR (Fire Control Radar) switch is ON (FWD); the FCR is used for target ranging.
2. (Optional) If you wish to use the targeting pod laser to range the target:
7
a) Set the RIGHT HDPT switch to ON (FWD).
b) Set Laser Switch – ARMED (UP)
3. Select Air-to-Ground Master Mode by pressing the A-G Button on the ICP (Integrated
Control Panel). This will configure the Fire Control Radar, Targeting Pod and displays for
air-to-ground attacks. 3b
4. Set Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)

5. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select MK-82 bombs (M82) by toggling 5
weapons with the OSB (Option Select Button) adjacent to the Selected Weapon option.
6. On the SMS page, select desired weapon profile. Let’s take PROF1 since it is CCIP-
compliant by default.
7. On the SMS page, verify that CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) release mode is
selected. If it is not, press the OSB next to the Release Mode option and select OSB next to 6
“CCIP”. Alternatively, you can toggle Release Mode with the NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP
button on the stick.

7
2b
2a
259
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
8. Set desired fuzing option (press OSB to toggle setting). We will set
NSTL.
• NOSE: Nose Fuze only
• TAIL: Tail Fuze only
• NSTL: Nose & Tail, typically used for redundancy.
9. Set desired Single/Pair option (press OSB to toggle setting). We
will select SINGLE.
• SGL: Single Launcher

• PAIR: With PAIR selected, bombs will be released from
both opposite stations, assuming identical bombs are 8
loaded on stations 4 and 6 or 3 and 7.
10. If more than one bomb is to be released, set desired Release
Interval option. In our case, this setting is not relevant.
• Type in the new impact spacing distance using the OSBs
on the left and right of the display and select ENTR.
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting 12
9
RCL or return to the SMS page without making changes by
selecting RTN.
11. If more than one bomb is to be released, set the number of
release pulses. We will leave it at 1. 10
• Type in the desired number of release pulses using the
OSBs on the left and right of the display and select ENTR.
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting
RCL or return to the SMS page without making changes by
selecting RTN.
12. Verify that System Status displays RDY (Ready) on the SMS page.
11
260
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
13. Place the target 30 degrees off your nose, left or right.
• For a 45-degree dive, place the target just below the canopy rail.
• For a 30-degree dive, place the target one fist length above the canopy rail
• For a 20-degree dive, place the target a fist with thumbs up above the canopy rail.
• For a 10-degree dive, place the target the length of a hang-ten hand signal above the canopy rail (pinky tip to top of thumb).
14. Once you have the correct sight picture, roll in on the target. In our case, we will perform a 30-deg dive.
Target
Fist with Thumbs Up
Hang-Ten Hand Signal
Canopy Rail 261

(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
15. When performing your dive, place your FPM Time Delay Cue (TDC)
(Flight Path Marker) to an Aim Off Distance Displays a mirrored view of how far below
Point of your choosing (typically 2000 ft Flight Path Marker (FPM) the HUD the real CCIP aiming pipper is
further than the target).
16. Align the BFL (Bomb Fall Line) with the target. Bomb Fall Line (BFL)
17. The CCIP pipper tracks up the bomb fall line
towards the target.. Don’t fly the pipper to the
target or hold it on the target using forward

stick (you risk colliding with your own bomb on
release). Wait for the pipper to intersect the
target naturally.
18. If the CCIP impact point does not lay within the
HUD field of view, the Time Delay Cue (TDC) is Master Arm ON
shown as a short, horizonal line on the Bomb
Fall Line. CCIP Release Mode Selected
Slant Range Indicator

(nm)
Target
CCIP Pipper
262
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
19. When the TDC is no longer displayed on the Bomb Fall Line,
the pipper is in the HUD field of view. That will be the impact
point if the bombs are released immediately.
20. (Optional) If the targeting pod is equipped, press the first 20
stage of the gun trigger to fire your laser and acquire ranging
information from the laser. When laser is being fired, the “L” Laser Armed
symbol on the HUD will flash. Releasing the trigger stops (When flashing, laser is firing)
lasing.
Target
• When “laser ranging”, the laser is fired and the time
it takes to receive the reflected laser energy is
measured, providing a precise range. This
information is then fed to the Fire Control
Computer to update the stored target elevation and
greatly improve the accuracy of the computed firing
solution.
• If Laser Ranging is not used, the Fire Control
Computer will still display a range, but not as
precise.
21. Monitor the Pull-Up Anticipation Cue (PUAC) to ensure it
does not go above the Flight Path Marker (see note on PUAC
at the end of this tutorial).
22. When CCIP pipper intersects the target, depress the (nm)
Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to release the bomb.
CCIP Pipper
22
Weapon Release
Button
Camera/Gun Trigger
20 263
(Two Stages)
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
23. After release, fly a safe escape maneuver to avoid the bomb fragmentation.
A 5G pull-up to a 30-deg climb is recommended.
264
F-16C
(CCIP)
265
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
Note on Time Delay Cue (TDC):
Between the CCIP pipper and the velocity vector marker is the Time Delay Cue (also called
Reflected Cue).
When the Time Delay Cue (TDC) is visible on the BFL (Bomb Fall Line), it indicates that the CCIP Time Delay Cue (TDC)
pipper on the HUD is not showing the true impact point if you were to drop the bomb at that Displays a mirrored view of how far below
CCIP BFL (Bomb
moment. the HUD the real CCIP aiming pipper is

Fall Line)
Instead, the true impact location is a mirror of the distance from the Time Delay Cue to the CCIP
pipper. When Reflected Cue disappears, the CCIP pipper will then indicate the true impact point.
Distance between Time Delay Cue and CCIP Pipper
CCIP Pipper (With Time Delay Cue)

Not in range
CCIP Pipper (Without

True Impact Point
Time Delay Cue)
(Hidden from HUD)
In range: This is where your
bombs will drop. 266
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
Note on the PUAC (Pull-Up Anticipation Cue):
Monitor the Pull-Up Anticipation Cue to ensure it does not go above the Flight Path Marker.
The Pull-Up Anticipation Cue (PUAC) provides a visual representation of the altitude required for the bomb fuze to arm or altitude to initiate a pull-up to avoid impacting the ground, whichever is more
immediate. It moves up toward the Flight Path Marker (FPM) as the aircraft loses altitude. Releasing a bomb with the FPM below the PUAC will not give the bomb time to arm and result in a dud.
Pull-Up Anticipation Cue (PUAC)
267
2.1.2 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82AIR HIGH DRAG
(Post-Designate CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
An option for CCIP bombs delivery is available for situations where the target cannot be within the HUD field of view at release. This can sometimes happen on attacks from a shallow dive angle or high
altitude. The steps to enter CCIP mode are the same as described in the CCIP section. The difference is in when you depress and hold the Weapons Release button.
Target Designation
with CCIP Pipper
2
CCRP Release
268
2a
VIPER
F-16C
1. Verify that FCR (Fire Control Radar) switch is ON (FWD); the FCR is used for target
ranging.
6
Control Panel). This will configure the Fire Control Radar and displays for air-to-ground
attacks.
4. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select MK-82AIR bombs (B49, standing for 2b
the “BSU-49/B high drag tail assembly”, also called a “ballute”) by toggling weapons with 4
the OSB (Option Select Button) adjacent to the Selected Weapon option.
6. On the SMS page, verify that CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) release mode
is selected. If it is not, press the OSB next to the Release Mode option and select OSB 5
next to “CCIP”. Alternatively, you can toggle Release Mode with the NWS A/R DISC &
MSL STEP button on the stick.

6
269
VIPER
F-16C
7. Set desired fuzing option (press OSB to toggle setting). We will set NSTL.
• NSTL (Nose & Tail): High Drag
• NOSE: Low Drag
• TAIL: High Drag
8. Set desired Single/Pair option (press OSB to toggle setting). We will select PAIR.
• PAIR: With PAIR selected, bombs will be released from both opposite stations, assuming
identical bombs are loaded on stations 4 and 6 or 3 and 7.

9. If more than one bomb is to be released, set desired Release Interval option. We will set it to 25 ft.
• Type in the new impact spacing distance using the OSBs on the left and right of the display and
select ENTR.
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting RCL or return to the SMS page without 7
making changes by selecting RTN.
10. If more than one bomb is to be released, set the number of release pulses. We will set it to 2.
• Type in the desired number of release pulses using the OSBs on the left and right of the display
and select ENTR.
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting RCL or return to the SMS page without
11
8
9c 10c
9a
9b 10b
10a
9b
270
2.1.2 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82AIR HIGH DRAG 13
VIPER
F-16C
12. Once you have the correct sight picture, roll in on the target. In our Flight Path Marker (FPM)
Time Delay Cue (TDC)
case, we will perform a shallow dive (between 10 and 15 deg). Displays a mirrored view of how far below
13. If the CCIP impact point does not lay within the HUD field of view, the HUD the real CCIP aiming pipper is
the Time Delay Cue (TDC) is shown as a short, horizonal line on the
Bomb Fall Line. Bomb Fall Line (BFL)
14. Manoeuver your aircraft to position the CCIP Pipper on target and
align the BFL (Bomb Fall Line) with the target.
15. Designate the CCIP pipper’s location as the target by depressing and
holding the Weapons Release button (RALT+SPACE). Distance between Time Delay Cue and CCIP Pipper
Master Arm ON Slant Range Indicator

(nm)

CCIP Pipper (With Time Delay Cue)
Not in range
15
Weapon Release
Button
Target
True Impact Point

(Hidden from HUD)
271
2.1.2 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82AIR HIGH DRAG Weapon Release
(Post-Designate CCIP) Button
VIPER
F-16C
16. As you hold the Weapon Release button, the HUD symbology displayed will change to a symbology identical to that used for a CCRP delivery.
17. Level off the aircraft and keep the Flight Path Marker aligned with the Azimuth Steering Line (ASL). This will align your aircraft with the target even though
the target will be out of sight.
18. A Solution Cue is displayed at the top of the Steering Line. The Solution Cue will fall down the Azimuth Steering Line as the range decreases and the
weapon is about to be released.
19. As you keep the Weapon Release button held, keep flying the Flight Path Marker over the Azimuth Steering Line as the Solution Cue continues to track
downward.
20. The bombs are released when the Solution Cue passes the Flight Path Marker.
16 17
Solution Cue
Solution Cue
Flight Path Marker (FPM) Moves from Top to Bottom
Keep these aligned!
Flight Path Marker (FPM)
Azimuth Steering
Line (ASL)
(nm)
1
Target
Time to Target (sec)
Azimuth Steering
Line (ASL)
272
VIPER
F-16C
273
2.1.3 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82SE (SNAKE EYES)
(CCRP with Steerpoint)
VIPER
F-16C
1. We will be bombing a target that is directly on a steerpoint that is already in our flight plan (i.e. 4 TD (Target Designator) Box
Steerpoint No. 2). To enter Steerpoint coordinates manually, see the Navigation section.
2. Select CNI (Communications, Navigation & Identification) DED page by pressing the DCS/Dobber
(Data Control Switch) left to RTN
3. Select desired waypoint using the DED (Data Entry Display) Increment/Decrement Switch. We
will select Steerpoint 2.
4. Steer towards selected Steerpoint using cues on the HUD and HSD (Horizontal Situation Display)
page.
Slant Range (nm)
Time To Steerpoint 2 3b
Steerpoint 2 Selected
(Target)
2b
You 4 Steerpoint 2 (HSD Page)

3a
2a
274
6a
VIPER
F-16C
ranging.
6. Select Air-to-Ground Master Mode by pressing the A-G Button on the ICP (Integrated 10
Control Panel). This will configure the Fire Control Radar and displays for air-to-ground
attacks.
8. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select MK-82 Snake Eye bombs (M82S) by
toggling weapons with the OSB (Option Select Button) adjacent to the Selected Weapon 6b
option. 8
9. On the SMS page, select desired weapon profile. Let’s take PROF2 since it is CCRP-
10. On the SMS page, verify that CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) release mode
is selected. If it is not, press the OSB next to the Release Mode option and select OSB
next to “CCRP”. Alternatively, you can toggle Release Mode with the NWS A/R DISC & 9

10
275
VIPER
F-16C
• NSTL (Nose & Tail): High Drag
• NOSE: Low Drag
• TAIL: High Drag
12. Set desired Single/Pair option (press OSB to toggle setting). We will select PAIR.
• PAIR: With PAIR selected, bombs will be released from both opposite stations, assuming
identical bombs are loaded on stations 4 and 6 or 3 and 7.

13. If more than one bomb is to be released, set desired Release Interval option. We will set it to 100 ft.
• Type in the new impact spacing distance using the OSBs on the left and right of the display and
select ENTR.
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting RCL or return to the SMS page without 11
14. If more than one bomb is to be released, set the number of release pulses. We will set it to 3.
• Type in the desired number of release pulses using the OSBs on the left and right of the display
and select ENTR.
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting RCL or return to the SMS page without
15
12
13a
13c 14c
13b
14b
14a
13b 276
2.1.3 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82SE (SNAKE EYES) Solution Cue
Moves from Top to Bottom
VIPER
F-16C
16. Depending on the direction of the target, either a TLL (Target Locator Line) or a TD
(Target Designator) Box towards the Steerpoint/Target is displayed on the Heads-Up Flight Path Marker (FPM) Keep these aligned!
Display.
17. Level off the aircraft and keep the Flight Path Marker aligned with the Azimuth Steering
Line (ASL). This will align your aircraft with the target. Azimuth Steering
18. A Solution Cue is displayed at the top of the Azimuth Steering Line (ASL). The Solution Line (ASL)
Cue will fall down the Azimuth Steering Line as the range decreases and the weapon is
about to be released.
19. When Solution Cue falls down towards the Flight Path Marker, depress and hold the
Weapons Release button (RALT+SPACE).
20. As you keep the Weapon Release button held, keep flying the Flight Path Marker over Master Arm ON
the Azimuth Steering Line as the Solution Cue continues to track downward. Slant Range
21. The bombs are released when the Solution Cue passes the Flight Path Marker. Indicator (nm)
CCRP Release
Mode Selected
Target Locator Line (TLL)
Target Designation (TD)
Box (Out of HUD range) Time to
Target Designation (TD) Target (sec)
Box (Within HUD range)
Target
Distance to
Target (nm)
Bearing to
Target (deg)
19
Weapon Release
Button
277
VIPER
F-16C
278
4a
(CCRP with Targeting Pod)
VIPER
F-16C
2. Verify that Radar Altimeter (RDR ALT) switch is ON (FWD)
3. To use the targeting pod laser to range the target:
a) Set the RIGHT HDPT switch to ON (FWD). 8
4. Select Air-to-Ground Master Mode by pressing the A-G Button on the ICP (Integrated Control
Panel). This will configure the Fire Control Radar, Targeting Pod and displays for air-to-
ground attacks.
4b
6. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select MK-84 bombs (M84) by toggling weapons 6
with the OSB (Option Select Button) adjacent to the Selected Weapon option.
7. On the SMS page, select desired weapon profile. Let’s take PROF2 since it is CCRP-compliant
by default.
8. On the SMS page, verify that CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) release mode is
selected. If it is not, press the OSB next to the Release Mode option and select OSB next to 7
“CCRP”. Alternatively, you can toggle Release Mode with the NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP
button on the stick.
8
3b
2
3a
279
VIPER
F-16C
10. Set desired Single/Pair option (press OSB to toggle setting). We will select SINGLE.
• PAIR: With PAIR selected, bombs will be released from both opposite stations,
assuming identical bombs are loaded on stations 4 and 6 or 3 and 7.

11. If more than one bomb is to be released, set desired Release Interval option. In our
case, this setting is not relevant.
• Type in the new impact spacing distance using the OSBs on the left and right
of the display and select ENTR. 9
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting RCL or return to the
SMS page without making changes by selecting RTN.
12. If more than one bomb is to be released, set the number of release pulses. We will
leave it at 1.
• Type in the desired number of release pulses using the OSBs on the left and
right of the display and select ENTR.
SMS page without making changes by selecting RTN. 13 10
11
12
280
2.1.4 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-84 TD (Target Designator) Box
VIPER
F-16C
• Typically, a Steerpoint should be programmed in your flight plan near

the target. In this case, we will assume Steerpoint 2 is set near the
target.
14. Select CNI (Communications, Navigation & Identification) DED page

by pressing the DCS/Dobber (Data Control Switch) left to RTN
15. Select desired waypoint using the DED (Data Entry Display)
Increment/Decrement Switch. We will select Steerpoint 2.

16. When CCRP release mode is selected, the Targeting Pod will Slant Range (nm)
automatically be slaved to the selected steerpoint (Steerpoint 2 in
our case).
Time To Release
15b
14b
16 TGP Page
Targeting Pod Slaved to Steerpoint 2 15a
14a
281
2.1.4 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-84 • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In 21
(CCRP with Targeting Pod) • MAN RNG Counter-Clockwise: Zooms Out

VIPER
F-16C
17. Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set TGP page as the SOI
(Sensor of Interest). The SOI Box around the TGP page will indicate when
the targeting pod can be controlled with HOTAS controls.
18. Press TMS RIGHT to set an Area Track (or TMS UP for a Point Track) on the
steerpoint location. Then, slew the targeting pod using the Radar Cursor
switch
19. Select desired Sensor Mode using the TV/BHOT/WHOT OSB (Option Select
Button) or using the TMS (Target Management Switch) LEFT.

Expand/FOV button. 18b
21. Use the MAN RNG (Manual Range) Knob controls to set zoom level. CCRP Release
• CCW (Counter-Clockwise): Zooms OUT Radar Cursor/Enable Switch Time to Release (sec)
Depress, Multidirectional Mode Selected
• CW (Clockwise): Zooms IN
22. Select Tracking Mode using the TMS (Target Management Switch): TMS UP TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP
for Point Track (POINT, tracks moving objects) or TMS RIGHT for Area Track 20
Designation Box
(AREA, tracks static objects). 17b SOI (Sensor of Interest) Box

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT 19
17a
Coordinates & Elevation
21
18b
22 Targeting Pod Cursor
Point Track
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
18a 19 22
Laser Status
Steady L: Laser Armed
Slant Range to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) (nm) Flashing L: Laser Firing
The preceding letter indicates the source of the range
Expand/FOV (Field-of-View) data.
Button • L: Laser (priority over all other sources)
20 • T: Targeting Pod passive ranging
282
Time to Release (sec)
DMS (Display
2.1.4 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-84 Management Switch)

VIPER
F-16C
• Important Note: In the case where a Steerpoint is not available near the target, you can use snowplow
mode. To do so:
a) Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set TGP page as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest) TMS (Target
b) By default, the TGP should be slaved to the selected steerpoint. Reject the target by using Management Switch) Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
TMS (Target Management Switch) DOWN
c) SP function should be available on the TGP page.
d) Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to SP to activate Snowplow mode.

e) The targeting pod’s line-of-sight is commanded straight ahead and angled downwards to
point to the ground ahead
f) Press TMS RIGHT to set an Area Track (or TMS UP for a Point Track) on the location of the TGP
reticle. This will exit SP Mode and make the SPI slewable.
g) Slew the targeting pod as desired using the Radar Cursor switch. TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP
Designation Box
TGP (Targeting Pod) Page

(Square = SOI)

Designation Box
SP Selected
SPI (Slewable)
SPI (Not Slewable)

Select SP
Targeting Pod Slewed to Target

Targeting Pod in Snowplow (SP) 283
SP Unavailable
VIPER
F-16C
16. Depending on the direction of the target, either a TLL (Target Locator Line) Solution Cue
or a TD (Target Designator) Box towards the Steerpoint/Target is displayed Moves from Top to Bottom
on the Heads-Up Display.
17. Level off the aircraft and keep the Flight Path Marker aligned with the
Azimuth Steering Line (ASL). This will align your aircraft with the target.
18. A Solution Cue is displayed at the top of the Azimuth Steering Line (ASL). Flight Path Marker (FPM)
The Solution Cue will fall down the Azimuth Steering Line as the range
decreases and the weapon is about to be released. Keep these aligned!

19. (Optional) If desired, press the first stage of the gun trigger to fire your
laser and acquire ranging information from the laser. When laser is being Azimuth Steering
fired, the “L” symbol on the HUD will flash. Releasing the trigger stops Line (ASL)
lasing.
• When “laser ranging”, the laser is fired and the time it takes to
receive the reflected laser energy is measured, providing a precise
range. This information is then fed to the Fire Control Computer to
update the stored target elevation and greatly improve the
Laser Armed
accuracy of the computed firing solution.
(When flashing, laser is firing)
• If Laser Ranging is not used, the Fire Control Computer will still
display a range, but not as precise.
Slant Range
20. When Solution Cue falls down towards the Flight Path Marker, depress and
Indicator (nm)
hold the Weapons Release button (RALT+SPACE). Master Arm ON
21. As you keep the Weapon Release button held, keep flying the Flight Path
Marker over the Azimuth Steering Line as the Solution Cue continues to
track downward.
22. The bomb is released when the Solution Cue passes the Flight Path Marker.
CCRP Release
Mode Selected
Weapon Release Time to
19
Button Release (sec)

Box (Within HUD range) Target
Distance to
Camera/Gun Trigger Target (nm)
Bearing to
20 (Two Stages) 284
Target (deg)
VIPER
F-16C
23. Once bomb is released, the Time-to-Release indication will become a

Time-to-Impact indication (in seconds) on the Targeting Pod and HUD.
Time to
Impact (sec)
Time to
Impact (sec)
285
VIPER
F-16C
286
2.2 – CBU-87 CLUSTER BOMB
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
CBUs (Cluster Bomb Units) are generally used against “soft” targets.
Keep in mind that there are two parameters that affect the effectiveness of CBUs. At the moment, we cannot modify them yet.
• Height of Function (HoF), which determines at which height the bomblets will release. It impacts area spread and accuracy.
• RPM, which is the area spread of the bomblets that affects the concentration of fire available on the target. This parameter is applicable to the CBU-87 only.
Take note that the general bomblet footprint coverage is 200 by 400 meters.
CBU (Cluster Bomb Unit) Types

CBU-87 (CB87B): This Combined Effects Munitions (CEM) weighs 950 lbs and is an all-purpose cluster bomb. The SW-65 Tactical Munitions Dispenser contains 202 BLU-97/B
Combined Effects Bomblets (CEB) and they are effective against armored and unarmored targets.
Preset HoF parameter: 1500 ft
CBU-97 (CB97B): 1,000-pound class weapon containing sensor-fused sub-munitions for specifically attacking armor.
Preset HoF parameter: 1500 ft
Parameters (Applicable for CBU-87) Parameters (Applicable for CBU-97)
287
2a
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
ranging.
6
air-to-ground attacks.
4. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select CBU-87 bombs (CB87B) by toggling
weapons with the OSB (Option Select Button) adjacent to the Selected Weapon option. 2b
4
6. On the SMS page, verify that CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) release mode
is selected. If it is not, press the OSB next to the Release Mode option and select OSB
next to “CCIP”. Alternatively, you can toggle Release Mode with the NWS A/R DISC &
5
6
288
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
• NSTL (Nose & Tail): Bomblets dispense using settings displayed on SMS page
• NOSE: Bomblets dispense immediately after release
• PAIR: With PAIR selected, bombs will be released from both opposite stations, assuming identical bombs
are loaded on stations 4 and 6 or 3 and 7.

9. If more than one bomb is to be released, set desired Release Interval option. In our case, we will set 200 ft.
• Type in the new impact spacing distance using the OSBs on the left and right of the display and select ENTR. 7
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting RCL or return to the SMS page without making 11
changes by selecting RTN.
10. If more than one bomb is to be released, set the number of release pulses. We will set it to 8. 11
• Type in the desired number of release pulses using the OSBs on the left and right of the display and select
ENTR. 8
• You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting RCL or return to the SMS page without making
changes by selecting RTN.
11. The Height of Function (BA stands for Burst Altitude) setting should be set to 1500 ft (cannot be modified yet).
9a
9c 10c
10b
9b
10b
9b 289
(CCIP)
Flight Path Marker (FPM)
VIPER
F-16C
13. When performing your dive, place your FPM (Flight Path
Marker) to an Aim Off Distance Point of your choosing
(typically 2000 ft further than the target).
14. Align the BFL (Bomb Fall Line) with the target.
15. The CCIP pipper tracks up the bomb fall line towards the Bomb Fall Line (BFL)
target.. Don’t fly the pipper to the target or hold it on the
target using forward stick (you risk colliding with your
own bomb on release). Wait for the pipper to intersect

the target naturally.
16. If the CCIP impact point does not lay within the HUD field
of view, the Time Delay Cue (TDC) is shown as a short,
horizonal line on the Bomb Fall Line.
Master Arm ON
Target

(nm)
CCIP Pipper
Time Delay Cue (TDC)
Displays a mirrored view of how far below
the HUD the real CCIP aiming pipper is
290
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
17. When the TDC is no longer displayed on the Bomb Fall Line,
the pipper is in the HUD field of view. That will be the impact
point if the bombs are released immediately.
18. Monitor the Pull-Up Anticipation Cue (PUAC) to ensure it
does not go above the Flight Path Marker.
19. When CCIP pipper intersects the target, depress the Target
Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to release the bomb.
CCIP Pipper

(nm)
19
Weapon Release
Button
291
(CCIP)
VIPER
F-16C
20. After release, fly a safe escape maneuver to avoid the bomb fragmentation.
A 5G pull-up to a 30-deg climb is recommended.
292
F-16C
(CCIP)
293
2.3 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
The GBU-12 Paveway II is the laser-guided version of the Mk-82 unguided, general purpose bomb. The GBU-12 guides using the same principles as the GBU-10, the only difference being the bomb the
LGB is based on. The seeker head on each laser guided bomb is set to track only a specific laser pulse rate frequency (PRF) code. These are manually set by the weapons load crew during ground
operations (via Mission Editor) and may not be set from the cockpit during flight.
GBU-12 Laser Code

294
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
If you are flying in multiplayer and do not know your GBU-12

code, you can open the WEAPON Kneeboard page by pressing
“RSHIFT+K”. This will show you the laser code set on your
GBU-12 laser-guided bomb.
Laser-guided bomb laser codes will eventually be

programmable on ground by using the following commands:
• RSHIFT + RALT + 9 : Changes Laser Code (Hundreds)

• RSHIFT + RALT + 0 : Changes Laser Code (Ones)
• RSHIFT + RALT+ - : Changes Laser Code (Tens)
At the moment, this functionality is not enabled.
GBU-12 Laser Code

1655 Targeting Pod Laser Code needs to
match GBU-12 Laser Code
GBU-12 Laser Code

295
2.3 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II 1a
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
1. Set the Targeting Pod’s Laser Code as per the GBU-12 code programmed on the guided bomb, which is
set via the mission editor. The default laser code is 1688, but in this case we will pick a bomb with a
laser code of 1655. 1d
a) “RSHIFT+K” displays the WEAPON Kneeboard page and your GBU-12 laser code (1655).
b) Press the LIST button
c) The LIST sub-menus will appear on the DED (Data Entry Display). Press the “0” button on the GBU-12 Laser Code
ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to select the MISC (Miscellaneous) sub-menu.
d) Press the “5” button on the ICP to select the LASR (Laser) sub-menu.
e) The TGP code is selected by default (asterisks indicate field is selected).
f) To change laser code to “1655”, type “1655” on the ICP keypad
g) Press “ENTR” button (Enter) to update laser code.
1e
1b
1b
1f
1d
1g
1g
1c
296
5a
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
3. Verify that Radar Altimeter (RDR ALT) switch is ON (FWD)
9
5. Select Air-to-Ground Master Mode by pressing the A-G Button on the ICP (Integrated Control
Panel). This will configure the Fire Control Radar, Targeting Pod and displays for air-to-ground
attacks. 7
7. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select GBU-12 laser-guided bombs (GB12) by
toggling weapons with the OSB (Option Select Button) adjacent to the Selected Weapon option.
8. On the SMS page, select desired weapon profile. Let’s take PROF2 since it is CCRP-compliant by 5b
default.
9. On the SMS page, verify that CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) release mode is
selected. If it is not, press the OSB next to the Release Mode option and select OSB next to
“CCRP”. Alternatively, you can toggle Release Mode with the NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP button
on the stick.
8
9
4b
3
4a
297
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
• PAIR: With PAIR selected, bombs will be released from both opposite stations,
assuming identical bombs are loaded on stations 4 and 6 or 3 and 7.

12. If more than one bomb is to be released, set desired Release Interval option. In our
case, this setting is not relevant.
• Type in the new impact spacing distance using the OSBs on the left and right
of the display and select ENTR.
10
13. If more than one bomb is to be released, set the number of release pulses. We will
leave it at 1.
• Type in the desired number of release pulses using the OSBs on the left and
right of the display and select ENTR.
SMS page without making changes by selecting RTN. 14 11
12
13
298
2.3 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II TD (Target Designator) Box
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
• Typically, a Steerpoint should be programmed in your flight

plan near the target. In this case, we will assume Steerpoint 2 is
set near the target.
15. Select CNI (Communications, Navigation & Identification) DED

page by pressing the DCS/Dobber (Data Control Switch) left to
RTN
16. Select desired waypoint using the DED (Data Entry Display) Slant Range (nm)
Increment/Decrement Switch. We will select Steerpoint 2.
17. When CCRP release mode is selected, the Targeting Pod will
automatically be slaved to the selected steerpoint (Steerpoint
2 in our case). Time To Release
16b
15b
TGP Page 16a 15a

17
Targeting Pod Slaved to Steerpoint 2
299
2.3 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In 22
(Laser-Guided) • MAN RNG Counter-Clockwise: Zooms Out

VIPER
F-16C
18. Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set TGP page as the
SOI (Sensor of Interest). The SOI Box around the TGP page will indicate
when the targeting pod can be controlled with HOTAS controls.
19. Press TMS RIGHT to set an Area Track (or TMS UP for a Point Track) on
the steerpoint location. Then, slew the targeting pod using the Radar
Cursor switch
20. Select desired Sensor Mode using the TV/BHOT/WHOT OSB (Option
Select Button) or using the TMS (Target Management Switch) LEFT.

19b
Expand/FOV button.
22. Use the MAN RNG (Manual Range) Knob controls to set zoom level. Radar Cursor/Enable Switch CCRP Release Time to Release (sec)
• CCW (Counter-Clockwise): Zooms OUT Depress, Multidirectional Mode Selected
23. Select Tracking Mode using the TMS (Target Management Switch): TMS Designation Box
SOI (Sensor of Interest) Box 21
UP for Point Track (POINT, tracks moving objects) or TMS RIGHT for Area
Track (AREA, tracks static objects). 18b
18a
20
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
22
23
TMS (Target Management Switch) 19b
Point Track
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT Targeting Pod Cursor
19a 20 23 Laser Status

Steady L: Laser Armed
Flashing L: Laser Firing
Expand/FOV (Field-of-View) data.
Button • L: Laser (priority over all other sources)
21 • T: Targeting Pod passive ranging
300
Time to Release (sec)
DMS (Display
2.3 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II Management Switch)
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
• Important Note: In the case where a Steerpoint is not available near the target, you can use snowplow
mode. To do so:
a) Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set TGP page as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest) TMS (Target
b) By default, the TGP should be slaved to the selected steerpoint. Reject the target by using Management Switch) Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
TMS (Target Management Switch) DOWN
c) SP function should be available on the TGP page.
d) Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to SP to activate Snowplow mode.

e) The targeting pod’s line-of-sight is commanded straight ahead and angled downwards to
point to the ground ahead
f) Press TMS RIGHT to set an Area Track (or TMS UP for a Point Track) on the location of the TGP
reticle. This will exit SP Mode and make the SPI slewable.
g) Slew the targeting pod as desired using the Radar Cursor switch. TGP (Targeting Pod) CCRP
Designation Box
TGP (Targeting Pod) Page

(Square = SOI)

Designation Box
SP Selected
SPI (Slewable)
SPI (Not Slewable)

Select SP
Targeting Pod Slewed to Target

Targeting Pod in Snowplow (SP) 301
SP Unavailable
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
24. Depending on the direction of the target, either a TLL (Target Locator Line) or Solution Cue
a TD (Target Designator) Box towards the Steerpoint/Target is displayed on Moves from Top to Bottom
the Heads-Up Display.
25. Level off the aircraft and keep the Flight Path Marker aligned with the Azimuth
Steering Line (ASL). This will align your aircraft with the target.
26. A Solution Cue is displayed at the top of the Azimuth Steering Line (ASL). The Flight Path Marker (FPM)
Solution Cue will fall down the Azimuth Steering Line as the range decreases
and the weapon is about to be released. Keep these aligned!

27. When Solution Cue falls down towards the Flight Path Marker, depress and
hold the Weapons Release button (RALT+SPACE). Azimuth Steering
28. As you keep the Weapon Release button held, keep flying the Flight Path Line (ASL)
Marker over the Azimuth Steering Line as the Solution Cue continues to track
downward.
29. The bomb is released when the Solution Cue passes the Flight Path Marker.
30. Once bomb is released, the Time-to-Release indication will become a Time-to-
Impact indication (in seconds) on the Targeting Pod and HUD. Laser Armed 30
31. Press and hold the first stage of the gun trigger to fire your targeting pod’s (When flashing, laser is firing)
laser. When laser is being fired, the “L” symbol on the HUD will flash.
Releasing the trigger stops lasing.
Slant Range
• Note: Lasing the target should be done no later than 8-12 seconds
Indicator (nm)
prior to impact. Master Arm ON
31. The bomb will track the laser for as long as it is fired until it reaches the target.
CCRP Release
Mode Selected
Weapon Release Time to

27
Button Release (sec)

Box (Within HUD range) Target
Distance to
Camera/Gun Trigger Target (nm)
Bearing to
31 (Two Stages) 302
Target (deg)
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
Bomb Falling and Laser is Firing

Laser Armed (Not Flashing)
Camera/Gun Trigger
(Two Stages)
Use to fire laser
Time to
Impact (sec)
Bomb Falling, Laser Not Firing Yet
Laser Armed (Not Flashing)

data.
• L: Laser (priority over all other sources) Laser Firing (Flashing)
Targeting Pod Laser Code
• T: Targeting Pod passive ranging Laser code used by your targeting pod when
designating a target.
Time to 303
Impact (sec)
(Laser-Guided)
VIPER
F-16C
Laser Firing (Flashing)
304
2.4 – ROCKETS 2a
VIPER
F-16C
3. Select Air-to-Ground Master Mode by pressing the A-G Button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel). This
will configure the Fire Control Radar, Targeting Pod and displays for air-to-ground attacks.
5. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select Rockets by toggling weapons with the OSB (Option Select 6
Button) adjacent to the Selected Weapon option.
6. On the SMS page, CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) release mode should be automatically 3b
selected.
7. The Rocket Rate of Fire (Single/Ripple) is set via the Mission Editor.
• SGL: Single Launcher 9
• PAIR: With PAIR selected, rockets will be fired from each rocket launcher, assuming launchers are
loaded on station 3 and 7.
M151 for MK151 HE (High Explosive) 5
M156 for MK156 WP (White Phosphorus)
M5 for MK5 HEAT (High Explosive Anti-Tank)
M61 for MK61 WP (White Phosphorus)
2b 9
1
7
2a
305
10
2.4 – ROCKETS
10. Perform a 20-30 deg dive on the target and place the CCIP Pipper
VIPER
F-16C
on the target. Target

11. (Optional) If the targeting pod is equipped, press the first stage of
the gun trigger to fire your laser and acquire ranging information
from the laser. When laser is being fired, the “L” symbol on the
HUD will flash. Releasing the trigger stops lasing.
• When “laser ranging”, the laser is fired and the time it
takes to receive the reflected laser energy is measured, 12b In-Range CCIP Cue (Bar)
providing a precise range. This information is then fed to
the Fire Control Computer to update the stored target

elevation and greatly improve the accuracy of the
computed firing solution.
• If Laser Ranging is not used, the Fire Control Computer Laser Armed
will still display a range, but not as precise. (When flashing, laser is firing)
12. An In-Range Cue will be displayed over the CCIP pipper when slant
range is less than 8,000 feet and rockets are most effective.
13. When CCIP In-Range Cue is visible, depress the Weapon Release
(RALT+SPACE) button to fire rockets.
Master Arm ON

Weapon Release (nm)
13
Button
Camera/Gun Trigger 12a CCIP Pipper

11
(Two Stages)
306
F-16C
2.4 – ROCKETS
307
2.5 – M61A1 GUN 3
(Air-to-Ground)
VIPER
F-16C
ranging.
b) Set Laser Switch – ARMED (UP) 5
air-to-ground attacks.
5. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, select GUN by toggling Operating Mode 6
with the OSB (Option Select Button) adjacent to the Operating Mode option.
6. On the SMS page, verify that STRF (Strafe) gun sub-mode is selected. If it is not, press
the OSB next to the gun sub-mode option or toggle it with the NWS A/R DISC & MSL
STEP button on the stick.
512 rounds

6
2b
2a
308
12000 ft Slant Range
2.5 – M61A1 GUN
(Air-to-Ground)
Pipper
VIPER
F-16C
7. Set Gun’s In-Range Cue Distance option as desired

a) Select the OSB (Option Select Button) next to the In-Range Cue distance on 9000 ft Slant Range
the SMS page.
b) Effective engagement range is generally from 2,500 to 7,000 feet. For armored
vehicles, closer is better, and you should attack from behind the target where Ranging Reticle
its armor is weakest.
c) Type in the new in-range cue distance using the OSBs on the left and right of
6000 ft Slant Range
the display. We will take 6,000 ft.

d) Select ENTR 3000 ft Slant Range
e) You may correct numbers entered in error by selecting RCL or return to the 7d In-Range Cue (6000 ft)
7c
7d
7d
8
7c
7a 7c
309
9
2.5 – M61A1 GUN
Pipper
(Air-to-Ground) Target
VIPER
F-16C
9. Dive on the target and place the Gun Pipper on the target.
10. (Optional) If the targeting pod is equipped, press the first stage of
the gun trigger to fire your laser and acquire ranging information
from the laser. When laser is being fired, the “L” symbol on the
HUD will flash. Releasing the trigger stops lasing.
• When “laser ranging”, the laser is fired and the time it
takes to receive the reflected laser energy is measured, Ranging Reticle
providing a precise range. This information is then fed to

the Fire Control Computer to update the stored target In-Range Cue (6000 ft)
10
elevation and greatly improve the accuracy of the
computed firing solution.
Laser Armed
• If Laser Ranging is not used, the Fire Control Computer will
still display a range, but not as precise. (When flashing, laser is firing)
11. Wait for the gun’s Ranging Reticle to unwind until the In-Range Cue
(previously set to 6000 ft) is reached. When In-Range Cue is
reached, you are within effective gun range and may fire when
ready.
12. Squeeze the trigger all the way to the second detent to fire the gun
(SPACE). Master Arm ON
Air-to-Ground Gun STRF

(Strafe) Mode Selected

(nm)
10 Camera/Gun Trigger
12 (Two Stages)
310
2.5 – M61A1 GUN Pipper
(Air-to-Ground)
VIPER
F-16C
Ranging Reticle
(In Range)
In-Range Cue (6000 ft)
311
F-16C
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK
312
AGM-65 missile launch restrictions:
2.6.1 - Introduction • Max launch speed: Mach 1.2
VIPER
• Max dive angle: 60°

F-16C
The AGM-65 Maverick is an air-to-ground missile. The F-16 simulated in DCS has four versions available. The missile’s standoff • Max bank angle: 30°
range is between 6 and 8 nm, and it is best used against short-range air defense systems and armored targets (i.e. tanks). • Max roll rate: 30°/s
• Min/Max load factor: +0.5 g/+3.0 g
• AGM-65D: IR (infrared) imaging seeker, 126-lbs warhead, better suited against light and armored vehicles, allows automatic
target handoff from targeting pod. Automatic handoff slaves the Maverick missile’s seeker to where the targeting pod is
looking and will automatically lock the missile on a pod-designated target if the missile is within effective range. Automatic
handoff is useful since it doesn’t require you to go to the Maverick WPN page, set it as the sensor of interest, manually lock
AGM-65D
the missile’s seeker head to the target… which is what Manual handoff requires you to do before firing the missile (correlating
(LAU-88 Rack)
both the missile’s and the targeting pod’s line of sight in the process).
• AGM-65G: IR (infrared) imaging seeker, 300-lbs warhead, better suited against ships, bunkers and larger structure, allows
automatic target handoff from targeting pod.
• AGM-65H: Electro-optically guided seeker, 126-lbs warhead, better suited against light and armored vehicles.
• AGM-65K: Electro-optically guided seeker, 300-lbs warhead, better suited against ships, bunkers and larger structure.
AGM-65K AGM-65H AGM-65G

313
(LAU-117 Rack) (LAU-88 Rack) (LAU-117 Rack)
2.6.1 - Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
The Maverick has three main operating modes:
Pre-Planned (PRE) Mode:

• The PRE delivery mode is used against pre-planned targets using the targeting pod’s line of sight. This approach is best used
against targets that have a location known prior to takeoff (i.e. next to an existing steerpoint, on which you can slave the
targeting pod and find the target). In PRE mode, the Maverick D and G variants can use either a MANUAL or an AUTOMATIC
handoff methods.
Visual (VIS) Mode:

• VIS delivery mode is designed for Maverick attacks using dive toss (DTOS) type sighting. In VIS submode, the HUD is initialized as
the sensor of interest (SOI) and the weapon seeker head is slaved to the HUD (Heads-Up Display) Target Designation (TD) box,
which is ground-stabilized. Prior to designating a target, the TD box is caged about the Flight Path Marker (FPM). This most is
best used against targets that you can acquire visually (i.e. near smoke signals or known landmarks) or in situations where you do
not have a targeting pod equipped.
Boresight (BORE) Mode:

• BORE delivery mode displays are similar to the PRE displays except that the AGM-65 seeker head is pointed to the nominal
boresight (aligned with the Maverick reticle/cross on the HUD). This allows for firing on targets of opportunity without disturbing
the targeting pod’s track position. The Maverick reticle/cross can be slewed (and the Maverick’s seeker head line of sight with it),
but it is NOT ground-stabilized and will move with the aircraft. This is useful to scan large areas of land rapidly if you do not have
a targeting pod equipped.
314
2.6.1 - Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
In PRE mode, the Maverick D and G variants can use either a MANUAL or an AUTOMATIC handoff. What does this mean?
MANUAL HANDOFF:
• The AGM-65 will be slaved to the Line of Sight of the TGP but will not automatically be handed off the lock. Pilot must manually change
SOI (Sensor of Interest) to the AGM-65 (WPN page) with DMS DOWN, and then command lock manually with TMS UP.
AUTOMATIC HANDOFF (Applicable to AGM-65D/G only):

• The Targeting Pod is used to detect and track targets for semi-automated AGM-65D/G delivery. The missile boresight correlator (MBC)
takes control, selects, configures, and controls missile slew and lock-on of the AGM-65D/G to achieve a tracking missile. This
automated mechanization reduces workload by deleting the requirement of using the WPN page. When in A-G mode with an AGM-
65D/G selected and the SOI is the TGP, the MBC is active.
• TMS UP creates a point track, which automatically triggers an automatic hand off attempt.
• (Not yet simulated) TMS RIGHT, with TGP SOI, will repeat hand off the lock to the AGM-65 if the target contrast and size meet criteria
of missile lock.
Automatic Handoff
Manual Handoff
315
2.6.2 – AGM-65G (Pre-Planned Mode + Targeting Pod)
VIPER
F-16C
7
5
ranging.
2. Press the A-G Master Mode Button
b) Set Laser Switch – ARMED (UP) 1
5. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the OSB (Option Select
Button) next to the current Missile Type to toggle to the AG65 (AGM-65 Maverick) 4a
missile. The number preceding AG65 is the number of missiles of this type
equipped, and the letter following AG65 is the missile variant (D, G, H, or K). 6
6. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL STEP button on the stick Missile Selected
for less than 0.5 sec (SHORT).
7. Toggle OSB next to Maverick Mode to select PRE (Pre-Planned) mode
8. If using LAU-88 missile racks, select desired Ripple Quantity using the OSB next to 8
RP. We will leave it to 1.
4b

• MSL (MISSILE) STEP SHORT: Toggles Missile Station
316
VIPER
F-16C
The AGM-65 requires its seeker to be cooled by releasing a fluid stored inside onto it for it to be able to see properly and cannot be operated until it is cooled, which takes about 3 minutes.
Note: The cooldown should be started while you are in the air and the missile is selected since the Weight On Wheels (WoW) signal inhibits missile cooldown initiation.
9. Power up Maverick and start seeker cooldown (MANUAL cooldown method)

a) From the SMS page, press the OSB next to PWR OFF to start the power-up process of the Maverick.
b) Once PWR ON is set, cooldown will take about 3 minutes.
9a 9b
317
9a
VIPER
F-16C
9. Power up Maverick and start seeker cooldown (AUTO cooldown method)

a) From the SMS page, press OSB next to CNTL to select the Control Page.
b) We want the missile the automatically start its cooldown once we are North of
Steerpoint #2. 9g
c) Toggle OSB next to NORTH/SOUTH/EAST/WEST OF to select where the Missile Automatic Power Up
automatic cooldown will start in relationship to the selected steerpoint.
d) Press OSB next to STPT (Steerpoint)
e) Select desired Steerpoint you want to use as a reference using the OSBs of the
STPT menu.
f) Press OSB next to ENTR to confirm steerpoint selection.
g) Press OSB next to CNTL to return to the SMS page.
9f
9e 9g
9c
9d
5b
318
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK 13 TD (Target Designator) Box
VIPER
F-16C
10. We will be attacking a target that is next to a steerpoint that is already in our flight
plan (i.e. Steerpoint No. 2). To enter Steerpoint coordinates manually, see the
Navigation section.
11. Select CNI (Communications, Navigation & Identification) DED page by pressing the
DCS/Dobber (Data Control Switch) left to RTN
12. Select desired waypoint using the DED (Data Entry Display) Increment/Decrement
Switch. We will select Steerpoint 2. Time To Steerpoint 2
13. Steer towards selected Steerpoint using cues on the HUD and HSD (Horizontal
Situation Display) page.
12b
Bearing / Range to Steerpoint 2 (nm)
11b
11a
12a 319
VIPER
F-16C
14. Select the WPN (Weapon) page

15. During Maverick cooldown, the NOT TIMED OUT indication will be visible on the WPN
page. Maverick feed will become visible once cooldown sequence is complete.
16. The WPN page should display PRE (Pre-Planned) Mode. If it isn’t selected, toggle the OSB
(Option Select Button) next to the Maverick Mode until PRE is selected.
17. Select Track Polarity as required using the OSB next to Track Polarity or using TMS LEFT
For AGM65H/K:
• WB: White-On-Black (centroid track based on contrast)

• BW: Black-On-White (centroid track based on contrast)
For AGM-65D/G:
• HOC: Hot-On-Cold Polarity Contrast (centroid track based on contrast)
• COH: Cold-On-Hot Polarity Contrast (centroid track based on contrast) 18
For AGM-65G/K: TMS (Target Management Switch)
• AREA: Force Correlate Option (based on area scene like tall buildings) UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
18. On the other display, select TGP (Targeting Pod) Page. TGP will already be slaved to
selected steerpoint.
16
17
14b
15
14a
320
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In 23
2.6.2 – AGM-65G (Pre-Planned Mode + Targeting Pod) • UNCAGE (Depressed): Laser Spot Search Mode (“C” binding)
VIPER
F-16C
19. Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set TGP page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). The SOI
Box around the TGP page will indicate when the targeting pod can be controlled with HOTAS controls.
20. Press TMS RIGHT to set an Area Track on the steerpoint location. Then, slew the targeting pod using the
Radar Cursor switch
21. Select desired Sensor Mode using the TV/BHOT/WHOT OSB (Option Select Button) or using the TMS
(Target Management Switch) LEFT.
22. Set Field of View as desired using the NARO/WIDE OSB or using the Expand/FOV button.
• CCW (Counter-Clockwise): Zooms OUT
20b
24. On the TGP page, select desired Handoff Mode by toggling the OSB next to MAN/AUTO. Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
24 22
19b SOI (Sensor of Interest) Box

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT 21
19a
23
20b
20a Targeting Pod Cursor
Area Track
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
20a 21

Expand/FOV (Field-of-View) The preceding letter indicates the source of the range
data.
Button • L: Laser (priority over all other sources) 321
22
• T: Targeting Pod passive ranging
TD (Target Designator) Box MLE (Missile Launch Envelope)
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK Range Scale (nm)
VIPER
F-16C
MANUAL HANDOFF METHOD (AGM-65D/G/H/K) 25b

Horizontal Range MLE (Missile Launch Envelope)
25. Perform Maverick Handoff DMS Maximum Range
a) While TGP is the Sensor of Interest (SOI) and MAN handoff is to Target (nm)
selected, use TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to engage
Point Track (POINT, tracks moving objects) while the radar cursor
is on the desired target
b) Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set WPN page MLE (Missile Launch
as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). The SOI Box around the WPN page 25a 25d Envelope)
will indicate when the Maverick seeker can be controlled with
TMS
HOTAS controls.
c) Set Field of View as desired using the FOV OSB or using the
Expand/FOV button. 25c
MLE (Missile Launch
d) When you are within effective Maverick range, press TMS (Target Envelope) Minimum Range
Management Switch) UP to attempt a Maverick lock on the target Expand/FOV Button
designated by the targeting pod. The Maverick is most likely going
to acquire a good lock from a distance of 7.5 miles or less.
Maverick Aiming Reticle Maverick Aiming Reticle
25a (Locked)
25b (Slewing / Not Locked)
MAN Handoff
SOI Box
25d
Target
Seeker Indication Relative

to Boresight
25a
Point Track
Horizontal Range MLE (Missile Launch

to Target (nm) Envelope) 322
VIPER
F-16C
AUTOMATIC HANDOFF METHOD (AGM-65D/G)

25. Perform Maverick Handoff
a) Make sure you are within effective Maverick range. The Maverick is most likely going to
acquire a good lock from a distance of 7.5 miles or less.
b) While TGP is the Sensor of Interest (SOI) and AUTO handoff is selected, use TMS (Target
Management Switch) UP to engage Point Track (POINT, tracks moving objects) while the
radar cursor is on the desired target
c) Point Track automatically triggers an automatic hand off attempt (the Maverick seeker
will attempt to lock a valid target where the targeting pod is looking).
25b

25b
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
AUTO Handoff

25a
Range Scale (nm)

Horizontal Range
Maximum Range
to Target (nm)
25a MLE (Missile Launch

Point Track Envelope)
MLE (Missile Launch

Envelope) Minimum Range
323
VIPER
F-16C
AUTOMATIC HANDOFF METHOD (AGM-65D/G)

25. Perform Maverick Handoff
d) WPN page will display HANDOFF IN
PROGRESS until the missile has
successfully performed a lock.
25d
e) On both the TGP and WPN pages, the
handoff process will have the symbol Good lock!
above the selected missile station change

as follows:
• S: Maverick seeker is slaved to the

targeting pod
1 C
T
• 1: Correlating Maverick seeker to Point
Track from Targeting Pod
• T: Targeting pod is giving maverick the

lock command on the designated target
• C: Handoff is complete, Maverick and TGP

locks are both correlated
f) When handoff is successful, the “C”

indication will be visible on the TGP page,
while the Maverick cross will be full on
the WPN page.
• Note: When using AUTO HANDOFF, you Good lock!

do not necessarily have to look at the
WPN page, but it is a good indication to 1 C
T
see if the lock after the automatic handoff
process is successful.
324
“Keyhole” (Maverick
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK gimbal line of sight)
2.6.2 – AGM-65G (Pre-Planned Mode + Targeting Pod) Maverick Locked
VIPER
F-16C
26. Confirm a valid missile lock using the TGP page, WPN page and HUD (Heads-Up Display).
• Maverick gimbals are 10 deg in azimuth and 15 deg in elevation.
• To ensure a valid missile before after launch, the seeker cross must be within the “imaginary” line
of sight keyhole centered on the WPN page crosshairs.
27. Verify that you are within effective Maverick range. Seeker Cross
Indication Relative to Boresight

Range Scale (nm)
TD (Target Designator) Box -5 deg Elevation Line
-10 deg Elevation Line
Horizontal Range
to Target (nm) MLE (Missile Launch Envelope) MLE (Missile Launch
Maximum Range Envelope)
MLE (Missile Launch

Maverick Seeker Circle Envelope)
Master Arm ON
MLE (Missile Launch
Maverick PRE (Pre- Envelope) Minimum Range
Planned) Mode Selected
Maverick Locked
325
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK 28
VIPER
F-16C
28. Depress the Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to fire the missile.
• Note: If you locked the wrong target and want to cancel the Maverick lock, use TMS DOWN.
• Max launch speed: Mach 1.2
• Max bank angle: 30°
• Max roll rate: 30°/s
• Min/Max load factor: +0.5 g/+3.0 g
326
5a
2.6.3 – AGM-65D (Boresight Mode)

VIPER
F-16C

3. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to the current Missile Type to toggle
to the AG65 (AGM-65 Maverick) missile. The number preceding AG65 is the number of missiles of this type equipped, and the
letter following AG65 is the missile variant (D, G, H, or K). 4 7a
4. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL STEP button on the stick for less than 0.5 sec (SHORT). Missile Selected
5. Toggle OSB next to Maverick Mode to select BORE (Boresight) mode
6. If using LAU-88 missile racks, select desired Ripple Quantity using the OSB next to RP. We will leave it to 1. 6
The AGM-65 requires its seeker to be cooled by releasing a fluid stored inside onto it for it to be able to see properly and cannot be
operated until it is cooled, which takes about 3 minutes. Note: The cooldown should be started while you are in the air and the
missile is selected since the Weight On Wheels (WoW) signal inhibits missile cooldown initiation.
5b
7b

2
4
327
VIPER
F-16C

10. The WPN page should display BORE (Boresight) Mode. If it isn’t selected, toggle the OSB
(Option Select Button) next to the Maverick Mode until BORE is selected.
For AGM65H/K:

For AGM-65D/G:
• HOC: Hot-On-Cold Polarity Contrast (centroid track based on contrast) 11
• COH: Cold-On-Hot Polarity Contrast (centroid track based on contrast)
10
11
8b
8a 9
328
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
12a
VIPER
F-16C
12. Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set WPN page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
The SOI Box around the WPN page will indicate when the Maverick seeker can be controlled with
HOTAS controls.
13. Set Field of View as desired using the FOV OSB or using the Expand/FOV button.
14. The MLE (Missile Launch Envelope) range will be available in relationship to the targeting pod
designation point or the selected steerpoint (STPT)… NOT where the Maverick missile is looking.
Expand/FOV (Field-of-View) Button 13

Range Scale (nm)
13
Horizontal Range
12b to Target (nm)
SOI Box MLE (Missile Launch Envelope)
Maximum Range
14
MLE (Missile Launch

Envelope)
MLE (Missile Launch
Envelope)
MLE (Missile Launch
Envelope) Minimum Range

to Boresight
329
VIPER
F-16C
15. Slew the Maverick Reticle Cross / Aiming Reticle on the target using the Radar Cursor switch. A good method is to use the
Reticle cross on the HUD first and set it in the vicinity of the target (a steerpoint location, for instance, indicated by a
diamond), and then use the WPN page Maverick feed to find the target.
• Keep in mind that the reticle is NOT ground stabilized and will keep moving with the aircraft.

Maverick Aiming Reticle

(Slewing / Not Locked)
Selected Steerpoint
Location (Diamond)
Target
MLE (Missile Launch

Envelope)
MLE (Missile Launch
Envelope)

to Boresight Reticle Cross
330
VIPER
F-16C
16. When you are within effective Maverick range, press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to attempt a Maverick
lock on the target. The Maverick is most likely going to acquire a good lock from a distance of 7.5 miles or less. TMS (Target Management Switch)
• The MLE (Missile Launch Envelope) can be used to help you evaluate the range, but keep in mind that this
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
is only an approximation since it refers to the location of the selected steerpoint (or targeting pod
designation point).
17. Confirm a valid missile lock using the WPN page and HUD (Heads-Up Display).
• To ensure a valid missile track before launch, the seeker cross must be within the “imaginary” line of sight
keyhole centered on the WPN page crosshairs.
gimbal line of sight) Maverick Locked
Seeker Cross
MLE (Missile Launch

Envelope)
Master Arm ON
-5 deg Elevation Line Maverick BORE (Boresight)

Mode Selected
-15 deg Elevation Line MLE (Missile Launch

Envelope) Reticle Cross
331
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK • Max launch speed: Mach 1.2
2.6.3 – AGM-65D (Boresight Mode) • Max bank angle: 30°
VIPER

F-16C
18. Depress the Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to fire the missile. • Min/Max load factor: +0.5 g/+3.0 g
• Note: If you locked the wrong target and want to cancel the Maverick lock, or you want to cage back the Maverick, use TMS DOWN.
18
332
2.6.4 – AGM-65H (Visual Mode)

VIPER
F-16C

3. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to the current Missile Type to toggle
to the AG65 (AGM-65 Maverick) missile. The number preceding AG65 is the number of missiles of this type equipped, and the
letter following AG65 is the missile variant (D, G, H, or K). 7a
4
4. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL STEP button on the stick for less than 0.5 sec (SHORT). Missile Selected
5. Toggle OSB next to Maverick Mode to select VIS (Visual) mode
6
6. If using LAU-88 missile racks, select desired Ripple Quantity using the OSB next to RP. We will leave it to 1.
The AGM-65 requires its seeker to be cooled by releasing a fluid stored inside onto it for it to be able to see properly and cannot be
operated until it is cooled, which takes about 3 minutes. Note: The cooldown should be started while you are in the air and the
missile is selected since the Weight On Wheels (WoW) signal inhibits missile cooldown initiation.
5
7b

2
4
333
VIPER
F-16C

10. The WPN page should display BORE (Boresight) Mode. If it isn’t selected, toggle the OSB
(Option Select Button) next to the Maverick Mode until BORE is selected.
For AGM65H/K:

For AGM-65D/G:
• HOC: Hot-On-Cold Polarity Contrast (centroid track based on contrast) 11
• COH: Cold-On-Hot Polarity Contrast (centroid track based on contrast)
10
11
8b
8a 9
334
12a
VIPER
F-16C
12. Press DMS (Display Management Switch) UP to set HUD (Heads-Up Display) as the SOI
(Sensor of Interest). The SOI Asterisk will indicate when the HUD TD (Target Designation)
Box on the HUD can be controlled with HOTAS controls.
13. By default, the Maverick Designation Box on the HUD will be caged to the velocity vector.
14. Spot the target visually, then slew the HUD TD (Target Designation) Box on the HUD within
the vicinity of the target using the Radar Cursor switch. This method is useful if you have no
targeting pod equipped.
• The HUD TD Box is ground stabilized and will remain fixed where the Maverick
seeker is looking at.
• If you want to cage the HUD TD Box on the velocity vector, press TMS DOWN.
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT

14a
14b
HUD TD Box
(Slewed near target)
12b 13
SOI Asterisk
HUD TD Box (Caged Target
to Velocity Vector)

to Boresight
335
2.6.4 – AGM-65H (Visual Mode) 15a

VIPER
F-16C
15. Press DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set WPN page as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest). The SOI Box around the WPN page will indicate when the Maverick seeker can be
controlled with HOTAS controls.
16. Set Field of View as desired using the FOV OSB or using the Expand/FOV button.
17. Using the WPN page Maverick feed to find the target, slew the Maverick Aiming Reticle on the
target using the Radar Cursor switch.
• Keep in mind that in VIS mode, the Maverick reticle is ground stabilized and its aiming cross
will remain fixed (similarly to a targeting pod).
Expand/FOV (Field-of-View) Button 16 Radar Cursor/Enable Switch 17a
16
15b Maverick Aiming Reticle
SOI Box (Slewing / Not Locked)
HUD TD Box
17b
Target
Seeker Cross
336
VIPER
F-16C
18. Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to attempt a Maverick lock. The Maverick is most likely going to acquire
a good lock from a distance of 7.5 miles or less, but range is quite difficult to estimate in VIS mode since no range TMS (Target Management Switch)
indication is available.
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
19. Confirm a valid missile lock using the WPN page and HUD (Heads-Up Display).
• When locking a target, a lock circle will appear on the HUD
• To ensure a valid missile track before launch, the seeker cross must be within the “imaginary” line of sight
keyhole centered on the WPN page crosshairs.
gimbal line of sight)
Maverick Locked
HUD TD (Target Designation) Box
Seeker Cross

Master Arm ON
Maverick VIS (Visual)

Mode Selected Maverick
Lock Circle 337
2.6 – AGM-65 MAVERICK • Max launch speed: Mach 1.2
2.6.4 – AGM-65H (Visual Mode) • Max bank angle: 30°
VIPER

F-16C
20. Depress the Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to fire the missile. • Min/Max load factor: +0.5 g/+3.0 g
• Note: If you locked the wrong target and want to cancel the Maverick lock, or you want to cage back the Maverick to the velocity vector,
use TMS DOWN.
20
338
F-16C
2.7 – AGM-88C HARM
339
2.7.1 – Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses (SEAD, also known in the United States as "Wild Weasel" and
(initially) "Iron Hand" operations, are military actions to suppress enemy surface-based air defenses,
including not only surface-to-air missiles (SAMs) and anti-aircraft artillery (AAA) but also interrelated
systems such as early-warning radar and command, control and communication (C3) functions, while
HARM
also marking other targets to be destroyed by an air strike. Suppression can be accomplished both by
physically destroying the systems or by disrupting and deceiving them through electronic warfare.
The AGM-88 HARM (High-speed Anti-radiation Missile) is a tactical, air-to-surface anti-radiation

missile designed to home in on electronic transmissions coming from surface-to-air radar systems. The
AGM-88 can detect, attack and destroy a radar antenna or transmitter with minimal aircrew input. The
proportional guidance system that homes in on enemy radar emissions has a fixed antenna and seeker
head in the missile's nose.
TLDR version? The HARM mainly homes on radar emitters. The best way to use the HARMs is to use
HARM
the HAS (HARM As Sensor) Display page, and the RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) together to detect
which radar emitters are actively tracking, which ones are locking you, what level of threat each
emitter poses, and which one to target.
SA6 SAM Site
Here is an interesting DCS-centric SEAD Reference Guide by the 16th AGR Flight Training School:
https://drive.google.com/file/d/1jUbi9-2YJiKO3E2ZuHijFf231_cnsIw8/view
HAS (HARM As Sensor) WPN Page ALR-56M TWA (Threat Warning Azimuth) Indicator
340
VIPER
F-16C
The HARM Missile has three main operating modes:
HAS (HARM As Sensor) Mode

• HAS Mode uses the sensor in the nose of the missile to detect and track detected radars that
are in one of the three threat tables (see section 2.7.2). Once the threat is handed off to the
ALIC (Aircraft Launcher Interface Computer) and the missile is launched, it will fly a directly to
the target with no range data. As such, it has more limited range than other modes.
HAD/HTS (HARM Attack Display/HARM Targeting System Pod) Mode

• The AN/ASQ-213 HARM Targeting System (HTS) pod can be installed on the left cheek station
and gives you the capability to employ the HARM missile in its most effective mode. It can
autonomously detect, identify and locate radar guided threats at long ranges and displays
the target location for HARM designation and firing. The MFD display for using HTS is called
the HARM Attack Display (HAD).
POS (Position) Mode

• POS mode requires the missile to be fired at a known position/steerpoint. This kind of attack
is generally performed against pre-planned threats. Once launched, the missile will fly to the
steerpoint area, activate its seeker and look for the handed off threat (single radar emitter).
If a SAM radar comes online, the missile will target it. If not, the missile will likely miss unless
the radar site is at the precise location of the targeted steerpoint.
• PB (Pre-Briefed) POS Sub-Mode: used for long range delivery with a target location
that is pretty much known with a high degree of confidence (i.e. known range). The
seeker head will activate 15 nm from the steerpoint with a wide field of view of
120°.
• EOM (Equation of Motion) POS Sub-Mode: most accurate of the three POS sub-
modes. The seeker is activated with a narrow 40° field of view, 5 nm from the known
SAM threat position. This mode should only be used when the location of the
emitter is well known… as in the steerpoint used is in close vicinity of the radar
emitter.
• RUK (Range Unknown) POS Sub-Mode: similar to a degraded EOM mode with high
uncertainty about threat range. The seeker head is activated roughly 20 nm from the
steerpoint with a wide 120° field of view.
341
VIPER
F-16C
Flying at high altitudes greatly enhances the HARM’s range. However, the higher you are,
the easier you are to find by enemy radars. Keep in mind that doing SEAD operations
means that you will be locked by multiple radar stations and SAM sites can fire missiles on
you or on your own HARM missiles. This means that your countermeasures programs must
be ready at all times and you must often break away from the target once you have fired
your weapon. A great way to do SEAD is to use terrain to mask your approach and fire your
weapons at the last second before breaking off back your egress route.
Keep in mind that SAM sites do not necessarily emit continuously. The radar emitters can
remain off until you are right on top of them, which makes their detection impossible by
either the RWR or HARM sensor. This is why you should not perform a SEAD mission alone
and not fly directly over the expected SAM site location at high altitude.
HARM Range Table (Ref: RedKite Tutorial)

Direct Flight Profile
Range (nm) Altitude (ft) Airspeed (kts IAS)
40 40000 380
35 30000 400
25 20000 400
20 10000 400
15 1000 550
342
2.7 – AGM-88C HARM ALR-56M TWA (Threat Warning Azimuth) Indicator
2.7.1 – Introduction Also known as RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
VIPER
F-16C
There are multiple tools at your disposal to detect a radar emitter.

• The Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) is a good indication of radar azimuth, but it doesn’t indicate range.
• The HAS (HARM As Sensor) WPN page displays what the HARM missile seeker itself detects, but no
range is visible either.
• The HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) page has Threat Rings and SAM Site symbols, but these are not
necessarily representative if the site has been destroyed.
SD (SA-11 Search Radar)
SAM (Surface-to-Air Missile) Site Threat Ring

• This ring is set by the DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) via the
Mission Editor. This is an indicator of the SAM radar range and HAS (HARM As Sensor) WPN Page
this region should be avoided if possible.
• If SAM site is destroyed, the Threat Ring will remain displayed.
It does not update dynamically with the SAM site itself, it is
merely a visual marker set prior to the mission according to SAM (Surface-to-Air Missile) Site Symbol
currently available intelligence on deployment of enemy forces. (SA-11)
SDA (SA-11 Search Radar)

A = Active Mode
T = Tracking Mode
HSD (Horizontal Situation Display)

343
VIPER
F-16C
HTS (HARM Targeting System) Pod – Not Currently Implemented

344
2.7 – AGM-88C HARM ALIC (Aircraft Launcher Interface Computer) Table 1
2.7.2 – HAS (HARM As Sensor) Mode ID Number / RWR Symbol Designation (Russia) Designation (NATO)
VIPER
F-16C
2.7.2.1 - ALIC (Aircraft Launcher Interface Computer) Tables 110 10 S300PS TR 30N6 SA-10 Track Radar
The HARM sensor cannot search every radar wave frequency all at once; in HAS mode, the sensor can only 104 BB S300PS SR 64H6E SA-10 Search Radar
search for five different radar emitter frequencies at the same time, which are contained in an ALIC 103 CS S300PS SR 5N66M SA-10 Search Radar
(Aircraft Launcher Interface Computer) table. Three independent sets of these radar threat tables are
available. However, you can edit any table to contain any radar emitter type of your choice. 115 11 Buk LN 9A310M1 SA-11 Track Radar
107 SD Buk SR 9S18M1 SA-11 Snow Drift Search Radar
TO EDIT A TABLE:
2. Press the LIST button
3. The LIST sub-menus will appear on the DED (Data Entry Display). Press the “0” button on the ICP ALIC (Aircraft Launcher Interface Computer) Table 2
(Integrated Control Panel) to select the MISC (Miscellaneous) sub-menu.
4. Press the “0” button on the ICP to select the HARM sub-menu. ID Number / RWR Symbol Designation (Russia) Designation (NATO)
5. Select desired table (TBL1, 2 or 3) using the DED (Data Entry Display) Increment/Decrement Switch
120 19 Tunguska 2S6 SA-19
4
119 15 Tor 9A331 SA-15
117 8 Osa 9A33 SA-8
121 A ZSU-23-4 Shilka ZSU-23-4
3 109 DE Dog Ear SA-9 Dog Ear Search Radar
5a ALIC (Aircraft Launcher Interface Computer) Table 3

2
1 ID Number / RWR Symbol Designation (Russia) Designation (NATO)
123 3 S125 TR SNR SA-3 Low Blow Track Radar

5b 122 S S125 SR-P-19 SA-3 Flat Face Search Radar
108 6 Kub STR 9S91 SA-6
126 2 SNR-75V SA-2 Fan Song Track Radar
3
5c 118 13 Strela 9A35M3 SA-13
345
5 4
2.7.2 – HAS (HARM As Sensor) Mode 7a
VIPER
F-16C
2.7.2.1 - ALIC (Aircraft Launcher Interface Computer) Tables

TO EDIT A TABLE:
6. In our case, we want to switch field T5 from a SA-13 Strela 9A35M3 (ID Number 118) to a ZSU-23-4 (ID Number 121).
7. Select desired Threat field (T1 to T5) by pressing the DCS/Dobber (Data Control Switch) DOWN (asterisks indicate
field is selected).
8. Type the ID number (“121”) on the ICP keypad of the threat type you want to change T5 to, then press ENTR button.
9. You can repeat the previous steps to customize your own threat table as per the needs of your mission. The
advantage of having three tables is that you can easily switch between three different mission profiles on the fly.
7c
8a 8a
8b
7b
8b
346
2.7.2 – HAS (HARM As Sensor) Mode
VIPER
F-16C
2.7.2.1 - ALIC (Aircraft Launcher Interface Computer) Tables
ALIC Tables by
AstonMartinDBS
347
2.7 – AGM-88C HARM 3

VIPER
F-16C
2.7.2.2 - HARM Employment in HAS Mode

2. Set Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) 4
3. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to the Missile Selected
current Missile Type to toggle to the AG88 (AGM-88C HARM) missile. The number preceding AG88 is 5a
the number of missiles of this type equipped.
4. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL STEP button on the stick for less than 0.5 sec
(SHORT).
5. Press the OSB next to PWR OFF to start the power-up process of the HARM. A BIT (Built-In Test) will be
initiated.
5b

2
4
348
Field of View Option
2.7.2 – HAS (HARM As Sensor) Mode Active ALIC Threat Table
VIPER
Search Filter (SRCH) Page

F-16C
7 HAS (HARM As Sensor) Mode

2.7.2.2 - HARM Employment in HAS Mode UFC (Up-Front Control) Option
6c (Displays Table on DED)
7. The WPN page should display HAS Mode by default. If it isn’t
selected, toggle the OSB (Option Select Button) next to the Scan Cycle Number
DTSB (Detected
HARM Mode until HAS is selected. The HAS Mode page will Threat Status Box)
display up to 10 radar emitters at once. However, only 2 radar
emitters of the same type can be displayed at the same time. Radar Threat Emitters
Selected for Scanning
Reset Search (RS)
Time Remaining Until Current

Scan Cycle is Complete
6b
Selected HARM Missile

Station (Boxed)
ALIC (HARM Aircraft Launcher
Interface Computer) Display Area
Cursor
6a
349
2.7 – AGM-88C HARM 10
9a

VIPER
F-16C

8. Press the DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN to set the
WPN (Weapon) page as the SOI (Sensor of Interest), indicated
by a white SOI box.
9. (Optional) If you wish to edit the HARM threat tables to set your 8a
own threats, you can select the HARM sub-menu on the DED
(Data Entry Display) by pressing the OSB (Option Select Button)

next to UFC (Up-Front Control). Then, select desired table (TBL1,
2 or 3) using the DED (Data Entry Display) Increment/Decrement
Switch and edit the desired field as shown in section 2.7.2.1.
10. Select the desired ALIC table by either toggling the OSB next to
TBL#, or by pressing TMS (Target Management Switch) LEFT
SHORT while the WPN page is the SOI (Sensor of Interest). In our
8c
case, we want to hunt a SA-11, so we will pick Table #1.
9d
8b DMS (Display Management Switch)

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
9c
9b
10

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
9d 350
2.7 – AGM-88C HARM 15a
VIPER
F-16C
Emitters Filtered Out

2.7.2.2 - HARM Employment in HAS Mode (Not Searched)
11. If the HARM sensor scans all threat types listed in Table 1, a single scanning cycle can last
about 1:30. We can choose to discard certain threat types to reduce scanning time. 14b
12. Press OSB next to SRCH (Search Filter)
13. Currently searched threat types are highlighted in white.
14. Press on the OSBs next to the threat types you want to filter out. In our case, we will leave
out 10 (SA-10 Track Radar), BB (SA-10 Search Radar) and CS (SA-10 Search Radar). Emitters Searched
15. Click on the OSB next to HAS to return to the HAS Mode page, then press OSB next to RS
(Reset Search). As we can see, the scanning cycle time is reduced from 1:30 to 0:35. Not bad!
Radar Threat Emitters

13
Selected for Scanning
Radar Threat Emitters 12a Radar Threat Emitters
Selected for Scanning Selected for Scanning
12b 15b
14a
Time Remaining Until Current 14a 15c

11
Scan Cycle is Complete
Time Remaining Until Current
14a Scan Cycle is Complete
351
VIPER
F-16C

16. To find an appropriate area to scan for radar emitters, consult your RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) and HSD
(Horizontal Situation Display). Keep in mind that the RWR is used to give you rough approximation of the direction of
the emitter, while the HSD threat ring information can be used as a very basic way to estimate the range to the
emitter (these rings are not dynamic; they are set by the mission editor in the mission data cartridge). The HAS mode
itself has no proper way to have an accurate estimate of the range of the emitter.
352
VIPER
F-16C

17. You can toggle between FOV (Field-of-View) options as desired
using either the Expand/FOV Button on the stick or the OSB next to
the FOV Option. Scanning times will vary depending on the FOV
option selected:
• WIDE: Scans in all directions, long range (altitude
dependent)
• CTR (Center): Scans front only with half the WIDE range.
Useful in situations where you already know where the
emitter is since scanning cycle time is much shorter in CTR.
• LT: Scans left only
• RT: Scans right only WIDE FOV CTR FOV
18. Each time the FOV is changed, the HAS page resets and threats
disappear until detected again.
Expand/FOV (Field-of-
View) Button
LT FOV RT FOV 353

VIPER
F-16C

19. Once radar emitters are detected, symbols appear on the ALIC Display and the DTSB (Detected Threat Status Box). The location of a symbol Master Arm ON
in relationship to the HAS page centerline indicates the position of the emitter in relationship to the HARM missile sensor boresight.
20. Acquire radar emitter detected by the HARM sensor and lock it
a) Use the Radar Cursor/Enable switch to move the Acquisition Cursor over the desired Radar Emitter on the HAS page.
b) In our case, we will lock the “SDA” symbol: “SD” stands for SA 11 Search Radar, and “A” stands for Active Mode (a “T” would stand
for Tracking Mode, when a missile is likely heading your way).

c) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP, then release it to lock up the radar emitter and handoff the target to the missile.
d) When handoff process is complete (process takes about 5 seconds or less), the RDY indication appears on the HAS WPN page and
the HARM DTSB (Detected Threat Status Box) on the HUD flashes.
• Note: to unlock an emitter, press TMS UP.
HARM Selected DTSB (Detected Threat
Status Box) Flashing
21 Weapon Release Button DTSB (Detected

Threat Status Box)
20c
TMS (Target
Management Switch) 20c

20a SDA (SA-11 Search Radar)
Cursor 20a SDA (SA-11 Search
A = Active Mode
Radar) Locked
T = Tracking Mode 20d
19
ALIC (HARM Aircraft Launcher

354
Interface Computer) Display Area
VIPER
F-16C

22. The missile will home on the locked radar emitter. When an
anti-radiation missile is launched, the brevity call is “Magnum”.
355
2.7.3 – HAD/HTS Mode
VIPER
(HARM Attack Display/HARM Targeting System Pod)

F-16C
356
2.7.4 – POS (Position) Mode
VIPER
2.7.4.1 – PB (Pre-Briefed) Sub-Mode

F-16C
357
VIPER
2.7.4.2 – EOM (Equation of Motion) Sub-Mode

F-16C
358
VIPER
2.7.4.3 – RUK (Range Unknown) Sub-Mode

F-16C
359
F-16C
(Not Available Yet)
2.8 – GBU-38 JDAM
360
F-16C
(Not Available Yet)
2.9 – AGM-154C JSOW
361
3.1 – M61A1 GUN
3.1.1 – EEGS (Enhanced Envelope Gun Sight) Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
The F-16 is equipped with a 20 mm Gatling-type rotary cannon. The Enhanced Envelope Gun
Sight (EEGS) provides the capability to accurately employ the gun at all aspects, with or without
a radar lock. The EEGS consists of five levels of displays, each providing an increasing level of
capability. Take note that only Levels II and V are relevant to DCS. Gun
• LEVEL I: failure mode that only displays the Boresight Cross in the event of a Rate Sensor
Unit (RSU) and INS failure. It should almost never be encountered.
• LEVEL II: provides a prediction of the bullet path when there is no radar lock. The Boresight
Cross, EEGS Funnel and Multiple Reference Gunsight (MRGS) Lines are provided.
• LEVEL III: intermediate level that leads to the Level V display.
• LEVEL IV: intermediate level that leads to the Level V display
• LEVEL V: displayed after radar lock-on and a firing solution has been computed using that
data. Additional references in the HUD include the Target Designator, T-Symbol, Slant
Range, Closure Rate and Level V Pipper.
362
3.1 – M61A1 GUN
3.1.1 – EEGS (Enhanced Envelope Gun Sight) Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
Ammunition types for the gun can only be set through

the mission editor. Here are the available ammo types:
• HEI-T: High-Explosive Incendiary-Tracer

• HEI: High-Explosive Incendiary
• AP: Armor Piercing
• TP: Target Practice Tracer
• SAPHEI PGU: High Explosive Armor Piercing PGU

• TP PGU: Target Practice Tracer PGU
SAPHEI PGU Rounds
363
HEI-T Rounds
3.1 – M61A1 GUN
3
Aircraft Wingspan (ft)
3.1.1 – EEGS (Enhanced Envelope Gun Sight) Introduction A-10 58
VIPER
F-16C
If you already know the type of aircraft you are engaging and its wingspan, you can set the F-111 48
EEGS Gun Funnel properties to match the wingspan (ft). As an example, we will set the
wingspan property to a MiG-29’s, which is 36 ft (11 m).
MAN Setting Profile 1 Selected F-14 51
1) Press the LIST button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
2) Press “5” button to select the MAN (Manual Setting) sub-menu. F-15 43
3) On the DED (Data Entry Display), the WSPAN data field is set to 33 ft by default.
F-16 31
4) Press “36” on the ICP, then press “ENTR” to set the wingspan to 36 ft.
4c
Note: Manual Setting Profiles can be toggled and set manually using the DED
Increment/Decrement Switch.
F/A-18 38
1 2 F-4 39
F-5 27
MiG-21 24
2
4b
4b MiG-23 37
MiG-25 46
MiG-29 36
1
MiG-31 46
Su-24 44
Su-25 51
Su-27 42
Increment/Decrement Switch 364
4a
3.1 – M61A1 GUN 3
3.1.2 – EEGS LEVEL II (No Radar)

VIPER
F-16C
Note: The gun can be selected either through the AAM

(Air-to-Air Missile Mode) or DGFT (Dogfight Override
Mode). In this case, we will use AAM Mode.
1. Select AAM (Air-to-Air Missile Mode) by pressing the

A-A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode button.
3. In the case where you do NOT want to use the FCR 2

(Fire Control Radar) to lock the target, set the RF
(Radio Frequency) Switch to SILENT (DOWN).
4. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on
the OSB (Option Select Button) next to AAM to 4a
select the Air-to-Air EEGS Gun Mode.
5. The EEGS (Enhanced Envelope Gun Sight) Level II
symbology will appear on the Heads-Up Display. The AAA (Attitude Awareness Arc)
Boresight Cross, EEGS Funnel and Multiple Extremities of the arc line up on the horizon. Arc grows
Reference Gunsight (MRGS) Lines are provided. as aircraft nose is down and shrinks as nose is up.
Boresight Cross
1 EEGS Gun Funnel
4b
Ammunition Count
Master Arm ON (51 = 510 rounds)
EEGS Mode
MRGS Lines
365
5
3.1 – M61A1 GUN
VIPER
F-16C
6. Maneuver your aircraft to frame the target aircraft within the EEGS funnel. The top of the funnel is 600
ft range, and the bottom is between 2500 ft and 3000 ft depending upon altitude.
7. When the target’s wing tips are on the EEGS funnel lines, you can fire your gun.
8. Squeeze the trigger all the way to the second detent to fire the gun (SPACE).
Camera/Gun Trigger
8 (Two Stages)
EEGS Gun Funnel

7
366
3.1 – M61A1 GUN
Boresight Cross
VIPER
F-16C
Note:
While during normal chase you should always use the gun funnel,
there are instances where the target could require you to pull a
substantial amount of lead for high aspect shots. For high aspect
Current Gs being pulled
chases, you can use the MRGS (Multiple Reference Gunsight) Lines.
The MRGS sight is composed of a series of five line segments

pointing toward the Gun Bore Line, and spaced in an arc near the
bottom of the HUD. They aid in lining up long range, high aspect
shots by providing the correct lateral aiming solution so the target
flies up the funnel. EEGS Gun Funnel
The length of the lines correspond to the approximate length of the
fuselage of an aircraft at that position with the proper amount of
lead.
To use, pull lead until the aircraft is over one of the lines.
• If the aircraft is smaller than the line, you are pulling too little
lead and need to be closer or add back pressure.
• If the aircraft is larger than the line, you are pulling too much Target
lead and need to get further or relax the g.
In the example to the right, the aircraft is larger than the MGRS
line… therefore we need to either slow down and let the target
gain some distance… or pull less Gs.
MRGS Line
367
3.1 – M61A1 GUN 1
3.1.3 – EEGS LEVEL V (With Radar)
VIPER
F-16C
Note: The gun can be selected either through the AAM (Air-to-Air Missile
Mode) or DGFT (Dogfight Override Mode). In this case, we will use DGFT Mode.
3c
1. Verify that FCR (Fire Control Radar) Switch is ON (FWD)
2. Select DGFT (Dogfight) Override Mode by pressing the Dogfight switch
Outboard to the DOGFIGHT position.
3. With DGFT Override selected:
a) The Gun is automatically selected with Air-to-Air EEGS Gun Mode

b) ACM (Air Combat Mode) Radar mode is automatically selected 5
with HUD Scan ACM Radar Sub-Mode (30°x 20°).
c) Symbology on the HUD is provided for both 20 mm gun firing and
air-to-air missile 5
4. The EEGS (Enhanced Envelope Gun Sight) Level II symbology will appear on
the Heads-Up Display. The Boresight Cross, EEGS Funnel and Multiple 4
Reference Gunsight (MRGS) Lines are provided.
Dogfight Switch 2
• DOGFIGHT (Outboard): provides symbology on HUD for both
20 mm gun firing and air-to-air missile delivery
3b 3a
368
EEGS Level V Symbology (Gun + Missiles equipped)
3.1 – M61A1 GUN
3.1.3 – EEGS LEVEL V (With Radar) 7
12000 ft Gun Reticle Target Range Caret
(Radar Lock) • 12 o’clock = 12,000 ft
VIPER
F-16C
• 9 o’clock = 9,000 ft
6. In ACM Radar Mode, target lock will be automatically performed. Press TMS
• 6 o’clock = 6,000 ft
(Target Management Switch) UP to enter ACM Boresight Mode.
• 3 o’clock = 3,000 ft
7. When radar STT (Single Target Track) lock is acquired, EEGS (Enhanced Envelope
Gun Sight) Level V symbology will appear on the Heads-Up Display. Boresight Cross
Note: When using DGFT mode, symbology for both missiles and gun is displayed. The Target Aspect Caret
Closure Rate indication will be displayed differently depending on whether you have • 12 o’clock: Target is flying towards you
• 6 o’clock: Target is flying away from you
air-to-air missiles equipped or not. Since you are most likely not going on a mission
with “just” a single gun to defend yourself, I decided to show both types of symbology.
Closure Rate (kts)
EEGS Level V Symbology (Gun only, no missiles equipped)
EEGS Gun Funnel
AAA (Attitude Awareness Arc)

Aircraft Attitude. Extremities of the arc
6 Level V EEGS Pipper line up on the horizon. Arc grows as
aircraft nose is down and shrinks as
nose is up.
Master Arm ON
DGFT (EEGS) Mode Range Provider / Slant Range (nm)

• Displays hundreds of ft when under 1 nm
Closure Rate (kts)

GHL (Ghost Horizon Line)
T-Symbol: shows two firing solutions for the locked target

• The + symbol, or ‘one-G pipper’ shows the lead angle against a non-maneuvering target.
• The small horizontal bar, or ‘nine-G pipper’ shows the lead angle for a target turning at maximum sustained rate.
369
3.1 – M61A1 GUN
VIPER
F-16C
8. Maneuver your aircraft to frame the target aircraft within the EEGS funnel Camera/Gun Trigger
10
and stabilize the Level V EEGS Pipper on the target. (Two Stages)
9. When the Level V EEGS Pipper is on the target, you can fire the gun.
10. Squeeze the trigger all the way to the second detent to fire the gun (SPACE).
11. The Bullets at Target Range (BATR) Symbol is displayed after rounds are 11
BATR (Bullets At Target
fired. The BATR is displayed as the first real or simulated round passes the Range) Symbol
target range and is removed after the last round has passed.
EEGS Gun Funnel
8 Level V EEGS Pipper
370
3.1 – M61A1 GUN
VIPER
F-16C
371
HMCS Display
3.2 – AIM-9M SIDEWINDER
3.2.1 – Sidewinder Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
Missile boresighted to HMCS

The AIM-9 Sidewinder missile has two main operating modes: BORE and SLAVE.
Boresight (BORE) mode:

• When HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) is not powered, the missile seeker
“looks” ahead on the aircraft bore line.
• When HMCS is powered, the seeker is boresighted to the Helmet Mounted Display’s
reticle. This is useful when using the AIM-9X for a HOBS (High Off Boresight) shot.
Slaved (SLAVE) mode:

• When a radar lock is acquired, the missile seeker is slaved to the FCR (Fire Control
Radar)
• When no radar lock is acquired, the seeker is slaved to the aircraft bore line
BORE Mode (HMCS ON)
372
BORE Mode (HMCS OFF) SLAVE Mode
Dogfight Switch
3.2 – AIM-9M SIDEWINDER 3-Position switch, Slide
3.2.1 – Sidewinder Introduction both 20 mm gun firing and air-to-air missile delivery
VIPER
F-16C
There are three main methods of selecting an AIM-9 missile: for air-to-air missile firing only
• Press Dogfight Switch OUTBOARD (DGFT). AIM-9 missiles will be automatically selected. • Center: Returns to last selected Master Mode
• Press Dogfight Switch INBOARD (MSL OVRD/Missile Override). Then, from the SMS page,
select the desired missile.
• Select Air-to-Air Master Mode by pressing the A-A Button. Then, from the SMS page,
Dogfight Switch - DGFT Dogfight Switch – MSL OVRD
A-A Master Mode
SRM (Short Range Missile)
Select Missile Type

Select Missile Type
AIM-9 Missile Selected Automatically
373
1
3.2 – AIM-9M SIDEWINDER 3
3.2.2 – No Radar
VIPER
F-16C
Note: The missile can be selected either through the AAM (Air-to-
Air Missile Mode), DGFT (Dogfight Override Mode) or MSL OVRD
(Missile Override Mode). In this case, we will use AAM Mode.
1. Select AAM (Air-to-Air Missile Mode) by pressing the A-A (Air- NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button
to-Air) Master Mode button. • MSL (MISSILE) STEP SHORT: Toggles Missile Station
2. Set Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) • MSL (MISSILE) STEP LONG: Toggles Missile Type
3. In the case where you do NOT want to use the FCR (Fire 2
Control Radar) to lock the target, set the RF (Radio 4 5
Frequency) Switch to SILENT (DOWN).
4. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the OSB
(Option Select Button) next to the current Missile Type to
toggle to the 9LM (AIM-9M) missile. Alternatively, you can
press the NWS / MSL STEP button on the stick for more than
0.5 sec (LONG) to toggle the missile type.
5. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL STEP
button on the stick for less than 0.5 sec (SHORT).
6. Select desired missile field-of-view by pressing the OSB next
to SPOT/SCAN
• SPOT: Narrow field-of-view, detection range is
increased 4
• SCAN: Wide field-of-view, detection range is 6
decreased
7. Select desired missile line-of-sight parameters by pressing the
OSB next to SLAVE/BORE. In this case, choose BORE.
• BORE: Missile follows aircraft boresight line 5
Station 3 Selected 7
• SLAVE: Missile follows radar line-of-sight
8. Activate missile seeker head argon cooling by setting the 8a 8b
cooling status to COOL (press OSB next to WARM/COOL). It
will increase missile detection sensitivity.
• Note: COOL is selected automatically when entering
DGFT or MSL Override mode. Argon supply duration
varies depending on outside air temperature,
pressure and bottle charge level at installation, but
the average duration is 90 minutes.
374
3.2 – AIM-9M SIDEWINDER 13 Weapon Release Button 11 • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In
3.2.2 – No Radar • UNCAGE (Depressed): Uncages
VIPER
Sidewinder (“C” binding)

F-16C
9. Maneuver until target is within the missile launch zone

10. Fly the missile reticle in the HUD over a target. If the missile detects enough
infrared energy from the target, target detection is indicated by an audio
missile detection tone (growling sound).
11. When the AIM-9 seeker detects a target, uncage it by pressing the
Cage/Uncage button on the throttle. This will allow the seeker to lock on and
follow the target within the confines of the missile seeker’s field of view.
12. When the missile is tracking a heat signature, the Missile Diamond latches to
the target and the missile growl sound will become high pitched.
10 Target
Missile Diamond
12
Missile Reticle
Master Arm is ON
4 SRM (Short Range

Missiles) Available 375
F-16C
3.2.2 – No Radar
376
Dogfight Switch
3.2 – AIM-9M SIDEWINDER 1
• DOGFIGHT (Outboard): provides
2
3.2.3 – With Radar symbology on HUD for both 20 mm
VIPER
gun firing and air-to-air missile delivery

F-16C
Note: The missile can be selected either through the AAM (Air-to-Air Missile • Center: Returns to last selected Master
Mode), DGFT (Dogfight Override Mode) or MSL OVRD (Missile Override Mode
Mode). In this case, we will use DGFT Mode.

2. Select DGFT (Dogfight) Override Mode by pressing the Dogfight switch

a) The Gun is automatically selected with Air-to-Air EEGS Gun
Mode
b) ACM (Air Combat Mode) Radar mode is automatically selected NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button
with HUD Scan ACM Radar Sub-Mode (30°x 20°). 4
c) Symbology on the HUD is provided for both 20 mm gun firing • MSL (MISSILE) STEP LONG: Toggles Missile Type
and air-to-air missile
4. Set Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) 5 6
5. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the OSB (Option
Select Button) next to the current Missile Type to toggle to the 9LM
(AIM-9M) missile. Alternatively, you can press the NWS / MSL STEP
button on the stick for more than 0.5 sec (LONG) to toggle the missile
type. 5
6. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL STEP button on
the stick for less than 0.5 sec (SHORT). 7
7. Select desired missile field-of-view by pressing the OSB next to
SPOT/SCAN
• SPOT: Narrow field-of-view, detection range is increased
• SCAN: Wide field-of-view, detection range is decreased
8. Select desired missile line-of-sight parameters by pressing the OSB next 6
Station 3 Selected 8
to SLAVE/BORE. In this case, choose SLAVE.
9b
• BORE: Missile follows aircraft boresight line 9a
9. Activate missile seeker head argon cooling by setting the cooling status
to COOL (press OSB next to WARM/COOL). It will increase missile
detection sensitivity.
• Note: COOL is selected automatically when entering DGFT or
MSL Override mode. Argon supply duration varies depending on
outside air temperature, pressure and bottle charge level at 377
installation, but the average duration is 90 minutes.
3.2 – AIM-9M SIDEWINDER 17 Weapon Release Button • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In
14
3.2.3 – With Radar • UNCAGE (Depressed): Uncages
VIPER

F-16C
10. Maneuver until target is within the missile launch zone

11. Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to enter ACM Boresight Mode. In ACM
Radar Mode, target lock will be automatically performed.
12. When radar STT (Single Target Track) lock is acquired, missile symbology should
appear on your HUD (DLZ and Slant Range).
13. Fly the missile reticle in the HUD over the target. If the missile detects enough
infrared energy from the target, target detection is indicated by an audio missile 11 TMS (Target Management Switch)
detection tone (growling sound).

14. When the AIM-9 seeker detects a target, uncage it by pressing the Cage/Uncage
button on the throttle. This will allow the seeker to lock on and follow the target
within the confines of the missile seeker’s field of view.
15. When the missile is tracking a heat signature, the Missile Diamond latches to the
target and the missile growl sound will become high pitched.
16. Consult DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) indicator and make sure the range to target is
between the Minimum Range and the Max Missile Range vs Maneuvering Target.
17. Depress the Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to fire the missile. Missile Diamond Maximum Missile Range
12 Range Scale (nm)
15
Missile Reticle
11
DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone)

Radar STT Lock Maximum Missile Range vs Maneuvering Target
(Altitude 7000 ft)
Closure Rate (kts)
16 Range to Target Caret

Slant Range (nm)
Master Arm is ON Minimum Missile Range
Dogfight Mode 378

Range Scale (nm)
Maximum Missile Range
3.2.3 – With Radar
Maximum Missile Range vs Maneuvering Target
VIPER
F-16C
Take note that HUD symbology will be slightly different if you use DGFT mode or A-A Mode to acquire a
radar lock. For instance, A-A mode will display a TD (Target Designator) Box over the locked contact. Range to Target Caret
HUD Radar Symbology with A-A Mode HUD Radar Symbology with DGFT Mode
Closure Rate (kts)

Missile Diamond
Missile Reticle
Missile Reticle Minimum Missile Range

TD (Target Designator) Box
Target Aspect Caret

• 12 o’clock: Target is flying towards you
• 6 o’clock: Target is flying away from you
Target Range Caret

1 • 12 o’clock = 12,000 ft
• 9 o’clock = 9,000 ft
Master Arm is ON • 6 o’clock = 6,000 ft
• 3 o’clock = 3,000 ft
4 SRM (Short Range

Missiles) Available

• F: FCS (Fire Control System) is providing range 379
F-16C
3.2.3 – With Radar
380
3.3 – AIM-9X HOBS SIDEWINDER
(HMCS)
VIPER
F-16C
The HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) and HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) allow the pilot to project the Heads-Up Display in his field of vision at all times. It also allows the slaving of sensors and
weapons to the helmet’s line of sight. In the F-16, the HMCS is very useful for using missiles like the AIM-9X, an upgraded version of the AIM-9 with TVC (Thrust Vectoring Control) allowing 80 deg off-
boresight shots.
HMCS Display
HMCS Display
381
Dogfight Switch
3.3 – AIM-9X HOBS SIDEWINDER 1
• DOGFIGHT (Outboard): provides
(HMCS) symbology on HUD for both 20 mm 2
VIPER
gun firing and air-to-air missile delivery

F-16C
1. Verify that FCR (Fire Control Radar) Switch is ON (FWD) • Center: Returns to last selected Master
2. Select DGFT (Dogfight) Override Mode by pressing the Dogfight switch Mode
a) The Gun is automatically selected with Air-to-Air EEGS Gun
Mode
b) ACM (Air Combat Mode) Radar mode is automatically selected
with HUD Scan ACM Radar Sub-Mode (30°x 20°).

c) Symbology on the HUD is provided for both 20 mm gun firing
and air-to-air missile
4. Set Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button
5. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the OSB (Option 4
Select Button) next to the current Missile Type to toggle to the 9X (AIM- • MSL (MISSILE) STEP LONG: Toggles Missile Type
9X) missile. Alternatively, you can press the NWS / MSL STEP button on
the stick for more than 0.5 sec (LONG) to toggle the missile type. 5 6
6. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL STEP button on
the stick for less than 0.5 sec (SHORT).
7. Select desired missile field-of-view by pressing the OSB next to
SPOT/SCAN
• SPOT: Narrow field-of-view, detection range is increased 5
• SCAN: Wide field-of-view, detection range is decreased
8. Select desired missile line-of-sight parameters by pressing the OSB next 7
to SLAVE/BORE. In this case, choose BORE.
• BORE: Missile follows HMCS boresight line
9. Activate missile seeker head argon cooling by setting the cooling status
to COOL (press OSB next to WARM/COOL). It will increase missile 6
8
detection sensitivity. Station 1 Selected
9b
• Note: COOL is selected automatically when entering DGFT or 9a
MSL Override mode. Argon supply duration varies depending on
outside air temperature, pressure and bottle charge level at
installation, but the average duration is 90 minutes.
382
(HMCS)
VIPER
F-16C
10. Power up the Helmet-Mounted Cueing System (HMCS) by turning HMCS

Symbology Brightness Knob RIGHT (Clockwise).
11. Select BORE (Boresight) ACM (Air Combat Mode) Search Sub-Mode by
pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) UP.
12. The HMCS Bore Ellipse will appear when BORE is selected.
13. Move your helmet to put the HMCS Ellipse on the target. Then, press TMS
(Target Management Switch) UP to radar lock the target. Radar will enter
STT (Single Target Track) Lock Mode.

14. A Target Designator Box will appear on the locked target. HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing 11
10 13 TMS (Target Management Switch)
BORE Search Mode

(Selected with TMS UP)
12 HMCS Bore Ellipse 14 Target Designator Box (STT Radar Lock)

9: Target Altitude in thousands of feet
Missile Diamond
13 HMCS Bore Ellipse
Dynamic Aiming Cross Master Arm is ON
Dogfight Mode

• Displays hundreds of ft when under 1 nm 383
3.3 – AIM-9X HOBS SIDEWINDER 20 Weapon Release Button • MAN RNG Clockwise: Zooms In
17
(HMCS) • UNCAGE (Depressed): Uncages
VIPER

F-16C
15. When radar STT (Single Target Track) lock is acquired, missile symbology
should appear on your HUD (DLZ and Slant Range).
16. If the missile detects enough infrared energy from the target, target
detection is indicated by an audio missile detection tone (growling sound).
17. When the AIM-9 seeker detects a target, uncage it by pressing the
Cage/Uncage button on the throttle. This will allow the seeker to lock on
and follow the target within the confines of the missile seeker’s field of
view.
18. When the missile is tracking a heat signature, the Missile Diamond latches
to the target and the missile growl sound will become high pitched.
19. Consult DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) indicator and make sure the range to
target is between the Minimum Range and the Max Missile Range vs
Maneuvering Target. 15 DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone)
Range Scale (nm) 18 Missile Diamond

Maximum Missile Range vs Maneuvering Target
19 Range to Target Caret
Closure Rate (kts)
Minimum Missile Range Range Provider / Slant Range (nm)

DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) 384
(HMCS)
VIPER
F-16C
Missile Diamond
385
(HMCS)
VIPER
F-16C
Take note that HUD symbology will be slightly different if you use DGFT mode or A-A Mode to acquire a radar lock.
HUD Radar Symbology with A-A Mode HUD Radar Symbology with DGFT Mode
2 HOB-V (High Off-Boresight Dogfight Mode

Missiles) Available
386
3.4 – AIM-120C AMRAAM
3.4.1 – AMRAAM Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
The AIM-120 AMRAAM (Advanced Medium-Range Air-to-Air Missile) has two main operating
modes: BORE and SLAVE. BORE mode is rarely use since in practice, you will always need to
identify your target before firing.
Boresight (BORE) mode:

• When HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) is not powered, the missile seeker “looks”
ahead on the aircraft bore line. This is called a "mad dog" shot since the missile flies
ballistically out to a point without guidance, then turns on its onboard radar and locks up and
flies to the first radar contact it finds. It has no IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) system, so it doesn't
distinguish between a friendly or a hostile.
• When HMCS is powered, the seeker is boresighted to the Helmet Mounted Display’s reticle.
However, the missile is confined to the restrictions of the FCR’s field of view.
Slaved (SLAVE) mode: BORE Mode (HMCS OFF)

• When a radar lock is acquired, the missile seeker is slaved to the FCR (Fire Control Radar). This
is the standard mode of operation you should be using. SLAVE Mode
• When no radar lock is acquired, the seeker is slaved to the aircraft bore line.
HMCS Display
387
BORE Mode (HMCS ON)
Dogfight Switch
3.4 – AIM-120C AMRAAM 3-Position switch, Slide
3.4.1 – AMRAAM Introduction both 20 mm gun firing and air-to-air missile delivery
VIPER
F-16C
There are three main methods of selecting an AMRAAM missile: for air-to-air missile firing only
• Press Dogfight Switch OUTBOARD (DGFT). AIM-9 missiles will be automatically selected. • Center: Returns to last selected Master Mode
Then, from the SMS page, select the AIM-120 missile.
• Press Dogfight Switch INBOARD (MSL OVRD/Missile Override). Then, from the SMS page,
• Select Air-to-Air Master Mode by pressing the A-A Button. Then, from the SMS page,
Dogfight Switch - DGFT
Dogfight Switch – MSL OVRD

A-A Master Mode
MRM (Medium Range Missile)
Select Missile Type Select Missile Type

Select Missile Type
388
3.4 – AIM-120C AMRAAM 1
3.4.2 – Radar (Single Target)
VIPER
F-16C
2
Note: The missile can be selected either through the AAM (Air-
to-Air Missile Mode), DGFT (Dogfight Override Mode) or MSL
OVRD (Missile Override Mode). In this case, we will use Air-to-
Air Mode.

2. Select AAM (Air-to-Air Missile Mode) by pressing the A-A
(Air-to-Air) Master Mode button.

4. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the
OSB (Option Select Button) next to the current Missile Type NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button
to toggle to the A120C (AIM-120C) missile. Alternatively, 3
you can press the NWS / MSL STEP button on the stick for • MSL (MISSILE) STEP LONG: Toggles Missile Type
more than 0.5 sec (LONG) to toggle the missile type.
• Note: As the AIM-120 missile is selected, 4 5
symbology for the ASEC (Allowable Steering Error
Circle) and the Missile Diamond will appear. ASEC (Allowable
4
5. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL Steering Error Circle)
STEP button on the stick for less than 0.5 sec (SHORT).
6. Select desired missile line-of-sight parameters by pressing 4
the OSB next to SLAVE/BORE. In this case, choose SLAVE. Missile Diamond
• BORE: Missile follows aircraft boresight line 6
The Allowable Steering Error Circle (ASEC) shows the zone in 5

which the Attack Steering Cue (ASC) should be located prior to Station 1 Selected
launch to hit the target with a given probability of kill. The ASC
is displayed after radar lock. Master Arm is ON
The ASEC shows the maximum, angular steering error
probability. In other words, the circle increases in size when
the distance to the target intercept point decreases, which 4 MRM (Medium Range
means that as the distance decreases, the missile can be Missiles) Available
launched with greater steering error. 389
3.4.2 – Radar (Single Target) SOI (Sensor of Interest) Control
8a
VIPER
F-16C
7c
7. Select FCR page, then press the DMS (Display Management Switch)
DOWN to set the FCR (Fire Control Radar) page as the SOI (Sensor of
Search Target 12
Interest).
a) Using the Radar Mode and Radar Sub-Mode selector OSBs
(Option Select Button), or;
b) Pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT LONG to
cycle between RWS and TWS mode.

9. Set desired radar range scale (40 nm in our case)
10. Set desired radar azimuth range (+/- 30 deg in our case)
11. Set desired radar bar mode (4 or 2 bars are generally used) 9
12. Search targets will first appear when valid tracks (radar contacts) are
obtained.
10
11
8b TMS (Target Management Switch)

7a
390
17
3.4.2 – Radar (Single Target) Target Designator Box (Bugged Target)
VIPER
F-16C
13. Acquire target and designate it as a “Bugged Target”

a) Use the Radar Cursor/Enable switch to move the Acquisition Cursor over the desired Closure Speed (kts)
Search Target.
b) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP, then release it to set selected Search Target ASEC (Allowable
into a Bugged Target. Steering Error Circle)
14. Once target is designated as a “Bugged Target”, the Situational Awareness Mode (SAM)
acquisition sequence is initiated.
15. During acquisition, the radar antenna is directed to the last known target position, and a 4-bar, ASC (Attack Steering Cue)
±10-degree Spotlight search is performed.
16. Bugged Target information (Aspect Angle, Ground Track, Airspeed (kts), Closure Speed (kts)) will
be displayed on the upper region of the FCR page.
17. Depending on the direction of the target, either a TLL (Target Locator Line) or a TD (Target Range Provider / Slant Range (nm)
Designator) Box towards the Bugged Target is displayed on the Heads-Up Display. Bugged Target
Range (nm) and Closure Speed (kts) are also displayed. 14
TMS (Target
Management Switch) 13b
Search Target
Bugged Target
Acquisition (ACQ) Cursor 13a 13b
13a

18b
TMS (Target
3.4 – AIM-120C AMRAAM Management Switch)
VIPER
F-16C
18. Transition Bugged Target to a STT (Single Target Track Radar Lock) Track
by pressing TMS UP a second time.
Bugged Target
18a in STT Mode 18c
392
22 Weapon Release Button
VIPER
F-16C
19. When the target enters the HUD, the Target Designator Box
will be displayed over the target and the Missile Diamond will
track that location. Target Aspect Caret
20. Maneuver until Attack Steering Cue (ASC) is inside the • 12 o’clock: Target is flying towards you
Allowable Steering Error Circle (ASEC) • 6 o’clock: Target is flying away from you
21. Consult DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) indicator and make sure
the range to target is between the Minimum Range and the Range Scale (nm)
Max Missile Range vs Maneuvering Target. ASEC (Allowable

22. Depress the Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to fire the Steering Error Circle)
missile. Maximum Missile Range
Target Designator Box (STT Radar Lock)
Maximum Missile Range vs
Maneuvering Target
Missile Diamond
DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) Closure Rate (kts)
Range to Target Caret
ASC (Attack Steering Cue) Minimum Missile Range
Master Arm is ON AXX: Time to Missile Radar Active (sec)

TXX: Time to Missile Impact (sec)
1 Radar Activation Range

4 MRM (Medium Range

Missiles) Available Range Provider / Slant Range (nm)
393
VIPER
F-16C
Target
Note: When you first fire an AMRAAM missile, the missile is initially guided by your own radar.
However, an « active radar homing missile » also has its own radar inside the seeker head. The
moment the missile goes « active » (meaning it will start self-homing/tracking targets on his own
instead of using your aircraft’s radar) is called « Pitbull ». When the missile goes « Pitbull », the
missile truly becomes fire-and-forget. NATO brevity word “Pitbull" would be called out on the radio
to inform other pilots, just as "Fox Three" would be called out upon launch.
Missile Launched and Active

(Seeker Head Tracking on its own)
Missile goes
Active (Pitbull)
Missile Launched but Not Active
Aircraft
394
VIPER
F-16C
T9: Time to Missile Impact (9 sec)
395
3.4 – AIM-120C AMRAAM 1
3.4.3 – Radar (Multiple Targets)
VIPER
F-16C
2
Note: The missile can be selected either through the AAM (Air-
to-Air Missile Mode), DGFT (Dogfight Override Mode) or MSL
OVRD (Missile Override Mode). In this case, we will use Air-to-
Air Mode.

2. Select AAM (Air-to-Air Missile Mode) by pressing the A-A
(Air-to-Air) Master Mode button.

4. On the SMS (Stores Management Set) page, press on the
OSB (Option Select Button) next to the current Missile NWS A/R DISC & MSL STEP Button
Type to toggle to the A120C (AIM-120C) missile. 3
Alternatively, you can press the NWS / MSL STEP button on • MSL (MISSILE) STEP LONG: Toggles Missile Type
the stick for more than 0.5 sec (LONG) to toggle the missile
type. 4 5
• Note: As the AIM-120 missile is selected,
symbology for the ASEC (Allowable Steering Error ASEC (Allowable
4
Circle) and the Missile Diamond will appear. Steering Error Circle)
5. Select desired missile station by pressing the NWS / MSL
STEP button on the stick for less than 0.5 sec (SHORT). 4
6. Select desired missile line-of-sight parameters by pressing Missile Diamond
the OSB next to SLAVE/BORE. In this case, choose SLAVE. 6
• BORE: Missile follows aircraft boresight line
The Allowable Steering Error Circle (ASEC) shows the zone in 5

which the Attack Steering Cue (ASC) should be located prior to Station 2 Selected
launch to hit the target with a given probability of kill. The ASC
is displayed after radar lock. Master Arm is ON
The ASEC shows the maximum, angular steering error
probability. In other words, the circle increases in size when
the distance to the target intercept point decreases, which 4 MRM (Medium Range
means that as the distance decreases, the missile can be Missiles) Available
launched with greater steering error. 396
3.4 – AIM-120C AMRAAM SOI (Sensor of Interest) Control 8a
3.4.3 – Radar (Multiple Targets) 7c

VIPER
F-16C
7. Select FCR page, then press the DMS (Display Management

Switch) DOWN to set the FCR (Fire Control Radar) page as the Track Targets 12b
SOI (Sensor of Interest).
8. Select TWS mode by either:
a) Using the Radar Mode and Radar Sub-Mode selector
OSBs (Option Select Button), or;
b) Pressing the TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT
LONG to cycle between RWS and TWS mode.

9. Set desired radar range scale (40 nm in our case)
10. Set desired radar azimuth range (+/- 30 deg in our case) 9
11. Set desired radar bar mode (4 or 2 bars are generally used)
12. After being detected on two consecutive antenna sweeps,
Search Targets become Track Targets automatically.
12a Search Targets
10
11
8b TMS (Target Management Switch)
7a
397
13b System Targets
VIPER
F-16C
13. Transition Track Targets into System Targets, which can then be “bugged” subsequently. Transition all
Track Targets into System Targets using TMS RIGHT SHORT
a) Track targets are visible as white filled squares
b) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) RIGHT SHORT
c) All existing Track Targets will transition into System Targets
14. Designate the desired System Target as a “Bugged Target”. Bug System Target with the Acquisition
Cursor
a) Use the Radar Cursor/Enable switch to move the Acquisition Cursor over the desired System
Target.
14a Acquisition (ACQ) Cursor
b) Press TMS (Target Management Switch) UP to set selected System Target into a Bugged Target.
15. When a “Bugged Target” is designated, the radar automatically transitions the scan to 3-bar, ±25 degrees
centered on the bugged target to provide faster updates and reduce the chance of losing the track.
16. Bugged Target information (Aspect Angle, Ground Track, Airspeed (kts), Closure Speed (kts)) will be
displayed on the upper region of the FCR page.
TMS (Target
Management Switch) 13b
14b
15
Track Targets
13a
1
Bugged Target
14b
14a

3.4 – AIM-120C AMRAAM Closure Speed (kts)
3.4.3 – Radar (Multiple Targets) Target Designator Box (Bugged Target)

VIPER
F-16C
17. Depending on the direction of the target,

either a TLL (Target Locator Line) or a TD 17
(Target Designator) Box towards the Bugged
Target is displayed on the Heads-Up Display.
Bugged Target Range (nm) and Closure ASEC (Allowable
Speed (kts) are also displayed. Steering Error Circle)
ASC (Attack Steering Cue)
Bugged Target
399
21 Weapon Release Button
VIPER
F-16C
18. When the target enters the HUD, the Target Designator Box will be
displayed over the target and the Missile Diamond will track that
location. Target Aspect Caret
19. Maneuver until Attack Steering Cue (ASC) is inside the Allowable • 12 o’clock: Target is flying towards you
Steering Error Circle (ASEC) • 6 o’clock: Target is flying away from you
20. Consult DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) indicator and make sure the range
to target is between the Minimum Range and the Max Missile Range vs Range Scale (nm)
Maneuvering Target. ASEC (Allowable

21. Depress the Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to fire the missile. Steering Error Circle)
Target Designator Box (STT Radar Lock)
Maximum Missile Range vs

Missile Diamond Maneuvering Target

Closure Rate (kts)
Range to Target Caret

Minimum Missile Range
ASC (Attack Steering Cue)
AXX: Time to Missile Radar Active (sec)

Master Arm is ON TXX: Time to Missile Impact (sec)

Bugged Target Radar Activation Range
4 MRM (Medium Range
Missiles) Available
400
VIPER
F-16C
A9: Time to Missile Radar Active (9 sec)
401
VIPER
F-16C
22. To engage other targets, press TMS (Target

Management Switch) RIGHT SHORT to cycle to next
displayed system target.
23. Depress the Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to
fire the missile.
24. Repeat steps 22 and 23 to engage further targets.
23
1
TMS (Target
Management Switch)
22a
Bugged Target 22c Bugged Target 22b
Altitude (19 = 19000 ft) Altitude (20 = 20000 ft)
402
4 – ORDNANCE JETTISON
4.1 – Selective Ordnance Jettison
VIPER
F-16C
1. Select SMS (Stores Management Set) page by pressing the OSB (Option
Select Button) next to SMS
2. Select Selective Jettison menu by pressing the OSB next to S-J
403
4.1 – Selective Ordnance Jettison
VIPER
F-16C
3. Depress the OSB next to the store to highlight it for jettison.

4. If more than one jettisonable store is loaded on a station, for example stores on a TER-9 (Triple
Ejector Rack), one depression of the OSB highlights the store and another depression highlights 5 Weapon Release Button
both the store and the rack.
5. Depress the Weapon Release (RALT+SPACE) button to jettison highlighted (selected) stations
3 1 3
TER (Triple Ejector Rack)
MK-82 Bomb
MK-82 Bomb
404
TK370 External Fuel Tank
4.2 – Emergency Stores Jettison
VIPER
F-16C
The emergency jettison button will jettison all fuel tanks, carted suspension racks, and free fall ordnance.
Emergency Stores Jettison Button

405
F-16C
PART 12 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES VIPER
406
INTRODUCTION
Countermeasures are very simple to use. You have three countermeasure types at your disposal: flares, chaff and an ECM (Electronic Countermeasure) jammer. We will explore together what is used
VIPER
F-16C
against what, and how.
Missiles can generally track you using 2 things: radar signature (radar waves are sent at you and you reflect them, which is called a “radar signature”) and heat signature (like the exhaust of your engines).
Countermeasures will only be effective against the kind of weapon it was meant to counter; a heat-seeking missile will not care if you deploy electronic countermeasures against it since it tracks heat, not
radar signatures. This is why it is important to know what is attacking you in order to counter it properly. This is what the RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) is for: to help you know what is firing at you so you
can take the adequate action to counter it.
PART 12 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES
Flares are used against missiles that track heat

(infrared or IR) signatures. Instead of going for
the heat signature generated by your engines, a
missile will go for a hotter heat source like flares.
Chaff
Chaff is a form of “passive” jamming. Passive
(reflected) jamming is when a deceptive object or
device reflects radar waves. Chaff is simply a
bundle of small pieces of metal foil with
reflective coating, which creates clusters of radar
signatures that prevent a radar to get a solid lock
on the aircraft itself.
The AN/ALQ-131 ECM pod (not simulated yet) is

the onboard Electronic Countermeasure/Jammer
system. It is a form of “continuous” jamming,
also called “active” or “transmitted” jamming.
This device transmits its own synchronized radar
waves back at your enemy’s radar receiver to
simulate erroneous radar wave returns. Simply
put, active jamming will try to drown a radar in Flare
white noise.
In order to use these three forms of

countermeasures, you can use “countermeasure
programs”, routines that will deploy a number of
flares/chaff for a number of cycles at a given
interval.
407
AN/ALR-56M AZIMUTH INDICATOR/RWR
RADAR WARNING RECEIVER
VIPER
F-16C
Detected radars are displayed on the Azimuth Indicator (aka Radar Warning Receiver). The Azimuth ALR-56M TWA (Threat Warning Azimuth) Indicator
Indicator is a circular-shaped display on the left of the front dash that provides you a visual representation Also known as RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
of radar emitters around your aircraft. The display is in plan view with your aircraft in the center.
As threats are displayed around the center of the display, the icons represent the azimuth direction to the
threat. In addition to the icons, an audio system will alert you to the status of the radars detected (search,
track, and launch).
The locations of radar emitters on the display do not necessarily correlate to emitter range from your
aircraft. The distance of the threat icon from the center of the display indicates radar signal strength. The
closer the icon is to the center of the display generally indicates the closer the radar is to you.
Any time a new emitter symbol is displayed on the azimuth indicator, a status change tone is generated by
the system. Special tones are also generated for specific threats or critical threat modes of operation.
The TWA (Threat Warning Azimuth) / RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) is powered by pressing the RWR
POWER Button on the Threat Warning Auxiliary Panel.
Threat Warning Auxiliary Panel
RWR Contact (MiG-29)

Indicator Control Power Button
408
RADAR WARNING RECEIVER
VIPER
F-16C
Threat Warning (Radar Warning Receiver) Antenna

Threat Warning (Radar Warning

Receiver) Antenna
Threat Warning (Radar Warning

Receiver) Antenna
409
MiG-29 Radar Detected
AN/ALR-56M AZIMUTH INDICATOR/RWR • Position: In front of you
• Diamond = Highest Threat Level
RADAR WARNING RECEIVER • Steady Circle = Radar Tracking
VIPER
F-16C
• Flashing Circle = Missile Radar Tracking

• A diamond indicates the highest threat level.
• If a symbol is displayed with no circle around it, it indicates that the radar
is in acquisition/search mode. When a new emitter is detected, a new
threat tone will be heard.
• If a symbol has a steady circle around it, it indicates that the radar is
tracking/locked on to your aircraft. When being tracked by an
engagement radar, you will be provided a radar lock tone.
• If a symbol has a flashing circle around it, it indicates that the radar is
supporting a missile that has been launched at you. MiG-29 Fulcrum
• When being launched on by a radar-guided missile, you will hear a missile

launch tone and the LAUNCH light to the left will illuminate.
SA-8 SAM Site
F-14 Tomcat
R-27ER Missile
(Launched at you)
You
E-3A AWACS
Oliver Perry Ship
410
THREAT WARNING PRIME (TWP) PANEL MiG-29 Radar Detected
VIPER
•
F-16C
Position: In front of you

The TWP (Threat Warning Prime) panel is used for primary RWR • Diamond = Highest Threat Level
functions. • Steady Circle = Radar Tracking
RWR Mode Selector Button • Flashing Circle = Missile Radar Tracking
As soon as the EWS (Electronic Warfare System) detects a radar • PRIORITY: only shows the five highest threats
missile launched at you, the MISSILE LAUNCH light will illuminate and • OPEN: display the 16 highest priority threats
a warning tone is audible. Keep in mind that this function only detects
radar-guided missiles. Infrared-guided missiles are not detected by
this system.
RWR Control HANDOFF Button (Not Simulated Yet)

Used to set the mode of operation of the RWR. The four modes are:
• Normal
• Diamond Float
• Transient
• Latch
RWR MISSILE LAUNCH Light

Illuminates when a radar missile
launch is detected
Threat Warning Prime (TWP) Panel
RWR UNKNOWN SHIP Toggle Switch RWR T (Target Separation) Button

(Not Simulated Yet) RWR System Test Button Separates symbols that cover each other on the
(Not Simulated Yet) azimuth indicator; the symbol with the highest
Toggles display of emitter symbols of
threat priority remains in the right place.
unknown weapon systems on and off.
THREAT (TWS, Threat Warning

System) Tone Control Knob 411
TARGET SEPARATION
VIPER
F-16C
If too many contacts start overlapping each other, you can press the “TARGET SEPARATION” function (TGT SEP), which will separate enemy icons.
RWR Icons Separated

RWR Icons Overlapped
RWR T (Target Separation) Button

Separates symbols that cover each other on the
azimuth indicator; the symbol with the highest
threat priority remains in the right place.
412
THREAT WARNING AUXILIARY PANEL
VIPER

F-16C
The TWA (Threat Warning Auxiliary) panel is used to power up the EWS Source Switch
(Electronic Warfare System) Suite. Enables RWR data to be used by CMDS JMR (Jammer) Source Switch
(Countermeasures Dispensing System) for Enables Jammer data to be used by CMDS
dispensing in the SEMI or AUTO modes. (Countermeasures Dispensing System) for
dispensing in the SEMI or AUTO modes.
Threat Warning Auxiliary Panel
RWR ACT/PWR Indicator (Not Simulated Yet)

• ACTIVITY: EWS (Electronic Warfare System) is powered and detects a radar
painting the aircraft.
• POWER: EWS (Electronic Warfare System) suite is powered
RWR SEARCH Control Button & Indicator (Not Simulated Yet)

Allows ‘S’ search radar symbols to be displayed on the RWR display if the
EWS is powered and detects a search radar; by default they are not. With
SEARCH enabled a SAM radar in search mode will display as an ‘S’, well
before you would expect to see its acquisition symbol if SEARCH was not
enabled, giving you an early warning in most cases.
RWR LOW ALTITUDE Control Button & Indicator (Not Simulated Yet)
• LOW: Priority to dangerous threats in low altitude. When no LOW light is
displayed, priority is given to dangerous threats at high altitude.
• ALT: EWS (Electronic Warfare System) suite is powered
RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) MWS (Missile Warning System) Switch

Indicator Control Power Button Not functional on Block 50 variant.
413
RADAR WARNING RECEIVER LIMITATIONS
VIPER
F-16C
Keep in mind that there are two blind spots on the RWR. Therefore, you cannot rely completely on the RWR to detect radar locks.
RWR Blind Spot

(Approximate Region)
RWR Blind Spot

(Approximate Region)
414
AN/ALR-56M AZIMUTH INDICATOR/RWR Air Threats Ground Threats
19 – MiG-19P AV – AV-8B A – ZU 23 AA A – Vulcan M163 – A
SYMBOLOGY
21 – MiG-21Bis 11 – F-111 A – ZSU 23 Shilka A – Gepard
VIPER
F-16C
Note: “U” or “UKN” symbol stands for “Unknown”, which is 22 – Tu-22M3 13 – C-130 8 – SA-8 RO – Roland ADS
sometimes attributed to ships.
23 – MiG-23 14 – F-14 11 – SA-11 GR – Roland EWR
MiG-29 Radar Detected 24 – Su-24 15 – F-15 13 – SA-13 RS – Rapier Blindfire Track Radar
• Position: In front of you
• Diamond = Highest Threat Level 25 – MiG-25 16 – F-16 15 – SA-15 RT – Rapier Launcher Radar
• Steady Circle = Radar Tracking
29 – J-11 17 – C-17 S6 – SA-19 HA – Hawk Search Radar
• Flashing Circle = Missile Radar Tracking
29 – MiG-29 18 – F/A-18C FS – SA-2 Fan Song Track Radar HK – Hawk Track Radar
29 – Su-27 37 – AJS-37 Viggen FF – SA-3 Flat Face Search Radar HK – Hawk Acquisition Radar
29 – Su-33 52 – B-52 LB – SA-3 Low Blow Track Radar PT – Patriot Search/Track Radar
30 – Su-30 B1 – B-1 06 – SA-6 S – Search Radar
39 – Su-39 E2 – E-2D AWACS DE – SA-9 Dog Ear Search Radar
31 – MiG-31 E3 – E-3A AWACS SD – SA-11 Snow Drift Search Radar
34 – Su-34 E6 – EA-6B CS – SA-11 Clam Shell Search Radar
50 – KJ-2000 AWACS F2 – F-2 / Tornado 10 – SA-10 Track Radar
50 – A-50 AWACS F4 – F-4E BB – SA-10 Big Bird Search Radar
76 – Il-76 F5 – F-5E3 EW – Box Spring Early Warning Radar
Ship Threats 78 – Il-78 KC – KC-130 EW – Tail Rack Early Warning Radar

95 – Tu-95 KC – KC-135
SW – Admiral Kuznetsov Carrier 48 – Carl Vinson Nimitz Supercarrier
AN – AN-26 M2 – Mirage 2000C
HN – Pyotr Velikiy Kirov Battlecruiser 49 – Oliver Hazard Petty Frigate
AN – AN-30 S3 – S-3B Tanker
T2 – Moskva Cruiser U – John C Stennis Nimitz Supercarrier
BJ – Tu-160 JF – JF-17 Thunder
TP – Neustrashimyy Frigate U – Tarawa Essex-Class Carrier
Tu – Tu-142
TP – Retsky Krivak Frigate AE – Normandy Ticonderoga Cruiser
HP – Grisha Corvette
415
PS – Molniya Tarantul Corvette
COUNTERMEASURES - CHAFF & FLARES
AN/ALE-47 CMDS (COUNTERMEASURES DISPENSER SYSTEM)
VIPER
F-16C
CMDS CONTROLS (REAL AIRCRAFT CONTROLS) Chaff/Flare Slap Button

Dispenses Chaff & Flare. This is a pushbutton programmed to drop countermeasures
Program No. 5. This gives you a third countermeasures program immediately available
without switching the PGRM knob on the CMDS.
Note: the “Slap” button should be used as a “panic” button.

• FWD: Dispenses currently selected CMDS program
• AFT: Gives Consent to Semi-Automatic and Automatic CMDS
programs to release their countermeasures automatically
• LEFT: No Function
• RIGHT: Disables Consent to Semi-Automatic and Automatic 416
CMDS programs to release their countermeasures automatically
VIPER
F-16C
CMDS CONTROLS (REAL AIRCRAFT CONTROLS)

RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) Source Switch DISPENSE READY CMDS Status Light
Enables RWR data to be used by CMDS Displayed when manual consent is required to dispense
(Countermeasures Dispensing System) for dispensing in GO / NO GO CMDS Status Light countermeasures in the SEMI or AUTO mode.
the SEMI or AUTO modes.
JMR (Jammer) Source Switch

Expendable Category Power Switches & Quantity
Enables Jammer data to be used by CMDS
(Countermeasures Dispensing System) for Indicators
dispensing in the SEMI or AUTO modes. • O1: Other 1 (TALD) - Not available on this F-16 variant.
• O2: Other 1 - Not available on this F-16 variant.
• CH: Chaff
• FL: Flares
Note: LO is displayed when quantity is low.
CMDS (Countermeasures Dispensing System) Mode Knob

• OFF
• STANDBY: release parameters and programming can be manually
MWS (Missile Warning System) changed using the UFC. It is the only mode allowing reprogramming.
Switch The CMDS cannot release countermeasures in this mode.
Not functional on Block 50 variant. • MAN: selected manual program may be dispensed by positioning the
CMS forward on the stick
• SEMI (Semi-Automatic): aircraft systems determine the program to be
Countermeasures Jettison Switch dispensed based on the threat. Consent to dispense must be given by
Jettisons countermeasures when position is set to positioning the CMS aft on the stick.
JETT (UP). Functions even when CMDS is turned OFF. • AUTO: aircraft systems determine the program to be dispensed based
on the threat. Countermeasures are dispensed automatically. This mode
must also be enabled by positioning the CMS aft on the stick. It may be
Countermeasures PRGM (Program) Selector Knob
disabled by selecting CMS right.
There are a total of 6 programs but only 1 – 4 can be selected
• BYP (Bypass): allows manual dispensing of countermeasures when
through the PRGM knob. PRG 5 is always activated by the slap
failures prevent the other modes from working.
switch on the left sidewall, while PRG 6 is the Bypass Program.
The first 5 programs can be programmed through DTC, or the
417
UFC whenever the CMDS mode in is STBY.
VIPER
F-16C
CMDS CONTROLS (MY CONTROLS)

I usually go for a simpler control setup. However, nothing stops you from mapping other switches of the CMDS panel (like the CMDS Mode knob or the CMDS Program Selector knob) to other
buttons if you want.
Countermeasures Management Sw - FWD

Countermeasures Management Sw – RIGHT
Countermeasures Management Sw – AFT
Chaff/Flare Dispense Button (Slap Switch)
My Setup
418
VIPER
F-16C
FCD (FLARE/CHAFF DISPENSER)

Flare and Chaff dispensers are located inside the body fairing. You can request the ground crew to set the number of chaff
and flares as desired, for a maximum of 120 combined flares and chaff. A typical loadout is set to 60 chaff and 60 flares.
FCDs (Flare/Chaff Dispensers)
419
VIPER
F-16C
COUNTERMEASURE PROGRAM & USAGE TUTORIAL

Chaff Counter Flare Counter
1. Press the Threat Warning Azimuth / Radar Warning Receiver (TWA/RWR) 5
Power Button. The RWR will enter a Built-In Test sequence. This step must be
performed if you intend to use Semi-Automatic or Automatic Modes.
2. Set CMDS RWR (Countermeasure Dispensing System Radar Warning Receiver) 4

Switch – ON (UP)
2
3. Set CMDS JMR (Countermeasure Dispensing System Jammer) Switch – ON (UP)
4. Set CMDS (Countermeasure Dispenser System) CH (Chaff) Switch – ON (UP)
5. Set CMDS (Countermeasure Dispenser System) FL (Flares) Switch – ON (UP)
6. Set Countermeasure Mode Selector to STBY (Standby). 3
7. Set Countermeasure PRGM (Program) Selector to desired Program (i.e.
Program 3)
6
7
1
420
8
VIPER
F-16C

8. Press the LIST button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
9. Press “7” button to select the CMDS (Countermeasures Dispenser System) sub-menu. 9
10. On the DED (Data Entry Display), the CMDS BINGO page will be displayed.
11. Using the Dobber Switch UP/DOWN and the ICP keypad, you can select and modify any of
the BINGO options as desired. ENTR button confirms changes.
12. Toggle the Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ) to display CMDS Countermeasure Page on the DED
(Data Entry Display).
9
10
11 12a
Chaff Bingo Quantity

Threshold when you are low on countermeasures FDBK: Feedback Message
CMDS BINGO DED Page Enables or disables the ‘Chaff Flare’ audio message that plays when a
Flare Bingo Quantity countermeasures program has been initiated.
Other Countermeasure (O1) Bingo Quantity REQCTR: Request Countermeasures Message

Enables or disables the ‘Counter’ audio message that plays when consent to
release countermeasures is requested in the SEMI or AUTO mode
Other Countermeasure (O2) Bingo Quantity
BINGO: Bingo Message
Enables or disables the ‘Low’ or ‘Out’ audio message that plays when the
BQ: Burst Quantity CMDS Countermeasure DED Page bingo quantity is reached, or all countermeasures have been expended
Number of countermeasures released per burst.
Selected Countermeasure Program
BI: Burst Interval (sec) Selected program is toggled by using the DED Increment/Decrement Switch
Interval in seconds between countermeasures per burst
SQ: Salvo Quantity

Number of bursts commanded when release consent is given
12b
SI: Salvo Interval (sec)
Time in seconds between each burst 421
13b
VIPER
13b
F-16C
14b
13. Toggle the Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ) to display the desired CMDS Countermeasure Page on the DED (Data Entry Display).
We will pick the FLARE page. The CMDS pages are listed as follows:
• BINGO
• CHAFF
• FLARE
• OTHER 1
• OTHER 2
14. Select the profile you want to edit using the DED Increment/Decrement Switch. We will edit Program 3. 15b
15. Press Dobber Switch DOWN to highlight the desired field (* means “selected”). We will edit the BI (Burst Interval) field.
16. Use the ICP keypad to type in the new desired value (020 will set 0.020 seconds).
17. Press ENTR to accept the changes.
18. Repeat steps 13 to 17 if you want to change any other setting for the selected countermeasure program.
16a
1 16b
17a
14a 17b
13a 15a 422

VIPER
F-16C

19. Set Countermeasure Mode Selector to MAN (Manual)
20. Double-check to see if the Countermeasure PRGM (Program) Selector is set to the desired Program
(Program 3)
21. Press the CMS (Countermeasure Switch) FWD to dispense countermeasures as per the selected program.
20
19
CMDS DEFAULT PROFILES

Program Chaff Flare BQ BI SQ SI
Burst Quantity 7a Interval (sec)
Burst Salvo Quantity Salvo Interval (sec)
1 1 1 1 0.020 10 1.0
2 1 1 1 0.020 10 0.5
3 2 2 2 0.100 5 1.0
4 2 2 2 0.100 10 0.5
21
Panic (PRG 5) 2 2 2 0.050 20 0.75
Slap Switch
Bypass (PRG 6) 1 1 1 0.020 1 0.5
423
VIPER
F-16C

Program 3 (Modified)
• 2 Chaff per burst, at 0.1 sec interval
• 2 Flares per burst, at 0.02 sec interval
• 5 bursts, at 1 sec interval
424
VIPER
F-16C
CMDS PAGE STRUCTURE

LIST Button

Increment/Decrement Switch
LIST Button
Press “7” to select CMDS DED Page CMDS CHAFF Page Prog 1 CMDS FLARE Page Prog 1 CMDS FLARE Page Other 1 CMDS FLARE Page Other 2
Dobber RIGHT Dobber RIGHT Dobber RIGHT Dobber RIGHT

(SEQ) (SEQ) (SEQ) (SEQ)
CMDS BINGO Page DED Increment/Decrement Switch
CMDS CHAFF Page Prog 2
DED Increment/Decrement Switch
CMDS CHAFF Page Prog 3

425
AN/ALQ-131 ECM POD
(ELECTRONIC COUNTERMEASURE JAMMER)
VIPER
F-16C
Note: the ECM pod is not yet implemented in Early Access. This section will be updated once it is available.
ECM Enable Light

Illuminates when ECM (Electronic

ECM (Electronic Countermeasures) Countermeasures) is transmitting.
ECM Panel Dim Jammer Switch
Button OPR: Operate
STBY: Standby
OFF
ECM XMIT (Transmit) Switch
ECM Reset Button
ECM Control Buttons
426
1 – DATALINK & IFF INTRODUCTION
One of the biggest challenges of integrated modern warfare is the identification of contacts. As various information donors like friendly fighters, ground radar stations, AWACS (Airborne Warning and
VIPER
F-16C
Control System, like an E-3 Sentry or an E-2 Hawkeye), and ships interrogate unknown contacts with IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) systems, this information needs to be relayed to everyone within a given
Network. This is where Datalink comes in; with Link 16 Datalink, military aircraft as well as ships and ground forces may exchange their tactical picture in near-real time. Link 16 also supports the
exchange of text messages, imagery data and provides two channels of digital voice (2.4 kbit/s and/or 16 kbit/s in any combination).
Multifunctional Information Distribution System (MIDS) is the NATO name for the communication component of Link-16. MID is an advanced command, control, communications, computing and
intelligence (C4I) system incorporating high-capacity, jam-resistant, digital communication links for exchange of near real-time tactical information, including both data and voice, among air, ground, and
sea elements. MIDS is intended to support key theater functions such as surveillance, identification, air control, weapons engagement coordination and direction for all Services.
The aircraft relies on the MIDS radios that allow the transmission and reception of data over the Link 16 Tactical Data Information Link (TADIL) network.
HOSTILES
PART 13 – DATALINK & IFF
FRIENDLIES
427
2 – DATALINK
2.1 – COMPONENTS BREAKDOWN
VIPER
F-16C
The Datalink system on the F-16 can be turned ON using the MIDS (Multifunctional
Information Distribution System) LVT (Low Volume Terminal) Datalink Selector
Switch.
Datalink parameters can be accessed from the DED (Data Entry Display) DLNK sub-
menu and modified through the ICP (Integrated Control Panel).
Datalink data is visible on both the FCR (Fire Control Radar) page and on the HSD
(Horizontal Situation Display) page.
FCR (Fire Control Radar) Page MIDS (Multifunctional Information Distribution System)
LVT (Low Volume Terminal) Datalink Selector Switch
• ZERO: Zeroize (erase) all MIDS information
• OFF: MIDS is OFF
• ON: MIDS is ON
DED (Data Entry Display) LIST – DLNK Sub-Menu
428
2 – DATALINK
2.2 – DATALINK TRACK FILE TYPES This information comes from a surveillance donor
(like an AWACS or a ship) on the same datalink
VIPER
F-16C
network. This is an offboard trackfile.

Link 16/MIDS can receive and display three types of track files:
• Surveillance Tracks, provided by data sources like AWACS

and radar ground stations.
This information comes from a friendly fighter
• Fighter Tracks, provided by donor aircraft, other fighters donor (F/F: Fighter-to-Fighter) on the same datalink
providing track data, on the network. They are all correlated network, however you have not acquired this track
against each other to avoid duplicate trackfiles. These are yourself. This is an offboard trackfile.
visually identical to surveillance tracks.
• PPLI (Precise Participant Location and Identification) Tracks,

show the location and status of members of the pilot’s own
The Precise Participant Location and Identification
flight and up to four additional donor aircraft. (PPLI) system broadcasts to other aircraft on
datalink positional information about the PPLI
Take note that on the FCR (Fire Control Radar) page, the RWS donor itself. These symbols show the location and
(Range While Search) contacts are uncorrelated because they status of members of the pilot’s own flight and up
lack tracking precision, whereas TWS (Track While Scan) to four additional donor aircraft.
contacts are correlated because of much more precise tracking

information.
You have acquired this track and another

information donor has given you information
(offboard trackfile) about it as well. This means
this information is correlated/coherent between
an onboard (you) and an offboard information
Vector Line source. This is termed Multi Source Integration
Symbol (MSI).
Altitude
(Thousands of Feet)
429
2 – DATALINK
2.3 – HSD (HORIZONTAL SITUATION DISPLAY) SYMBOLOGY
VIPER
F-16C
SAM (Surface-to-Air Missile) Site Symbol

(SA-10)
Hostile Track, altitude 30000 ft

SAM (Surface-to-Air Missile) Site Threat Ring

• This ring is set by the DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) via the
Mission Editor. This is an indicator of the SAM radar range and
this region should be avoided if possible.
• If SAM site is destroyed, the Threat Ring will remain displayed.
It does not update dynamically with the SAM site itself, it is
merely a visual marker set prior to the mission according to
currently available intelligence on deployment of enemy forces.
Friendly Track,
altitude 31000 ft.
HSD (Horizontal Situation

Display) Page 430
2 – DATALINK
2.3 – HSD (HORIZONTAL SITUATION DISPLAY) SYMBOLOGY Current zoom level on the HSD
• NORM (normal view)
VIPER
F-16C
• EXP1 (area around your aircraft is expanded

• EXP2 (area around your aircraft is expanded further)
View Coupled (CPL) or De-coupled (DCPL) from Displays Datalink Message (MSG)
FCR (Fire Control Radar) Range
HSD CNTL (Control) Page
View Position of HSD
• DEP: Depressed (Default)
Position
• CEN: Centered Position
HSD Datalink XMT (Transmit) Option
• OFF
• L16 (LINK-16)
• IDM (Improved Data Modem)
HSD FZ (Freeze) Function. HSD will freeze in its

current position, and will not turn with your
aircraft or reposition itself to keep you centered.
HSD Datalink Contact Filter

• FR ON: All Friendly Contacts
• FL ON: Flight Leaders Only
• FR OFF: Friendly Contacts OFF
Display Declutter (DCLT) Function. Removes

information from HSD to make it more readable.
431
Bugged Target ID
2 – DATALINK
2.4 – FCR (FIRE CONTROL RADAR) SYMBOLOGY RWS (Range While Search) /TWS (Track While Track Symbol
Vector Line
VIPER
F-16C
Scan) Mode
RWS contacts are uncorrelated because they
lack tracking precision. Altitude
(thousands of feet)
TWS contacts are correlated because TWS
generates more precise tracking information.
Hostile Track Bugged by Wingman 2,

altitude 19000 ft.
Hostile Track Bugged by Multiple Donors (M),

Hostile Track Bugged by Wingman 3, altitude 16000 ft.
altitude 18000 ft.
Hostile Track Bugged by Flight Member Ford 1-1 (FD11),

Friendly Tracks, altitude 13000 ft.
altitude 18000 ft.

432
1
2 – DATALINK
2.5 – DED (DATA ENTRY DISPLAY) DLNK PAGES
VIPER
F-16C
To consult the MIDS Network Data on the DLNK DED Pages:
1. Press the LIST button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) 2

2. Select Datalink (DLNK) page by pressing the ENTR (E) button. 1
3. On the DED (Data Entry Display) Datalink page 1 (P1), you can
consult Datalink Network Status and time references.
4. Press the DCS (Data Control Switch, also called “Dobber”) 2
RIGHT (SEQ) select the DED Datalink page 2 (P2).
5. On the DED Datalink page 2, you can consult Datalink MIDS
Radio Options. Most MIDS settings can be left as is.
6. If desired, you can modify your MIDS settings by selecting a
field with the “Dobber” switch UP or DOWN. “*” symbols will
indicate which data field is selected. Then, enter the field
value on the ICP keypad, then press “ENTR” button on the ICP 4 6
to modify the field.
7. Press the DCS (Data Control Switch, “Dobber”) RIGHT (SEQ)
select the DED Datalink page 3 (P3). MIDS Radio Options
8. On the DED Datalink page 3, you can consult Datalink Flight Callsign (ED 11 = Enfield 1-1)
Management data .

Fighter Channel (FC) Selection
Mission Channel (MC) Selection
Surveillance Channel (SC) Selection

Datalink Network Status
Flight Management
GPS Time Reference Flight Member Track Numbers

Own Flight Position
Pilot Entered Time (Shown: 1)
Network Time Reference
433
Network Synchronization Status
2 – DATALINK
2.5 – DED (DATA ENTRY DISPLAY) DLNK PAGES
VIPER
F-16C
DLNK PAGE STRUCTURE

LIST Button
LIST Button
Press “ENTR” to select DLNK DED Page
Datalink Network Status MIDS Radio Options Flight Management
Dobber RIGHT Dobber RIGHT

(SEQ) (SEQ)
434
E-3A AWACS (Surveillance)
2 – DATALINK
2.6 – MIDS NETWORK - OVERVIEW
VIPER
F-16C
Here is an overview of the three different

kinds of channels you can set.
• Fighter Channel (FC) is for members of
your own flight
• Mission Channel (MC) is for members
of other flights
• Surveillance Channel (SC) is for tactical
datalink with information donors (i.e. Flight Member Track Number: Flight Member Track Number:
AWACS) 00301 (#1, Flight Lead, Colt 1-1) 00302 (#2, Colt 1-2)
FC (Fighter Channel) 1 (Enfield)

MC (Mission Channel) 1 00202 (#2, Enfield 1-2)
SC (Surveillance Channel) 1

00201 (#1, Flight Lead, Enfield 1-1)
MIDS Radio Options Flight Management
435
2 – DATALINK
VIPER
F-16C
At the moment, you should assume that your Callsign and Flight Lead (FL)
Identifiers are all set correctly since they are generated by the Mission Editor.
The only thing you can change is your Own Flight Position ID. This number
00302 (#2, Colt 1-2)
will indicate your position in your current flight (i.e. Enfield Flight in our case). Flight Member Track Number:
00301 (#1, Flight Lead, Colt 1-1)
Blue Symbols indicate member of your current flight. Green symbols are
friendly members of your Datalink network, but from different flights.
The number inside the circle symbol is the Own Flight Position Number 00202 (#2, Enfield 1-2)
within your own flight. The number below the circle symbol is the altitude of
the Datalink contact in thousands of feet (06 = 6000 ft).

00202 (#2, Enfield 1-2)

MIDS Radio Options
Callsign (ED 11 = Enfield 1-1)
00301 (#1, Flight Lead, Colt 1-1)

00302 (#2, Colt 1-2)
Flight Management
Flight Member Track Numbers Own Flight Position

(Shown: 1)
436
Colt 1-4
2 – DATALINK (#4, 00215)

VIPER
F-16C
This is an example of how members of two different flights on a same LINK-16

Datalink network would see each other.
Colt Flight
Colt 1-4
Colt 1-1
(Lead, #1, 00212)
Colt 1-2 Colt 1-3
(#2, 00213) (#3, 00214)
Enfield Flight Colt Flight Enfield Flight

# 1 – 00201 # 5 – 00205 # 1 – 00212 # 5 – 00216
Enfield 1-1 Colt 1-1

(Flight Lead) (Flight Lead)
Enfield 1-4
# 2 – 00202 # 6 – 00206 # 2 – 00213 # 6 – 00217 (#4, 00204)
Enfield 1-2 Colt 1-2
# 3 – 00203 # 7 – 00207 # 3 – 00214 # 7 – 00220 Enfield 1-3
Enfield 1-3 Colt 1-3 Enfield 1-1 (#3, 00203)
(Lead, #1, 00201)
# 4 – 00204 # 8 – 00210 # 4 – 00215 # 8 - 00221 Enfield 1-2
Enfield 1-4 Colt 1-4 (#2, 00202)
Enfield 1-1
437
2 – DATALINK 1a 1b
2.6 – MIDS NETWORK – SETTING ID NUMBER

VIPER
F-16C
If desired, you can modify your Own ID Number on your flight’s Datalink Network.
1b 4
As an example, if you want to set your Own ID Number from #3 to #4:
1. Select MIDS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT page
a) Press LIST Button 1c
b) Press ENTR Button 3
c) Select Dobber RIGHT (SEQ)
d) Your Current Own ID Number within your flight can be seen as #3 (Track
Number is 00207)
2. Select the “OWN” field with the “Dobber” switch UP or DOWN. “*” symbols will
indicate which data field is selected.
3. Enter the field value on the ICP keypad (4) 1c 2
4. Press “ENTR” button on the ICP to modify the field.
5. Your Own ID Number within your flight will now be #4. Your track Number will
now be 00210.
4
1d
3
You You
How you see yourself How your Flight Lead will see you
(Your Own ID = 3) (Your Own ID = 4)
438
4
2 – DATALINK
2.7 – WINGMAN RADAR LOCK LINES
VIPER
F-16C
A dashed cyan wingman lock line is drawn from wingmen to their currently bugged (or radar locked) targets.
a. Wingman lock lines are only displayed for flight members (blue) and not for all donors on the network.
b. There is no lock line visible for your own bugged targets on your own HSD page
c. Your wingmen will see your lock line for your own bugged targets if the XMT option is set to L16 (LINK-16) on the HSD page.
Wingman Radar Lock
Your own bugged target

Wingman Radar Lock
Enfield 1-1 (You)

(Lead, #1) Wingman Lock Line
Enfield 1-2
(Wingman, #2) Wingman Lock Line
Enfield 1-3
(Wingman, #3)
439
2 – DATALINK
2.8.1 – DATA FILTERS: FCR PAGE
VIPER
F-16C
Track symbols displayed on the FCR page may be filtered using the UHF/VHF Transmit switch. This affects tracks displayed on the
radar display only and does not affect those displayed on the HSD.
Positioning the Transmit switch inboard short (less than .5 sec) rotates between three filter options.
Positioning the Transmit Switch outboard short (less than .5 sec) selects NONE and removes all datalink tracks. Selecting
outboard short again returns to the previously selected filter option.
Datalink Tracks
Filter Options
• ALL: All Datalink symbols are displayed
• FTR+: Datalink Surveillance tracks are removed
• TGTS: Datalink Surveillance and PPLI tracks are
• Transmit Switch – IFF IN (INBOARD): Cycles filter options removed
• Transmit Switch – IFF OUT (OUTBOARD): Removes datalink tracks • NONE: No Datalink symbols are displayed
Datalink Contacts
filtered out
440
2 – DATALINK
2.8.2 – DATA FILTERS: HSD CNTL PAGE
VIPER
F-16C
If you press on the CNTL (Control) OSB (Option Select Button) of the HSD page, you can configure what kind of data is displayed.
AIFF: Toggles the display of Advanced IFF (Identify-

Friend-or-Foe) responses from other aircraft.
HSD CNTL (Control) Sub-Page

PRE (Pre-Programmed): Toggles the display of
enemy targets that were programmed into your
aircraft's computer before takeoff
FCR: toggles display of the radar scan area and the

"ghost" cursor showing the position of your FCR
(Fire Control Radar) cursor
NAV1: Toggles the display of LINE1: Toggles the display of map information line 1
your navigational route 1. on the HSD (i.e. Forward Line of Troops).
your navigational route 2. on the HSD.
RINGS: Toggles the display of LINE4: Toggles the display of map information line 4
range rings around your on the HSD.
aircraft.
Access to CNTL Page 2
441
2 – DATALINK
2.8.2 – DATA FILTERS: HSD CNTL PAGE
VIPER
F-16C
PDLT RNG (Primary Datalink Track Range): HSD range scale automatically
increases to maintain the PDLT within the HSD Field of View

REF PT: Not Functional
L16 ENG: Not Functional
A TGTS: Toggles the display of air threats/targets A SURV: Toggles the display of surveillance air
uploaded to your computer from data link threats/targets uploaded to your computer from data
link
G TGTS: Toggles the display of ground threats/targets G FRND: Toggles the display of friendly ground units
uploaded to your computer from data link uploaded to your computer from data link
SAM: Toggles the display of SAM (Surface-to-Air LAR: Toggles Launch Acceptable Range
Missile) symbols and threat rings (LAR) Symbology from HSD
SHIP: Toggles the display of Ship symbols uploaded to MP: Not Functional
your computer from data link
A IDM: Not Functional Access to CNTL Page 1
442
3 – IFF (IDENTIFY FRIEND-OR-FOE)
3.1 – IFF INTRODUCTION
VIPER
F-16C
Identifying what you may or may not shoot should be your primary concern at all times. This is where the IFF (Identify-Friend-or-
Foe) system comes into play.
An IFF system consists of an INTERROGATOR component and a TRANSPONDER component.
The interrogator component broadcasts an interrogation signal with a specific “code” (pulse frequency).
A transponder equipped on another aircraft will receive the interrogation signal and broadcast a reply signal with its own “code”
(pulse frequency) as well. The information sent from this reply signal will vary based on the transponder mode selected.
Your own aircraft transponder will then see if the interrogation code and reply codes match, which in some cases can be used to
determine whether the other aircraft is a friendly contact. The nature of the information determined will vary based on the
transponder mode.
Take note that if you set an incorrect transponder code, friendly contacts may not be able to identify you as a friendly.
443
3.2 – IFF MODES & PRINCIPLES
VIPER
F-16C
In its simplest form, a "Mode" or interrogation type is generally determined by pulse spacing between two or more interrogation pulses. Various modes exist from Mode 1 to 5 for military
use, to Mode A, C, and Mode S for civilian use. The takeaway from this table should be:
• Mode 4 is the preferred mode in a combat scenario because it is highly secure (encrypted). Encrypted interrogation codes cannot be detected by an enemy transponder, and your
transponder will not broadcast a reply signal to the other team.
• Mode 4 invalid/lack of reply cannot guarantee that an aircraft is hostile, but a valid reply is a guarantee of a friendly contact (within DCS)
• Modes 1, 2, and 3 are not secure to use since any other aircraft from the opposing team could find what your Interrogator code is and set his transponder to it, fooling you into thinking
he is a friendly contact. These modes also easily give away your position since every time your transponder broadcasts an answer, this signal can be intercepted by an enemy
transponder, which can send your position to other enemy fighters via datalink.
Take note that only Mode 4 is simulated as of 2020/04/21.
Military Interrogation Mode Civilian Interrogation Mode Description
1 Provides 2-digit 5-bit mission code

2 Provides 4-digit octal unit code (set on ground for fighters, can be changed in flight by transport aircraft)
Provides a 4-digit octal identification code for the aircraft, set in the cockpit but assigned by the air traffic
A controller. Mode 3/A is often combined with Mode C to provide altitude information as well.
3
Provides the aircraft's pressure altitude and is usually combined with Mode 3/A to provide a combination of a 4-
C digit octal code and altitude as Mode 3 A/C, often referred to as Mode A and C
4 Provides a 3-pulse reply, delay is based on the encrypted challenge
5 Provides a cryptographically secured version of Mode S and ADS-B GPS position

Mode S (Select) is designed to help avoiding overinterrogation of the transponder (having many radars in busy
areas) and to allow automatic collision avoidance. Mode S transponders are compatible with Mode A and Mode
S C Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR) systems. This is the type of transponder that is used for TCAS or ACAS II
(Airborne Collision Avoidance System) functions
444
3.2 – IFF MODES & PRINCIPLES
VIPER
F-16C
The “Interrogator” component of the IFF system is used to interrogate unknown contacts. The “Transponder” component of the IFF system is used to respond to interrogations from other
aircraft.
Interrogation Code Transponder Code

(Who are you?) (Who am I?)
Mode 4 Mode 4
Key A Key A
Interrogation Signal: Who are you? Mode 4 A, by any chance?
445
3.3 – IFF COMPONENTS & CONTROLS
VIPER
F-16C
The primary components you will use when performing target identification are the TMS
(Target Management Switch), the FCR (Fire Control Radar) page and the IFF Master Switch, TMS (Target Management Switch)
which powers the IFF system. LEFT: Interrogates Contact
Take note that all switches in red on the IFF panel are only meant to be used as a backup only.
In order to use them, the C&I Switch must be set to BACKUP. Otherwise, all IFF codes are set via
the UFC (Up-Front Control) on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel).
C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and Identification) Switch
Allows the pilot to toggle between the BACKUP system and the UFC (Up Front Controller).
BACKUP is only used if engine generator failure has occurred.
IFF Mode 4 Code Switch

Zero / A/B / Hold
Master Switch
Controls power to the IFF

transponder/interrogator unit.
IFF Enable Switch

• M3/MS
• OFF
• M1/M3
IFF Mode 4 Monitor Switch

Audio/Out
IFF Mode 1
Selector Switches IFF Mode 3 IFF Mode 4 Reply Switch
446
Selector Switches B / A / Out
IFF Menu Button
VIPER
F-16C
The CNI DED page is used to monitor what IFF Transponder DCS (Data Control Switch, also nicknamed “Dobber”)
modes and codes are active.
The IFF Menu DED page is used to monitor and set Transponder
codes, which are used to “respond” to IFF interrogations.
Currently, only Mode 4 is available.
Take note that as of 2020/04/21, these codes are already set for
you and cannot be modified yet.
Selected by pressing the DCS/Dobber
CNI (Communications, Navigation & Identification) DED page (Data Control Switch) left to RTN
Active IFF Transponder Modes
Only Mode 4 is active
IFF Mode 3 Transponder Code

IFF Master Mode Status

ON / STBY / OFF / EMER DED (Data Entry Display) IFF Menu Selected by pressing IFF Button on the ICP
IFF Mode 1 Transponder Code & Status IFF Mode 4 Transponder Key & Status
Code: 42, highlighted if active Highlighted if active, key not yet simulated
IFF Mode 2 Transponder Code & Status IFF POS (Position) Event Setting
Code: 6174, highlighted if active NOF1: Selected Modes change when aircraft flies North of Steerpoint 1
IFF Mode 3 Transponder Code & Status
IFF Time Event Setting
Code: 1337, highlighted if active
01:23 - Selected Modes change when at 01:23
IFF Visual/Audio feedback Setting

• OUT: No feedback when interrogated by another aircraft with Mode 4 IFF Mode S Transponder Code & Status
• LIT: Number 4 illuminates on CNI page when you are interrogated with Mode 4 IFF Mode C Transponder
• AUD: You receive an audio tone when you are interrogated with Mode 4 Key & Status 447
LIST Button
“RCL” Button
VIPER
F-16C
INTG DED Pages are used to monitor and set Interrogator codes, which
are used to interrogate unknown contacts. INTG LOS (Line of Sight) and
INTG SCAN are two different interrogation methods, which are divided
in INTG sub-menus that can be toggled with the Dobber Switch set to
RIGHT (SEQ).
Take note that as of 2020/04/21, these codes are already set for you
and cannot be modified yet.
INTG (Interrogator Settings) DED Page – SCAN Sub-Menu Selected by pressing LIST Button, then pressing
“RCL” to select INTG SCAN Sub-Menu
Interrogator Mode 1 Code
Mode 4 Key
Key: A, highlighted if active
Interrogator Mode 2 Code IFF Jamming (Not Simulated)

IFF coupling options

Interrogator Mode 3 Code
• DCPL (decoupled): interrogator is
decoupled from the transponder
• ALL (all modes are coupled)
• SOME (some modes are coupled)
Selected by pressing LIST Button, then pressing

“RCL” to select INTG SCAN Sub-Menu, then
pressing the DCS/Dobber (Data Control Switch)
right to SEQ to select LOS Sub-Menu
448
INTG (Interrogator Settings) DED Page – LOS (Line of Sight) Sub-Menu
3 – IFF (IDENTIFY FRIEND-OR-FOE) IFF Menu – Transponder Codes
3.4 – SETTING IFF CODES
VIPER
F-16C
Take note that as of 2020/04/21, IFF codes are already set for you and cannot be modified yet.
INTG SCAN Menu – Interrogator Codes

INTG LOS Menu – Interrogator Codes
449
3 – IFF (IDENTIFY FRIEND-OR-FOE) Master Switch
1
3.5 – IFF TUTORIAL (MODE 4) Controls power to the IFF
VIPER
F-16C
There are two methods of interrogating a target:

• SCAN interrogates a locked target or immediate area around the radar cursor.
• LOS (Line of Sight) interrogates all contacts in the radar scan volume. 4c
SCAN INTERROGATION METHOD

1. Set the IFF Master Switch to NORM to power up the IFF System.
2. Display SCAN Interrogation Codes by pressing LIST Button, then pressing “RCL” to
select INTG SCAN Sub-Menu
3. (Not Simulated Yet) Set required key/code for Mode 4 IFF Interrogator by Interrogation Code Transponder Code
pressing “6” on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel), then pressing “ENTR”. This will (Who are you?) (Who am I?)
set Mode 4 Interrogator key for SCAN mode to “A”.
4. (Not Simulated Yet) Display Transponder Codes by pressing IFF Menu Button, Mode 4 Mode 4
then set required key/code for Mode 4 IFF Transponder by pressing “6” on
the ICP (Integrated Control Panel), then pressing “ENTR”. This will set Mode 4 Key A Key A
Transponder key for mode 4 to “A”.
2b
4a
2a
3a
2b
2c 3b
3b
3a 4b
450
3.5 – IFF TUTORIAL (MODE 4)
VIPER
F-16C
SCAN INTERROGATION METHOD

5. Set FCR (Fire Control Radar) page as the Sensor of Interest (SOI) by pressing DMS (Display Management Switch) DOWN.
6. Press TMS (Target Management Switch) LEFT SHORT (1 second or less) to interrogate all contacts in the radar scan volume.
5
7. If the contact is friendly, a green circle is drawn around the contact for three seconds. Friendly contacts will be displayed on the
HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) as well. DMS (Display Management Switch)
8. If no reply is received, no indication is displayed, and the contact is classified as unknown. These contacts may be assumed to 6
be hostile depending on the rules of engagement (ROE) in your current scenario. TMS (Target Management Switch)
7
Friendly Contact has replied to our
interrogation signal with the
Radar Scan Volume correct transponder code
5
FCR Page is SOI

8
Unknown Contact has
not replied to our
interrogation signal
“4” symbol inside a contact means

that you have received a good
response from your Mode 4
Interrogator Mode Interrogation.
Mode 4 - SCAN
6
FCR Page HSD Page 451

3 – IFF (IDENTIFY FRIEND-OR-FOE) 1 Master Switch
3.5 – IFF TUTORIAL (MODE 4) Controls power to the IFF
VIPER
F-16C
There are two methods of interrogating a target:

• SCAN interrogates a locked target or immediate area around the radar cursor.
• LOS (Line of Sight) interrogates all contacts in the radar scan volume. 4c
LOS (LINE OF SIGHT) INTERROGATION METHOD

1. Set the IFF Master Switch to NORM to power up the IFF System.
2. Display LOS Interrogation by pressing LIST Button, then pressing “RCL” to select INTG
SCAN Sub-Menu. Then, press Dobber switch right (SEQ) to select LOS Sub-Menu.
3. (Not Simulated Yet) Set required key/code for Mode 4 IFF by pressing “6” on the ICP
Interrogation Code Transponder Code
(Integrated Control Panel), then pressing “ENTR”. This will set Mode 4 Interrogator
(Who are you?) (Who am I?)
key for SCAN mode to “A”.
4. (Not Simulated Yet) Display Transponder Codes by pressing IFF Menu Button, then set Mode 4 Mode 4
required key/code for Mode 4 IFF Transponder by pressing “6” on the ICP (Integrated
Control Panel), then pressing “ENTR”. This will set Mode 4 Transponder key for mode
Key A Key A
4 to “A”.
2b
4a
2a
2b
3a
2c
3b
3b 3a 4b
2d
452
3.5 – IFF TUTORIAL (MODE 4)
VIPER
F-16C
LOS (LINE OF SIGHT) INTERROGATION METHOD

5. Set FCR (Fire Control Radar) page as the Sensor of Interest (SOI) by pressing DMS (Display Management Switch)
DOWN.
6. With Radar Cursor/Enable Switch, slew the Acquisition Cursor (ACQ) over the contact you want to interrogate.
7. If desired, you can bug the target by using TMS (Target Management Switch) UP, but this step is not necessary.
8. Press TMS (Target Management Switch) LEFT LONG (more than 1 second) to interrogate all contacts in the radar
5
6 Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
scan volume. 7
9. If the contact is friendly, a green circle is drawn around the contact for three seconds. Friendly contacts will be
displayed on the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) as well. 8 DMS (Display Management Switch)
10. If no reply is received, no indication is displayed, and the contact is classified as unknown. These contacts may
be assumed to be hostile depending on the rules of engagement (ROE) in your current scenario. TMS (Target Management Switch)
Friendly Contact has replied to our Unknown Contact has

interrogation signal with the 9 not replied to our 10
5 FCR Page is SOI correct transponder code interrogation signal

6
Interrogator Mode
8
Mode 4 - LOS
“4” symbol inside a contact means
that you have received a good
response from your Mode 4
FCR Page Interrogation. FCR Page 453
3.6 – IN CONCLUSION
VIPER
F-16C
One of the biggest challenges of IFF is that a lack of IFF response does NOT guarantee that the contact you are interrogating is an enemy.
A lack of response could be explained by:

• A friendly aircraft that is damaged and has a damaged transponder
• A friendly aircraft that has not set correct transponder (response) codes
• A friendly aircraft that forgot to turn on his IFF
• A friendly aircraft that is not equipped with an IFF system compatible with yours
• A hostile aircraft
This is why Datalink and IFF are meant to be used together in order to complement the information gathered by your radar, radar warning receiver and other datalink information donors. This
minimizes the chances of friendly fire.
454
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW • AFT: transmits on UHF radio ( RALT+\ )
• FWD: transmits on VHF radio ( RCTRL+\ )
The F-16 uses two radio sets: one for UHF frequencies (AN/ARC-164, or COM1) and one for VHF frequencies
VIPER
F-16C
(AN/ARC-222, or COM2).
• COM1 covers the UHF band (225.000 – 399.975 MHz) and is used for primary voice communications.
• COM2 covers the VHF band (108.000 – 173.975 MHz) and is used as a backup for voice communications.
• Radio transmission is done with the Communication Transmit switch AFT (COM1 UHF, “RALT+\”) or FWD
(COM2 VHF, “RCTRL+\”)
The ICP (Integrated Control Panel) is used to tune radios rapidly using preset or manual frequencies in
either VHF or UHF frequency bands.
• The Main CNI (Communication, Navigation & Identification) DED (Data Entry Display) page appears when
pressing the Dobber Switch LEFT (RTN). This is used as a summary of radio frequencies currently tuned.
• The UHF DED Page is accessed when pressing the COM1 button. Frequencies can be tuned with the ICP.
• The VHF DED Page is accessed when pressing the COM2 button. Frequencies can be tuned with the ICP.
CNI DED Page

UHF DED Page
PART 14 – RADIO TUTORIAL
COM 1 Button COM 2 Button

VHF DED Page
455
Dobber Switch
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• The Audio 1 Control Panel is mainly used to tune UHF COM1 and VHF COM2 radio
VIPER
F-16C
volume.
UHF (COMM 1) Radio
• The Audio 2 Control Panel is mainly used to tune volume for other auxiliary systems Backup Control Panel
(Intercom, TACAN, ILS)
• The Backup UHF Control Panel is the only radio that can function with battery power
alone. This means that this panel can be used before engine start or if an engine failure
or generator failure has occurred.
• If you have to use the UHF Radio Backup Control Panel, the C&I switch must be
set to BACKUP.
• During normal operation, you will want to use the regular UHF COM1 and VHF
COM2 radios using the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) / UFC (Up-Front Control)
panel. To do that, the C&I switch must be set to UFC. Audio 1 Control Panel
Controls the primary
communication systems.
C&I (Communication & Identification) switch

• For normal UHF/VHF radio operation, set to UFC.
Audio 2 Control Panel
• For the UHF backup radio to operate, set to BACKUP.
Provides control to the less frequently used 456
communications system.
1
PRESET FREQUENCIES
Take note that the 20 preset frequencies are set in the Mission Editor. To modify 2
VIPER
F-16C
a preset channel:
1. Select COM1 or COM2 button as required (depends on which radio you 3

want to modify)
2. Press the DED Increment/Decrement Switch to select desired Preset
Channel that you want to modify. We will select Preset Channel 3.
3. Press Dobber Switch DOWN three times to select the Preset Channel
Frequency Data Field (asterisks indicate the field is selected).
4. On the ICP, type in the frequency you want to set the preset channel to
(26600 for frequency 266.00 MHz).
5. Press ENTR button to save the frequency to the Preset Channel.
4
5
COM 1 Button COM 2 Button
ENTR Button
Dobber Switch
DED Increment/Decrement Switch 457
PRESET FREQUENCIES
Here’s a cool trick if you intend to operate with preset frequencies and want to switch between preset
VIPER
F-16C
radio channels rapidly. 1
1. Normally, you would be flying with your CNI (Communication, Navigation & Identification) page, which
can be selected by pressing Dobber Switch LEFT (RTN).
2. If you press the Dobber Switch UP/DOWN, you can set the “DED Increment/Decrement arrows” next
to the UHF or VHF data fields.
3. Pressing the DED Increment/Decrement Switch will then allow you to quickly change the Preset
Channel selected.
Take note that this trick only works with Preset Channels. This will not work with manual frequencies.
2b DED Increment/Decrement Arrows
4b
Dobber Switch 1 2a
4a DED Increment/Decrement Switch
458
AN/ARC-164 UHF RADIO (COM1) Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way)
• AFT: transmits on UHF radio ( RALT+\ )
COMPONENTS
VIPER
UHF Radio Antenna

F-16C
Selection Switch
Selected UHF Frequency

COM 1 Button
CNI DED Page
COMM 1 (UHF) Radio Power Knob

Dobber Switch
COMM 1 (UHF) Radio Mode Knob
UHF DED Page OFF / Squelch / Guard Frequency
Selected UHF Frequency Radio Transmission Status (Toggled

with Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ)
Preset Channel Radio Frequency/Channel Input

Data Field
Frequency of Preset Channel 459

NB (Narrow Band) / WB (Wide Band) Selector
4
AN/ARC-164 UHF RADIO (COM1) 5
TUTORIAL (MANUAL FREQUENCY)

VIPER
F-16C
1. Set COMM1 UHF Radio Power/Volume knob – ON (Volume as required)

2. Set COMM1 Radio Mode Switch – SQL (Squelch) 6
3. Set C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and Identification) Switch to UFC
(Upfront Control). This enables control of primary communications, navigation
and identification functions from the upfront controls.
4. Press COM1 button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) 3
5. Set UHF Radio Function as desired using the Dobber Switch Right (SEQ).
7 C&I (Communication & Identification) switch
• MAIN means transmissions are received only on the main UHF receiver.
• BOTH means transmissions are received on both the main and guard
frequency (243.000) receivers.
6. To set manual frequency, enter the frequency on the ICP keypad (25950 for
259.500 Mhz)
7. Press ENTR button to confirm. DED (Data Entry Display) page will automatically
switch back to CNI (Communications, Navigation & Identification) DED page.
8. To transmit on UHF COM 1 radio, press the Communications Transmit Switch AFT 8b
( RALT+\ ). UHF text will be highlighted when transmitting.
Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way) 1
6 • AFT: transmits on UHF radio ( RALT+\ )

8a
2
460
Dobber Switch 5
4
AN/ARC-164 UHF RADIO (COM1) 5
TUTORIAL (PRESET FREQUENCY)

VIPER
F-16C
1. Set COMM1 UHF Radio Power/Volume knob – ON (Volume as required)

2. Set COMM1 Radio Mode Switch – SQL (Squelch)
3. Set C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and Identification) Switch to UFC (Upfront
Control). This enables control of primary communications, navigation and identification
functions from the upfront controls.
4. Press COM1 button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) 6 3
5. Set UHF Radio Function as desired using the Dobber Switch Right (SEQ).
• MAIN means transmissions are received only on the main UHF receiver. 7 • For normal UHF/VHF radio operation, set to UFC.
• BOTH means transmissions are received on both the main and guard frequency
(243.000) receivers.
6. You can check the associated frequency to a preset channel by toggling the channel with the
DED Increment/Decrement Switch. This will NOT tune the radio to this channel; this is 9b
merely used to see the channel’s frequency (i.e. Preset Channel 2 is set to 269.00 MHz).
7. To select preset frequency, enter the frequency on the ICP keypad (“2” for Preset Frequency 8
#2)
8. Press ENTR button to confirm. DED (Data Entry Display) page will automatically switch back
to CNI (Communications, Navigation & Identification) DED page.
9. To transmit on UHF COM 1 radio, press the Communications Transmit Switch AFT ( RALT+\ ).
UHF text will be highlighted when transmitting.
4 7 Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way) 1

9a
8
2
6 461
Dobber Switch 5
AN/ARC-222 VHF RADIO (COM2) Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way)
COMPONENTS
VIPER
F-16C
Selected VHF Frequency

COM 2 Button
CNI DED Page

Dobber Switch
VHF DED Page COMM 2 (VHF) Radio Power Knob
Selected VHF Frequency Radio Transmission Status
Selected Preset Channel Radio Frequency/Channel Input

Data Field COMM 2 (VHF) Radio Mode Knob
OFF / Squelch / Guard Frequency
Frequency of Selected NB (Narrow Band) / WB (Wide Band) Selector
Preset Channel 462
4
AN/ARC-222 VHF RADIO (COM2)
VIPER
F-16C
5
1. Set COMM2 VHF Radio Power/Volume knob – ON (Volume as required)
3. Set C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and Identification) Switch
to UFC (Upfront Control). This enables control of primary
communications, navigation and identification functions from the
upfront controls. 3
4. Press COM2 button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
5. To set manual frequency, enter the frequency on the ICP keypad (12950
for 129.500 Mhz)
6. Press ENTR button to confirm. DED (Data Entry Display) page will 6
automatically switch back to CNI (Communications, Navigation &
Identification) DED page.
7. To transmit on VHF COM 2 radio, press the Communications Transmit
Switch AFT ( RCTRL+\ ). VHF text will be highlighted when transmitting.
7b
4 5
Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way) 1
7a
6
2 463
4
AN/ARC-222 VHF RADIO (COM2)
VIPER
F-16C
1. Set COMM2 VHF Radio Power/Volume knob – ON (Volume as required)

3. Set C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and Identification) Switch
to UFC (Upfront Control). This enables control of primary
communications, navigation and identification functions from the 5
upfront controls. 3
4. Press COM2 button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) 6
5. You can check the associated frequency to a preset channel by toggling
the channel with the DED Increment/Decrement Switch. This will NOT
tune the radio to this channel; this is merely used to see the channel’s
frequency (i.e. Preset Channel 3 is set to 136.00 MHz).
6. To select preset frequency, enter the frequency on the ICP keypad (“3” 8b
for Preset Frequency #3)
7. Press ENTR button to confirm. DED (Data Entry Display) page will
automatically switch back to CNI (Communications, Navigation &
Identification) DED page.

8. To transmit on VHF COM 2 radio, press the Communications Transmit
Switch AFT ( RCTRL+\ ). VHF text will be highlighted when transmitting.
7
4
6 Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way) 1
8a
7
5 2 464
UHF RADIO BACKUP CONTROL Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way)
COMPONENTS
VIPER
F-16C
UHF Radio Preset

UHF Radio Test Frequency Placard
Display Button
UHF Radio Manual
Frequency Indicator
UHF Radio Manual
Frequency Selectors UHF Radio Preset
Channel Indicator
UHF Radio Preset

Channel Selector Knob
UHF Radio Function Knob UHF Radio Status Button

OFF / Main / Both / ADF
(Automatic Direction Finder)
UHF Radio Tone Button

Functions related to anti-jam
UHF Radio Mode Knob C&I (Communication & Identification) switch
frequency hopping
• MNL: Manual Frequency • For normal UHF/VHF radio operation, set to UFC.
• PRESET: Preset Frequency • For the UHF backup radio to operate, set to BACKUP.
UHF Radio Volume Control Knob • GRD: Guard Frequency
465
UHF Radio Squelch Switch
7
UHF RADIO BACKUP CONTROL
VIPER
F-16C
1. Set UHF Radio Backup Function knob – MAIN or BOTH 3

• MAIN means transmissions are received only on
the main UHF receiver. 7
• BOTH means transmissions are received on both
the main and guard frequency (243.000) receivers.
2. Set C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and
Identification) Switch to BACKUP.This allows you to use the
UHF Backup Radio.
3. On CNI (Communication, Navigation & Identification) page,
the “UHF BUP” text shows that the UHF Backup Radio is 8b
ON.
4. Set Volume knob as required
5. Set Squelch switch – ON
6. Set UHF Radio Mode Knob to MNL (Manual Frequency)
7. To tune manual frequency, use UHF Radio Manual
Frequency Selectors 1
4 6
8. To transmit on UHF Backup radio, press the 5
Communications Transmit Switch AFT ( RALT+\ ). UHF text
will be highlighted when transmitting.
8a

466
7 7
UHF RADIO BACKUP CONTROL
VIPER
F-16C
3
1. Set UHF Radio Backup Function knob – MAIN or BOTH
• MAIN means transmissions are received only on the
main UHF receiver.
• BOTH means transmissions are received on both the
main and guard frequency (243.000) receivers.
2. Set C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and
Identification) Switch to BACKUP.This allows you to use the
UHF Backup Radio. 8b
3. On CNI (Communication, Navigation & Identification) page,
the “UHF BUP” text shows that the UHF Backup Radio is ON.
4. Set Volume knob as required
5. Set Squelch switch – ON
6. Set UHF Radio Mode Knob to PRESET
7. To select preset frequency channel, use UHF Radio Preset
Channel knob 6
4 5
8. To transmit on UHF Backup radio, press the Communications 1

Transmit Switch AFT ( RALT+\ ). UHF text will be highlighted
when transmitting.

8a

467
FLCS (FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM)
Like the F/A-18 and the Mirage 2000C, the F-16 is equipped with a fly-by-wire system. Fly-by-wire (FBW) is a system that replaces the conventional manual flight controls of an aircraft with
VIPER
F-16C
an electronic interface. The movements of flight controls are converted to electronic signals transmitted by wires (hence the fly-by-wire term), and flight control computers determine how to move
the actuators at each control surface to provide the ordered response. The fly-by-wire system also allows automatic signals sent by the aircraft's computers to perform functions without the pilot's
input, as in systems that automatically help stabilize the aircraft, or prevent unsafe operation of the aircraft outside of its performance envelope.
PART 15 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & & AUTOPILOT
Flying the F-16 feels different from other fighter jets like the F-15. Control surfaces are controlled by a computer: you merely tell the aircraft what you want it to do.
I highly recommend this article about the F-16’s fly-by-wire system. It is very instructive and quite interesting.
http://www.ausairpower.net/AADR-FBW-CCV.html
FLIGHT COMPUTER
Control Laws will determine how control
surfaces must be moved in order to
reproduce the movement dictated by
pilot input on joystick
Pilot input on joystick Electrical signal sent to

actuators of control surfaces
468
The FLCS (Flight Control System, also nicknamed “Flickiss”) is a digital four-channel system which hydraulically positions control surfaces. The FLCS has a certain level of control over pitch, roll and
VIPER
F-16C
yaw control inputs. Pitch motion is controlled by symmetrical movement of the horizontal tails. Roll motion is controlled by differential movement of the flaperons and horizontal tails. Yaw motion
is controlled by the rudder. Roll coordination is provided by an ARI (Aileron-Rudder Interconnection). The ARI function is not available whenever main landing gear wheel speed exceeds 60 knots or
if the angle of attack exceeds 35 degrees.
Rudder
Leading Edge Flap

(LEF)
Horizontal Tail Stabilator

(Stabiliser/Elevator)
Trailing Edge Flaperon (TEF)

(Flap/Aileron) 469
FLCS OPERATIONAL MODES (GAINS)

VIPER
F-16C
The Flight Control System (FLCS) can use three main operation modes, also called “gains”. These gains will modify
how the fly-by-wire system will move the control surfaces.
• Cruise Gains (Normal Operating Mode)

• Active during normal aircraft flight (landing gear up, no FLCS failure)
• Takeoff & Landing Gains

• Active below 400 kts when landing gear is deployed, or when ALT FLAPS switch is set to EXTEND, or when
the air refueling trap door is open
• Standby Gains
• Active when flight control computer has detected a FLCS failure
***********************************************************************************
GUN COMPENSATION
The FLCS automatically compensates for the off-center gun firing and the gun gas emissions during gun firing by
moving the rudder and flaperons. Gun compensation is optimized for 0.7 – 0.9 Mach. Firing outside of those speeds
may create adverse effects.
***********************************************************************************
LEF (LEADING EDGE FLAPS) and TEF (TRAILING EDGE FLAPS)

Leading Edge Flaps are controlled by the FLCS as a function of Mach Number and Angle of Attack.
Trailing Edge Flaps are controlled by the FLCS as a function of the Landing Gear handle position, ALT FLAPS switch
position and airspeed.
470
The Flight Control Computer takes a number of input parameters in order to calculate adequate movements for your flight control surfaces. FLCS controller gains are scheduled by air data inputs, and
VIPER
F-16C
sideslip angle and rate is calculated based on the Inertial Navigation System (INS) inputs. Here is a simplified representation of the FLCC (Flight Control Computer).
PITCH INPUTS
• Pitch Trim ––> Mechanical Limit
• Horizontal Tail Stick Force
• Angle of Attack
• Pitch Rate LEFT & RIGHT HORIZONTAL TAIL/STABILATOR
• Normal Acceleration
• Impact Pressure
ROLL INPUTS
• Roll Trim ––> Mechanical Limit LEFT & RIGHT FLAPERON
• Aileron Stick Force
• Roll Rate
FLIGHT CONTROL COMPUTER
YAW INPUTS
• Yaw Trim ––> Mechanical Limit
• Rudder Pedal Force RUDDER
• Yaw Rate
• Lateral Acceleration
GUN COMPENSATION INPUT

• Gun Fire
INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM INPUTS

• Angles and Velocities
471
FLCS CONFIGURATION MODES & LIMITERS

VIPER
F-16C
The Flight Control System (FLCS) can use two main configuration modes: CAT I and CAT III.
Depending on the weapon and external fuel tank loadout, the aircraft will automatically detect what CONFIG
setting you should be in. The STORES CONFIG warning indicates that the FLCS Stores Configuration switch is not set
properly.
• CAT I: Air-to-Air configuration, used when Air-to-Air weapons and centreline fuel tank is loaded. STORES CONFIG (Stores Configuration) Switch
• FCS limits aircraft acceleration from -3 G to +9 G until 15 deg AoA (Angle of Attack) is reached. Used to limit FLCS (Flight Control System) gains/limits based on
• Above 15 deg, max G is a function of AoA and airspeed (+7.3 G at 20 deg AoA, +1G at 25 deg AoA) the stores configuration.
• FCS limits max AoA to 25 deg • CAT I: Used for air-to-air loadouts.
• CAT III: Used for heavier air-to-ground loadouts or gas-heavy
• Max rudder deflection starts decreasing around 14 deg AoA, then cannot be deflected at 26 deg AoA configurations. FLCS limits the angle of attack and onset rates
in order to increase departure resistance.
• CAT III: Air-to-Ground configuration, used when air-to-ground weapons are mounted and external wing fuel
tanks are mounted.
• FCS limits aircraft acceleration from -3 G to +9 G until 15 deg AoA (Angle of Attack) is reached.
• FCS limits max AoA to 15.5 - 15.8 deg
• Commanded roll rate is reduced by 40 % of max commanded roll rate in CAT I in order to reduce risks of
roll-coupled departures from flight
• Max rudder deflection starts decreasing at 3 deg AoA, then cannot be deflected at 15 deg AoA
Notes:
• Note 1: the CAT Config switch is not a “G limiter” selector switch per se. It limits Angle of Attack, which in turn
limits maximum attainable G based on a function of AoA and airspeed.
• Note 2: When the landing gear is deployed (during takeoff/landing), the FLCS gains operate as a pitch rate
command system until 10 deg AoA. Above 10 deg AoA, the FLCS operates as a pitch rate/AoA command system.
• Note 3: Above 35 deg AoA, yaw rate limiter provides roll and yaw axis anti-spin control inputs. It also cuts out
stick roll commands. STORES CONFIG Caution
• Note 4: Below -5 deg AoA and less than 170 kts, yaw rate limiter provides anti-spin rudder inputs. STORES CONFIG switch on the gear panel is not in the
correct position for the current loadout.
472
AUTOPILOT
The F-16 has a number of autopilot “relief modes” that assist the pilot in flying the aircraft.
VIPER
F-16C
AUTOPILOT MODES
1. PITCH ATT HOLD: Attitude Hold in the pitch axis. Aircraft will maintain the existing pitch attitude, as long as the attitude is +/- 60 degrees in pitch.
2. ROLL ATT HOLD: Attitude Hold in the roll axis. Aircraft will maintain the existing roll attitude, as long as the attitude is +/- 60 degrees in roll.
3. ALT HOLD: Barometric Altitude Hold. When engaged, aircraft will maintain current barometric altitude
4. HDG SEL: Heading Select. Aircraft will turn to and fly the heading as set on the EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator).
5. STRG SEL: Steering Select. Aircraft will turn to and fly to the active steerpoint. Paddle Switch
Disconnects Autopilot
Take note that pitch and roll modes can be combined together. As an example, you could set STRG SEL and ALT HOLD simultaneously. when depressed
The aircraft would then follow the active steerpoint while maintaining your current altitude.
HDG SEL (Heading Select) Bug

• HDG SEL (Heading Select)
• ATT HOLD (Attitude Hold) Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch
• STRG SEL (Steering to selected steer point in • ALT HOLD (Altitude Hold)
the DED, Data Entry Display) • A/P OFF (Autopilot OFF)
• ATT HOLD (Attitude Hold)
HDG SEL (Heading Select)

Setting Knob 473
AUTOPILOT Digital Backup (DBU) Switch
Allowing the pilot to manually select a
backup software state of the FLCS
AUTOPILOT LIMITS
VIPER
F-16C
The autopilot will automatically disengage if one of the following conditions is met:
• Paddle Switch (on Stick) is pressed

• TRIM A/P Disc Switch is set to DISC
• Landing Gear is DOWN
• Air Refueling Trap Door is open Alternate Flaps
• ALT Flaps (Alternate Flaps) switch is set to EXTEND Extend Switch
• Angle of Attack is greater than 15 deg
• DBU (Digital Backup Flight Control Mode) is engaged
• MPO (Manual Pitch Override) switch is held in OVRD
• Autopilot failure or FLCS failure has occured
• Stall Horn is active
Air Refueling Door Control Switch
Manual Pitch Override Switch

In case of a deep stall departure, the pitch override switch allows you to
command greater authority from the stabs to help get the nose pointed
downhill so you can pick up speed for controlled flight.
Paddle Switch
Trim/AP Disc Switch Overrides Autopilot
• NORM: Stick trims are energized and autopilot is possible when depressed
• DISC: Stick trims and autopilot are inhibited
474
AUTOPILOT
AUTOPILOT ALT HOLD (ALTITUDE HOLD) MODE

VIPER
F-16C
1. Fly at the desired altitude you want to maintain

2. Set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to ALT HOLD. Your current altitude will become
the « reference altitude ».

3. Autopilot will maintain altitude when autopilot was engaged +/- 100 ft.
• Note: Vertical velocity above +2000 ft/min or below -2000 ft/min will
prevent the autopilot from capturing the required altitude.
4. If you want to set a new reference altitude while autopilot is engaged (i.e. the
autopilot is maintaining 10,000 ft and you want to fly to climb and level off at
15,000 ft):
a) Press and hold the Autopilot Paddle switch, and move stick to make the
aircraft climb to desired altitude Paddle Switch
b) Autopilot will be disengaged as long as the Paddle switch is held
c) When new target altitude is reached, release the Autopilot Paddle
switch.
d) Upon release the Paddle switch, the autopilot will take the new actual
altitude as the « reference altitude » and maintain this altitude.
5. To disengage autopilot, set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to A/P OFF. Paddle
Switch can be held to override autopilot.
NOTE: ALT HOLD can be combined with any Autopilot Roll Mode.
Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch

• ALT HOLD (Altitude Hold)
• A/P OFF (Autopilot OFF)
475
AUTOPILOT
AUTOPILOT PITCH ATT HOLD (ATTITUDE HOLD) MODE

VIPER
F-16C
1. Set aircraft in desired pitch attitude

2. Set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to ATT HOLD.
3. Autopilot will maintain current pitch attitude. Angles above 60 deg in pitch will not be captured.
4. While autopilot is engaged, aircraft pitch can be changed with stick input. Any time the stick is moved,
the attitude hold mode will capture this new attitude and maintain it.
5. To disengage autopilot, set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to A/P OFF. Paddle Switch can be held to
override autopilot.
AUTOPILOT ROLL ATT HOLD (ATTITUDE HOLD) MODE

Paddle Switch
1. Set aircraft in desired roll attitude
2. Set Autopilot Roll Mode Switch to ATT HOLD.
3. Autopilot will maintain current roll attitude. Angles above 60 deg in roll will not be captured.
4. While autopilot is engaged, aircraft roll angle can be changed with stick input. Any time the stick is
moved, the attitude hold mode will capture this new attitude and maintain it.
5. To disengage autopilot, set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to A/P OFF. Paddle Switch can be held to
override autopilot.
NOTE: PITCH ATT HOLD and ROLL ATT HOLD can be combined together or with other autopilot modes.
Autopilot Roll Mode Switch Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch

• STRG SEL (Steering to selected steer point in
the DED, Data Entry Display)
476
AUTOPILOT
AUTOPILOT HDG SEL (HEADING SELECT) MODE

VIPER
F-16C
1. Turn the HDG knob on the EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator) and set the Heading Select Bug to the desired heading you want to capture.
2. Set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to either ATT HOLD (Attitude) or ALT HOLD (Altitude Hold), as desired. Without a Pitch mode active, the autopilot will not be able to engage any roll
mode.
3. Set Autopilot Roll Mode Switch to HDG SEL to engage the Heading Select mode.
4. Autopilot will limit bank angle to 45 deg and steer towards the selected heading until it is captured.
5. To disengage autopilot, set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to A/P OFF.
Note: Paddle Switch will not disengage autopilot while in HDG SEL.
HDG SEL (Heading Select) Bug

• STRG SEL (Steering to selected steer point in

HDG SEL (Heading Select) • ATT HOLD (Attitude Hold)
Setting Knob
477
AUTOPILOT STPT (4) Button
AUTOPILOT STRG SEL (STEERING SELECT) MODE

VIPER
F-16C
1. Select steerpoint you want to navigate to. CNI Page

a) CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information) page must
be selected beforehand (Dobber switch pressed LEFT to

RTN) Steerpoint 2 Selected
b) Use DED Increment/Decrement Switch to select desired
steerpoint. We will select Steerpoint 2.
• Alternatively, you can also select a steerpoint by
pressing “STPT (4)” button on the ICP, entering the
Steerpoint Number (i.e. “2” button for Steerpoint 2),
then pressing “ENTR” button.
c) Selected steerpoint will be visible on your HSD (Horizontal
Situation Display) as a white circle
d) Access STPT page by pressing STPT (4) button on the ICP DED Increment/Decrement Dobber Switch
(Integrated Control Panel). Switch
e) Press the Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ) to toggle between
MANUAL and AUTOMATIC Steerpoint Sequencing mode as
desired.
2. Set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to either ATT HOLD (Attitude) or ALT Steerpoint Auto
HOLD (Altitude Hold), as desired. Without a Pitch mode active, the Sequencing
autopilot will not be able to engage any roll mode.
3. Set Autopilot Roll Mode Switch to STRG SEL to engage the Steering
Select mode.
4. Autopilot will limit bank angle to 45 deg and steer towards the
selected steerpoint until it is captured. STPT Page
• AUTOMATIC sequencing means that when reaching the
vicinity of the currently selected steerpoint, the autopilot
STRG SEL mode will steer to the next steerpoint
automatically.
Autopilot Roll Mode Switch • A/P OFF (Autopilot OFF)
• MANUAL sequencing means that when reaching the vicinity
• HDG SEL (Heading Select) • ATT HOLD (Attitude Hold)
of the currently selected steerpoint, the autopilot STRG SEL
mode will circle the steerpoint at a 30 deg bank angle. • ATT HOLD (Attitude Hold)
5. To disengage autopilot, set Autopilot Pitch Mode Switch to A/P OFF. • STRG SEL (Steering to selected steer point in
Note: Paddle Switch will not disengage autopilot while in STRG SEL.
478
NAVIGATION SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 – Navigation Introduction
VIPER
F-16C
• 2 – HSD (Horizontal Situation Display)

• 3 – EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator)
• 4 – Navigation Point Types
• 5 – Steerpoints
• 5.1 – Steerpoint Navigation
• 5.1.1 – Steerpoint Database
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING
• 5.1.2 – Manual vs Auto Sequencing

• 5.1.3 – Steerpoint Navigation Tutorial
• 5.1.4 – Steerpoint Selection via HSD or FCR (Not implemented yet)
• 5.2 – How to Add Steerpoints
• 5.3 – How to Edit Steerpoints
• 6 – Markpoints
• 6.1 – Markpoint Navigation (Not implemented yet)
• 6.2 – How to Add Markpoints (Not implemented yet)
• 7 – TACAN Navigation
• 8 – Bullseye
• 9 – CRUS (Cruise) Page (Not implemented yet)
• 10 – ILS (Instrument Landing System) Tutorial
479
1 – NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION
Navigation in the F-16C is mostly done through the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display), EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator), HUD (Heads-Up Display) and ADI (Attitude Director Indicator)
VIPER
F-16C
localizer & glide slope reference bars. The Standby Magnetic Compass can also be used as a backup. The DED (Data Entry Display) and ICP (Integrated Control Panel) allow you to consult and edit
navigation data. The FCR (Fire Control Radar) page also displays steerpoints. Take note that while TACAN and ILS beacons are supported in the F-16, NDB (Non-Directional Beacons) navigation with an
ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) is not supported.

Magnetic Compass
ADI (Attitude Director Indicator)
EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator) 480

2 – HSD (HORIZONTAL SITUATION DISPLAY)
HSD Main Page
VIPER
F-16C
Range Ring
The HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) is one of the most • Outer Ring: HSD Display Range (Shown: 30 nm)
important tools at your disposal for navigation. • Middle Ring: Two Thirds of HSD Display Range (Shown: 20 nm)
• Inner Ring: One Third of HSD Display Range (Shown: 10 nm)
Selected Steerpoint (White Dot)
The HSD displays a plan-view of your current tactical situation
with the symbols representing your aircraft position (Ownship), Steerpoint (Black Dot)
current steerpoint, active flight plan, and range rings.
Flight Path
HSD Display Range (nm)

Shown: 30 nm
Bullseye Information
• Range from the Bullseye to your own aircraft
• Bearing from the Bullseye to your own aircraft
Ownship Marker
HSD (Horizontal Situation

Display) Page 481
2 – HSD (HORIZONTAL SITUATION DISPLAY) Current zoom level on the HSD
• NORM (normal view)
HSD Main Page • EXP1 (area around your aircraft is expanded
VIPER
F-16C
• EXP2 (area around your aircraft is expanded further)
View Coupled (CPL) or De-coupled (DCPL) from Displays Datalink Message (MSG)
FCR (Fire Control Radar) Range
HSD CNTL (Control) Page
View Position of HSD
• DEP: Depressed (Default)
Position HSD Datalink XMT (Transmit) Option
• CEN: Centered Position • OFF
• L16 (LINK-16)
• IDM (Improved Data Modem)
HSD FZ (Freeze) Function. HSD

will freeze in its current
position, and will not turn with
your aircraft or reposition
itself to keep you centered.
HSD Datalink Contact Filter

• FR ON: All Friendly Contacts
• FL ON: Flight Leaders Only
• FR OFF: Friendly Contacts OFF
Display Declutter (DCLT)

Function. Removes information
from HSD to make it more
readable.
482
HSD CNTL (Control) Page 1
VIPER
F-16C
AIFF: Toggles the display of Advanced IFF (Identify-

Friend-or-Foe) responses from other aircraft.
PRE (Pre-Programmed): Toggles the display of

enemy targets that were programmed into your HSD CNTL (Control) Sub-Page
aircraft's computer before takeoff
FCR: toggles display of the radar scan area and the

"ghost" cursor showing the position of your FCR
(Fire Control Radar) cursor
your navigational route 1. on the HSD (i.e. Forward Line of Troops).
RINGS: Toggles the display of LINE4: Toggles the display of map information line 4
range rings around your on the HSD.
aircraft.
Access to CNTL Page 2
483
HSD CNTL (Control) Page 2
VIPER
F-16C
PDLT RNG (Primary Datalink Track Range): HSD range scale automatically
increases to maintain the PDLT within the HSD Field of View
REF PT: Not Functional

L16 ENG: Not Functional
A TGTS: Toggles the display of air threats/targets A SURV: Toggles the display of surveillance air
uploaded to your computer from data link threats/targets uploaded to your computer from data
link
G TGTS: Toggles the display of ground threats/targets G FRND: Toggles the display of friendly ground units
uploaded to your computer from data link uploaded to your computer from data link
SAM: Toggles the display of SAM (Surface-to-Air LAR: Toggles Launch Acceptable Range
Missile) symbols and threat rings (LAR) Symbology from HSD
SHIP: Toggles the display of Ship symbols uploaded to MP: Not Functional
your computer from data link
A IDM: Not Functional Access to CNTL Page 1
484
HSD & FCR (FIRE CONTROL RADAR) COUPLING
VIPER
F-16C
An interesting feature of the F-16 is how seamlessly integrated the Fire Control Radar page and the Horizontal Situation Display page are. For instance, Datalink symbology and selected
steerpoint information is available on both pages. Also, radar spotlight scan lines are visible on both pages, but in a slightly different form.
You can couple (CPL) or de-couple (DCPL) HSD view from the Fire Control Radar as desired. To toggle the coupling mode, press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to CPL/DCPL. This
coupling feature allows you to change the FCR range, and then automatically scale the HSD accordingly. This way, you do not need to change the scale on each display individually, which
reduces your workload significantly in a target-rich environment.
View Coupled (CPL) or De-coupled (DCPL) from

FCR (Fire Control Radar) Range Radar Spotlight Scan Lines
Datalink Contact (Friendly)
Datalink Contact (Friendly)

Selected Steerpoint Symbol
Selected Steerpoint Symbol
FCR (Fire Control Radar) Page HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) Page
485
3 – EHSI (ELECTRONIC HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR)
The EHSI is your primary gauge to assist in navigation to steerpoints and TACAN beacons. While you will likely be using HUD symbology for most of your navigation purposes, a firm understanding of the
VIPER
F-16C
EHSI is necessary for access to additional navigation data that is not present on the HUD or DED displays, and in case of battle damage.
Current Heading (Lubber Line) Aircraft Symbol Course Setting

Range Indicator (nm)
Course Pointer
Course Deviation Scale
Bearing Pointer
EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator)

Heading Bug
Course Deviation Line
Heading Bug
Setting Knob
EHSI Mode Selector Button Course Setting Knob (when OUT)

Toggles between the following modes: EHSI Brightness Control Knob (when pressed IN)
• NAV: Navigation Scroll mousewheel to turn knob, left click to press in.
• PLS/NAV: Precision Landing System (ILS) / Navigation
• TCN: TACAN
• PLS/TCN: Precision Landing System (ILS) / TACAN
EHSI Mode Selected 486
4 – NAVIGATION POINT TYPES
Flight Plan Steerpoints
These are the available Navigation Point types used in the F-16:
VIPER
F-16C
• Steerpoints
• Steerpoints (or Waypoints) are pre-planned navigational points
of reference for you to follow on route to your area of operation.
You can create new ones, edit their coordinates and create flight
plans with them.
• Markpoints
• Markpoints are used to "mark" a point of interest, whether flying
over an interesting area or an enemy sighting.
• Anchor Point / Bullseye

• Also referred to as a “Bullseye”, an anchor point serves as a
common geographic reference for a mission amongst friendly
forces.
Bullseye
You
Selected Steerpoint
487
5 – STEERPOINTS
5.1 – Steerpoint Navigation
VIPER
5.1.1 – Steerpoint Database

F-16C
LIST Button
The F-16 can store up to 99 steerpoints. However, certain steerpoint numbers have a specific use (see Steerpoint
Database table).
INS (Inertial Navigation System) related DED (Data Entry Display) pages include:
• The STPT (Steerpoint) page, which gives the pilot information about the INS steerpoint. It allows you to edit
steerpoint coordinates.
• Access this page by pressing STPT (4) button on the ICP (CNI page must be selected beforehand with Dobber Switch
the Dobber switch pressed LEFT to RTN).
• The DEST (Destination) page, which is similar to the STPT page. However, you can change any steerpoint
coordinates without affecting the HSD. STPT DED Page
• Access DEST DIR page by pressing LIST button, then “1” button on the ICP.
• DIR page is selected first. OA1/2 sub-page is used to create Offset Aimpoints and is accessed from
DEST DIR page by selecting Dobber switch RIGHT (SEQ).
• The BULLSEYE page, which gives you information about the steerpoint selected for the Bullseye (Anchor Point).
• Access this page by pressing LIST button, then “0” button on the ICP (MISC page), then “8” to select
BULL menu.
STEERPOINT DATABASE
DEST DIR DED Page DEST OA1/2 DED Page
Steerpoint # Function DEST OA1 * 1*
DEST DIR * 2*
1 to 24 Reserved for Navigation Route / general flight planning LAT N 42° 17.602’
LNG E 042° 42.696’ Dobber RIGHT RNG 360000 FT
25 Reserved for Bullseye (automatically assigned) BRG * 120,0° *
ELEV 4494FT (SEQ)
26 to 30 Reserved for Ownship Markpoints TOS 09 : 45 : 55 ELEV 4494FT
31 to 54 Reserved for HSD lines (4 lines with up to 6 points in each line)
BULLSEYE DED Page
56 to 70 Reserved for Pre-planned threats
BULLSEYE
71 to 80 Reserved for Datalink Markpoints
BULL *25*
81 to 89 Open (not used, but available to store coordinates as desired by the pilot)
90 to 99 Used for AGM-84 HARPOON Anti-Ship Missiles in certain F-16 Blocks, but in the Block 50
these steerpoints are open (not used, but available to store coordinates as desired by the 488
pilot).
Selected Steerpoint
5 – STEERPOINTS
VIPER
5.1.2 – Manual vs Auto Sequencing

F-16C
CNI DED Page

When following a flight plan and reaching the steerpoint you have currently selected,
“sequencing” modes determine whether you need to manually select the next steerpoint
with the DED Increment/Decrement Switch (MAN Sequencing) or if the navigation STPT (4) Button
computer will automatically select the next steerpoint in your flight plan (AUTO
Sequencing).
To select Automatic or Manual Steerpoint Sequencing:
1. CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information) page must be selected beforehand

(Dobber switch pressed LEFT to RTN)
2. Access STPT page by pressing STPT (4) button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel).
3. Press the Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ) to toggle between MANUAL and AUTOMATIC
Steerpoint Sequencing modes.
Dobber Switch
STPT DED Page STPT DED Page

Manual Steerpoint Sequencing Automatic Steerpoint Sequencing
Selected Steerpoint
You
489
3
5 – STEERPOINTS
VIPER
5.1.3 – Navigation Tutorial

F-16C
1. Select CNI (Communication, Navigation &

Information) page by setting Dobber switch
LEFT (RTN) 4a
2. Use DED Increment/Decrement Switch to
select desired steerpoint. We will select Selected Steerpoint
Steerpoint 2.
• Alternatively, you can also select a

steerpoint by pressing “STPT (4)”
button on the ICP, entering the
Steerpoint Number (i.e. “2” button
for Steerpoint 2), then pressing
“ENTR” button. 1 5a Dobber Switch
3. Selected steerpoint will be visible on your 2 4b
HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) as a white
circle DED Increment/Decrement Switch You
4. If you want to see steerpoint 2 coordinates,
access STPT page by pressing STPT (4) button
on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel). Then,
use DED Increment/Decrement Switch to
select steerpoint 2.
5. Select Manual or Automatic Sequencing as
desired. This is done by setting Dobber 2
switch RIGHT (SEQ)
Steerpoint 2 Selected 4b
1 4a 5b
Elevation (ft)
TOS (Time Over Steerpoint)
490
Steerpoint Tadpole
5 – STEERPOINTS Line points towards steerpoint (UP = In Front of You / DOWN = Behind You).
Steerpoint is in front of us to our left.
Steerpoint Diamond
VIPER

F-16C
Crossed-out diamond indicates STPT is out of the HUD’s

field of view. Steerpoint is in front of us to our left.
6. Set EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator) Navigation Mode to NAV by pressing the “M” (EHSI
Mode Selector) button to toggle between modes.
7. If you want to intercept the steerpoint from a specific direction, set desired course using the CRS knob. In
our case, we will leave the intercept course to 000.
8. Verify that NAV Master Mode is selected on the Heads-Up Display (HUD). If either A-A or A-G mode is
selected, pressing their respective ICP button will revert the master mode back to NAV.
9. Direction and range to the Steerpoint are indicated on the HUD. Consult Diamond and Tadpole symbols.
10. Direction and range to the Steerpoint are indicated on the EHSI as well.
Direction to Steerpoint

B: Range computed using steerpoint elevation/barometric elevation
7
TTG (Time to Go)
A-G Master Mode ICP Button
A-A Master Mode ICP Button
Distance to Steerpoint 491

(nm) 6
5 – STEERPOINTS Steerpoint Tadpole
Line points towards steerpoint (UP = In Front of You / DOWN = Behind You).
5.1 – Steerpoint Navigation Steerpoint is in front of us.
VIPER

F-16C
FPM (Flight Path Marker)

11. Fly towards selected steerpoint by aligning the Steerpoint Tadpole with the FPM (Flight Path Marker).
When flying towards the steerpoint, the tadpole should be pointing up and be centered.
Steerpoint Diamond
Diamond indicates STPT is within the HUD’s
field of view. Steerpoint is in front of us.
Selected Steerpoint
492
5 – STEERPOINTS
VIPER

F-16C
Steerpoint Tadpole Representation
Tadpole pointing to Steerpoint 1 Tadpole pointing to Steerpoint 2 Tadpole pointing to Steerpoint 3

STPT 3
STPT 2
STPT 6
STPT 1
Tadpole pointing to Steerpoint 4 Tadpole pointing to Steerpoint 5 Tadpole pointing to Steerpoint 6
You
STPT 4
STPT 5
493
5 – STEERPOINTS
VIPER
5.1.4 – Steerpoint Selection via HSD or FCR

F-16C
As of 2020/04/27, Steerpoints cannot be selected with the FCR (Fire Control

Radar) page or with the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) page in the DCS F-16.
494
5 – STEERPOINTS
5.2 – How To Add Steerpoints
VIPER
F-16C
Take note that the F-16 takes coordinates in Degrees, minutes, decimal minutes. By default, map coordinates are given in Degrees,
minutes, seconds. To change coordinate format on the F10 map, use “LALT+Y”.
1. We will add the coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) for Groom Lake AFB:
• 37°13’08’’ North 115°47’07’’ West (Deg, minutes, seconds)
• 37°13.133’ North 115°47.116’ West (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes)
• Elevation 4494 ft
2. Our current flight plan has four steerpoints. We will add a fifth one (STPT #5).
3. Select CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information) page by setting Dobber switch LEFT (RTN)
4
4
Groom Lake AFB Location
495
5 – STEERPOINTS
5.2 – How To Add Steerpoints 5
VIPER
F-16C
• Coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) for Groom Lake AFB: 6

5. Select Steerpoint by entering the Steerpoint Number (i.e. “5” button for
Steerpoint 5), then pressing “ENTR” button. Alternatively, you can also use DED
Increment/Decrement Switch to select steerpoint 5.
6. Press the Dobber Switch DOWN to select the LAT (LATITUDE) field. The “*” 7 9
symbols next to LAT indicate that the LATITUDE field is selected.
7. If coordinate latitude is North, press “2” (N) on the ICP. If coordinate latitude is
South, press “8” (S).
8. Enter the latitude of the new steerpoint using the ICP keypad (3713133).
9. Press “ENTR” button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to enter/confirm
10. Press the Dobber Switch DOWN to select the LNG (LONGITUDE) field. The “*”
symbols next to LNG indicate that the LONGITUDE field is selected.
11. If coordinate longitude is West, press “4” (W) on the ICP. If coordinate 13
11
longitude is East, press “6” (E).
12. Enter the longitude of the new steerpoint using the ICP keypad (11547116).
ENTR Button

Dobber Switch 496
5 – STEERPOINTS
5.2 – How To Add Steerpoints
VIPER
17
F-16C
16
• Coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) for Groom Lake AFB:
14. Press the Dobber Switch DOWN to select the ELEV (Elevation) field. The “ * ”
symbols next to ELEV indicate that the ELEVATION field is selected.
15. If steerpoint elevation is negative, press “0 M-SEL” (-) on the ICP. Otherwise,
no action is required.
16. Enter the elevation of the new steerpoint using the ICP keypad (4494).
ELEVATION (in feet).
18. New steerpoint #5 should now be visible and selected on your HUD and HSD.
ENTR Button Steerpoint #5

(newly created)
0 M-SEL
Button
Dobber Switch 497

4
5 – STEERPOINTS
5.3 – How To Edit Steerpoints
VIPER
F-16C
1. We will edit the coordinates of an existing Steerpoint 5 (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) to the coordinates for
Groom Lake AFB, which are:
2. Our current flight plan has five steerpoints. We will edit the fifth one (STPT #5).
3. Select CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information) page by setting Dobber switch LEFT (RTN) 5
5. Select Steerpoint 5 (the one that we want to edit) by entering the Steerpoint Number (i.e. “5” button for
Steerpoint 5), then pressing “ENTR” button. Alternatively, you can also use DED Increment/Decrement Switch to
select steerpoint 5.
Steerpoint 5
(To be edited)
498
5
5 – STEERPOINTS
VIPER
F-16C
• Coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) for Groom Lake AFB: 6

6. Press the Dobber Switch DOWN to select the LAT (LATITUDE) field. The “*”
symbols next to LAT indicate that the LATITUDE field is selected.
7. If coordinate latitude is North, press “2” (N) on the ICP. If coordinate latitude is
South, press “8” (S). 7 9

8. Enter the new latitude of the existing steerpoint using the ICP keypad
(3713133).
10. Press the Dobber Switch DOWN to select the LNG (LONGITUDE) field. The “*”
symbols next to LNG indicate that the LONGITUDE field is selected.
11. If coordinate longitude is West, press “4” (W) on the ICP. If coordinate
longitude is East, press “6” (E).
12. Enter the new longitude of the existing steerpoint using the ICP keypad 11 13
(11547116).
ENTR Button

Dobber Switch 499
5 – STEERPOINTS
VIPER
17
F-16C
16
• Coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) for Groom Lake AFB:
14. Press the Dobber Switch DOWN to select the ELEV (Elevation) field. The “*”
symbols next to LAT indicate that the ELEVATION field is selected.
15. If steerpoint elevation is negative, press “0 M-SEL” (-) on the ICP. Otherwise,
no action is required.
16. Enter the new elevation of the existing steerpoint using the ICP keypad (4494).
ELEVATION (in feet).
18. Steerpoint #5 should now have its coordinates updated and its new location
will be reflected on your HUD and HSD.
ENTR Button Steerpoint #5

(with new coordinates)
0 M-SEL
Button
Dobber Switch 500

6 – MARKPOINTS
VIPER
6.1 – Markpoint Navigation STEERPOINT DATABASE
Steerpoint # Function
F-16C
In order to navigate to a markpoint, the method is almost

identical to navigating to a steerpoint. Why? Because 26 to 30 Reserved for Ownship Markpoints
markpoints are stored in Steerpoints 26 to 30, therefore you
will have to access them the same way you would access any
other steerpoint.
In this tutorial, we will assume a markpoint has already been 3a

created (Steerpoint #26).
1. Select CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information)

page by setting Dobber switch LEFT (RTN)
2. Use DED Increment/Decrement Switch to select desired
steerpoint. We will select Steerpoint 26.
• Alternatively, you can also select a steerpoint by
pressing “STPT (4)” button on the ICP, entering
the Steerpoint Number (i.e. “2” and “6” buttons 1 Dobber Switch
for Steerpoint 26), then pressing “ENTR” button.
3. If you want to see steerpoint 26 coordinates, access STPT 2 3b
page by pressing STPT (4) button on the ICP (Integrated
Control Panel). Then, use DED Increment/Decrement
Switch to select steerpoint 26.
3b
2
4a
1
Elevation (ft)
501
Steerpoint Tadpole
6 – MARKPOINTS Line points towards steerpoint (UP = In Front of You / DOWN = Behind You).
Steerpoint is in front of us to our left.
6.1 – Markpoint Navigation
VIPER
F-16C
4. Set EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator) Navigation Mode to NAV by

pressing the “M” (EHSI Mode Selector) button to toggle between modes.
5. If you want to intercept the steerpoint from a specific direction, set desired course Steerpoint Diamond
using the CRS knob. In our case, we will leave the intercept course to 000. Crossed-out diamond indicates STPT is
6. Verify that NAV Master Mode is selected on the Heads-Up Display (HUD). If either A-A out of the HUD’s field of view.
or A-G mode is selected, pressing their respective ICP button will revert the master Steerpoint (Markpoint) is in front of us
mode back to NAV. to our left.
7. Direction and range to the Steerpoint are indicated on the HUD. Consult Diamond and
Tadpole symbols.
8. Direction and range to the Steerpoint are indicated on the EHSI as well.

B: Range computed using steerpoint elevation/barometric elevation
5 TTG (Time to Go)
A-G Master Mode ICP Button
A-A Master Mode ICP Button
Distance to Steerpoint
(nm) 502
4
Steerpoint Tadpole
6 – MARKPOINTS Line points towards steerpoint (UP = In Front of You / DOWN = Behind You).
Steerpoint is in front of us.
6.1 – Markpoint Navigation FPM (Flight Path Marker)
VIPER
F-16C
9. Fly towards selected steerpoint (markpoint) by

aligning the Steerpoint Tadpole with the FPM
(Flight Path Marker). When flying towards the
steerpoint, the tadpole should be pointing up
and be centered.
Steerpoint Diamond
Diamond indicates STPT is within the HUD’s
field of view. Steerpoint (Markpoint) is in

front of us.
(Markpoint)
503
MARK Page – FCR Sub-Page CNI DED Page
6 – MARKPOINTS MARK * FCR *
6.2 – How to Add Markpoints MKPT 26
LAT N 37° 13.133’
VIPER
F-16C
LNG W 115° 47.116’

You must access the MARK (Markpoint) DED (Data Entry ELEV 4494FT
Display) page to create a Markpoint:
a) Select CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information) page by setting Dobber MARK Page – TGP Sub-Page
switch LEFT (RTN)
b) Press MARK (7) button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel). MARK * TGP *
c) Toggle the Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ) to cycle through Markpoint Designation modes MKPT 27
(FCR, TGP, HUD and OFLY) LAT N 37° 13.133’
LNG W 115° 47.116’
There are four main methods to create markpoints: ELEV 4494FT Master Mode Buttons
FCR (Fire Control Radar) Designated Markpoint MARK Page – HUD Sub-Page
• If Master Mode is either NAV or A-G, the FCR page is SOI (Sensor of Interest,
performed with DMS DOWN), entering the MARK page will default to MARK FCR. The MARK * HUD *
first markpoint will remain blank. MKPT 28
• Designate the target by slewing the FCR Reticle on the FCR page with the Radar LAT N 37° 13.133’
Cursor/Enable Switch, then create markpoint by pressing TMS UP LNG W 115° 47.116’
ELEV 4494FT
TGP (Targeting Pod) Designated Markpoint
• If Master Mode is either NAV or A-G, the TGP page is SOI (Sensor of Interest,
performed with DMS DOWN), entering the MARK page will default to MARK TGP. The MARK Page – OFLY Sub-Page
first markpoint will remain blank. MARK (7) Button Dobber Switch
MARK * OFLY *
• Designate the target by slewing the Targeting Pod Reticle on the TGP page with the
Radar Cursor/Enable Switch, then create markpoint by pressing TMS UP
MKPT 29
LAT N 37° 13.133’ Radar Cursor/Enable Switch
HUD (Heads-Up Display) Designated Markpoint LNG W 115° 47.116’
• If Master Mode is either NAV or A-G… and neither the FCR page nor the TGP page is ELEV 4494FT
SOI (Sensor of Interest, performed with DMS UP), entering the MARK page will default
to MARK HUD. The first markpoint will remain blank.
• Designate the target by slewing the HMC (HUD Mark Cue circle) on the Heads-Up
Display with the Radar Cursor/Enable Switch. After, press TMS UP to ground stabilise
the HMC. Then, create markpoint by pressing TMS UP
DMS (Display
OFLY (Overfly) Designated Markpoint Management Switch)
• If Master mode is A-A, entering the MARK page will default to MARK OFLY. Upon A-A
Master Mode selection, a markpoint will automatically be created.
TMS (Target 504
Management Switch)
MARK Page – FCR Sub-Page As of 2020/04/27, Markpoints cannot be
6 – MARKPOINTS created yet in the DCS F-16.
MARK * FCR *
6.2 – How to Add Markpoints MKPT 26
LAT N 37° 13.133’
VIPER
F-16C
Here is an overview of the Markpoint sub-mode logic. LNG W 115° 47.116’

ELEV 4494FT
A-G (Air-to-Ground) or NAV Master Mode Selected A-A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode Selected
MARK Page – TGP Sub-Page
MARK * TGP *
MKPT 27
LAT N 37° 13.133’
A-G FCR is SOI and TGP is SOI and TGP All Other Cases
FCR is designating is ground stabilised

LNG W 115° 47.116’
ELEV 4494FT
MARK Page – HUD Sub-Page
MARK * HUD *
FCR MARKPOINT TGP MARKPOINT HUD MARKPOINT OFLY MARKPOINT MKPT 28
(Manual, TMS UP) (Manual, TMS UP) (Manual, TMS UP x 2) (Automatic, upon A-A Master Mode Selection)
LAT N 37° 13.133’
LNG W 115° 47.116’
ELEV 4494FT
MARK Page – OFLY Sub-Page
Master Mode MARK * OFLY *

MKPT 29
LAT N 37° 13.133’
LNG W 115° 47.116’
ELEV 4494FT
Notes:
• Markpoints are visible on the HSD page once created as a cyan cross.
• If previous automatic markpoints were recorded, the markpoint rotary will
increment and the next available steerpoint in the MARK bank will be selected.
• Ownship markpoints are stored in steerpoint 26 to 30. Once #30 is filled, the next
markpoint will overwrite #26 and so on.
Master Mode Buttons 505

7 – TACAN NAVIGATION
TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) stations are navigation aids typically
VIPER
F-16C
used by the military and provide you directional and distance guidance. You are here
TACAN beacons can be installed on airdromes, air refueling tankers or
even aircraft carriers. Many VOR stations are collocated with a TACAN.
These stations broadcast both signals so they can be used by military
and/or civilian aircraft. These stations are known as “VORTACS”.
1. We will track Kutaisi’s TACAN 44X.

2. Set MIDS LVT (Multifunctional Information Distribution System) LVT KTS TACAN
1
(Low Volume Terminal) knob on the Avionics Power Panel to the ON 44X
position.
• Take note that the TACAN is part of the MIDS radio system
3. Adjust TACAN audio tone volume as required.
4. Select CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information) page by
setting Dobber switch LEFT (RTN)
5. Press T-ILS (1) Button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to access
TACAN-ILS DED (Data Entry Display) menu.
5a 4b
2
5b
4a 506
7 – TACAN NAVIGATION 6b
6. Press Dobber Switch DOWN to highlight the CHAN field. Use the ICP
VIPER
F-16C
keypad to type in the new channel (44). Press ENTR to accept the
changes.
7. If required, you may change the band by selecting the M-SEL (0)
button on the ICP, then pressing ENTR. This toggles the band
between X and Y.
8. Toggle the Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ) to cycle through TACAN 7b
modes until TCN T/R (Transmit-Receive) is selected.
9. The navigation will identify TACAN beacon as beacon KTS, a TACAN 6c
station at Kutaisi. 6d
10. Press Dobber Switch LEFT (RTN) to return to CNI (Communication,
Navigation & Identification) DED menu. The selected TACAN station
will be displayed on it.
7a
11. On the EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator), press “M”
(Mode Selector) button to select “TCN” mode. This will slave the
EHSI to the TACAN beacon.
12. Set the desired course to the TACAN using the EHSI CRS Course 6a 8a 10a
Select knob (068)
8b
TACAN OPERATION MODES:

• REC: Your TACAN operates in receive mode only and provides bearing,
course deviation, and station identification. 12
• T/R: The TACAN acts in a transceiver mode (send and receive) and
provides bearing, range, deviation and station identification. This will be
your most common selection.
• A/A REC: TACAN operates in Air-to-Air mode and can only receive
bearing, course deviation and station identification for a TACAN-
equipped aircraft.
• A/A T/R: TACAN operates in Air-to-Air transceiver mode and provides
bearing, range, deviation, and station identification with a TACAN- 10b 507
equipped aircraft. 11
Current Heading (Lubber Line)
7 – TACAN NAVIGATION
Bearing Pointer
Aircraft Symbol
13. After a few seconds, the EHSI will display DME (Distance Measuring
VIPER
F-16C
Equipment) distance to the TACAN in nautical miles. Course Setting

14. Steer the aircraft towards the TACAN CDI (Course Deviation
Indicator) Reference Line. As you approach the radial, the line
deviation with the centerline of the EHSI will gradually diminish. Range Indicator (nm)
15. The direction of the TACAN beacon will be displayed by the Bearing
Pointer.
16. CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) will indicate how far off the TACAN Course Pointer
radial course (068) you are.
17. The To / From Indicator (White Triangle) will indicate whether you
are heading towards the radial or away from it. To / From Indicator
18. When CDI Reference line is centered, this means you are on the 068
radial.
19. Then, turn towards the TACAN Bearing Pointer (or Course Pointer)
to follow the radial to the runway.
Course Deviation Scale
Course Deviation Line
EHSI (Electronic Horizontal

Situation Indicator)
EHSI Mode Selector Button

Toggles between the following modes: EHSI Mode Selected
• NAV: Navigation
• PLS/NAV: Precision Landing System (ILS) / Navigation Course Setting Knob (when OUT)
• TCN: TACAN
EHSI Brightness Control Knob (when
• PLS/TCN: Precision Landing System (ILS) / TACAN
pressed IN)
Scroll mousewheel to turn knob, left click to
press in.
508
VIPER
F-16C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING 7 – TACAN NAVIGATION
a b c d
b
a
d
c
KTS TACAN
Channel 44X
509
8 – BULLSEYE
A “Bullseye” or “Anchor Point” is a fictional point in space that serves as a common geographic reference for a mission amongst friendly forces. If you know where the bullseye is and the enemy doesn’t,
VIPER
F-16C
it gives you a way to communicate positions without the enemy knowing where to look from. Your wingmen and AWACS will often refer to “bulls” or “bullseye” on the radio. A bullseye call, used to
communicate your position, is done in the following format:
• Bearing from bullseye

• Range from bullseye
• Altitude
Bullseye Explanation by JediLinks: https://youtu.be/vgcXcfeGb2M

Bullseye / Anchor Point
(Set on Waypoint 2)
Bullseye, 17 nm
Bearing 180 from
Hornet 411
Hornet 421
You
510
8 – BULLSEYE
FCR Page
Bearing and range from the Bullseye to your aircraft is displayed in three places: the Heads-Up Display, the FCR (Fire Control
VIPER
F-16C
Radar) page and the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) page.
HUD
Arrow points towards Bullseye

Distance from
Bullseye to Aircraft
(nm)
to Aircraft
HSD Page
Bearing from Bullseye Bullseye Symbol

to Aircraft
Distance from Bullseye Arrow points towards Bullseye

to Aircraft (nm)
Distance from Bullseye
to Aircraft (nm)

to Aircraft 511
8 – BULLSEYE
In this example, we are at a bearing of 70 degrees from the bullseye: the reciprocal of that is 70 + 180 = 250 degrees. Since
VIPER
F-16C
we are on a heading of 227 degrees, in the example we subtract 250 - 227 to get the 23 degrees we would have to turn in
West to get to the bullseye.
Arrow points
towards Bullseye
Distance from Bullseye

to Aircraft (nm)
Bullseye Symbol
Bullseye Symbol
Ownship Symbol
Ownship
Heading: 227

to Aircraft
512
8 – BULLSEYE BULLSEYE
BULL *25*
Take note that the DED (Data Entry Display) LIST – MISC – BULL page is not yet available. This page allows you to select a
VIPER
F-16C
particular Steerpoint to be used as a Bullseye. As of 2020-04-24, the Bullseye is set through the Mission Editor.
513
As of 2020/04/27, CRUS Page is not yet
9 – CRUS (CRUISE) PAGE CNI DED Page implemented.
The CRUS (Cruise) DED (Data Entry Display) page provides you valuable navigation information while cruising.
VIPER
F-16C
This page is selected by:

1. Selecting CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information) page by setting Dobber switch LEFT
(RTN)
2. Pressing CRUS (5) Button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) will select the TOS (Time Over
Steerpoint) sub-page by default.
CRUS Page – TOS Sub-Page
The CRUS page has four sub-modes, which can be toggled by using the Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ):
• TOS (Time Over Steerpoint) CRUS *TOS* 5
• RNG (Range)
SYSTEM 10:30:31
• HOME DES TOS 10:32:00
• EDR (Endurance) ETA 10:51:36
RQD G/S 255KTS
Note: When toggling from one submode to another, you must always use the M-SEL (0) Button, which will
“mode select” the new CRUS mode. If you don’t do so, the computed airspeed/altitude caret(s) may be CRUS Page – RNG Sub-Page
computed from the previous CRUS submode.
CRUS *RNG*
STPT 4
FUEL 4259LBS
WIND 298° 10KTS
CRUS Page – HOME Sub-Page

CRUS *HOME*
HMPT 4
FUEL 4259LBS
OPT ALT 42,952FT
WIND 300° 12KTS
CRUS (5) Button

CRUS Page – EDR Sub-Page
CRUS *EDR*
STPT 6
TO BNGO 04:32:05
M-SEL (0) Button OPT MACH 0,33
WIND 304° 13KTS 514
Dobber Switch
9 – CRUS (CRUISE) PAGE
• TOS (Time Over Steerpoint): This will provide you airspeed information (Airspeed Caret on
VIPER
F-16C
HUD speed tape) to ensure that you reach selected steerpoint at the required TOS (Time Over CRUS Page – TOS Sub-Page Selected Steerpoint
Steerpoint) set for the mission.
CRUS *TOS* 5 System Time
SYSTEM 10:30:31
• RNG (Range): An Airspeed caret is displayed on the HUD speed tape to pinpoint the optimal Destination Time Over Steerpoint (DES TOS)
DES TOS 10:32:00
speed to best conserve fuel at this altitude.
ETA 10:51:36
RQD G/S 255KTS Estimated Time of Arrival
• HOME: Two carets are displayed in the HUD on the speed tape and on the altitude tape.
Following the computed Airspeed Caret and Altitude Caret will establish the best profile to Required ground speed to get at DES TOS
reach Home Plate (or any steerpoint designated as HMPT). CRUS Page – RNG Sub-Page
CRUS *RNG* Selected Steerpoint

• EDR (Endurance): An Airspeed caret is displayed on the HUD speed tape to pinpoint the
optimal speed for best endurance at this altitude. Endurance is the maximum length of time STPT 4
FUEL 4259LBS Fuel remaining when reaching selected steerpoint
that an aircraft can spend in cruising flight.
Wind Direction and Speed (kts)
WIND 298° 10KTS
CRUS Page – HOME Sub-Page

Selected Steerpoint designated as Home Plate (Home base)
CRUS *HOME*
Fuel remaining when reaching Home Plate
HMPT 4
FUEL 4259LBS
Optimal Altitude (ft)
OPT ALT 42,952FT
Airspeed Caret
WIND 300° 12KTS
Altitude Caret
CRUS Page – EDR Sub-Page Selected Steerpoint
CRUS *EDR*
Time To Bingo (Time until fuel level is low enough
STPT 6 to require you to head back to base)
TO BNGO 04:32:05
OPT MACH 0,33
WIND 304° 13KTS Optimal Mach Number for maximum endurance
515
10 – ILS TUTORIAL
Our ILS (Instrument Landing Approach) will be done to Batumi airfield.
VIPER
F-16C
• ILS frequency: 110.30

• Runway heading: 120 Magnetic Heading / 126 True Heading
• Radio tower frequency: 131.000
516
3b
1a
10 – ILS TUTORIAL
1. Set Radar Altimeter Switch ON (FWD) and adjust ILS audio tone volume
VIPER
F-16C
as required.
2. Select CNI (Communication, Navigation & Information) page by setting
Dobber switch LEFT (RTN)
3. Press T-ILS (1) Button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to access
TACAN-ILS DED (Data Entry Display) menu.
4. Press Dobber Switch DOWN until the ILS FRQ field is highlighted. Use
the ICP keypad to type in the new channel (“11030” for 110.30). Press
ENTR to accept the changes. 4b
5. CMD STRG (Command Steering) is highlighted when the ILS signal is

being received.
6. Once CMD STRG is highlighted, the CRS (Course) field will automatically
be selected. Set the desired course to 120 (runway magnetic heading)
by pressing “120” on the ICP, then press ENTR to accept the changes.
4c
1b
4c
2b
3a
5
4d
4d
2a 4a 6a 517 6b
If the horizontal glide slope bar is above the center of the FPM
10 – ILS TUTORIAL Glide Slope Deviation Indicator (Flight Path Marker), it indicates that you are below glide slope
and you need to increase altitude. The vertical localizer bar
Glide Slope Steering Bar indicates if you are left or right of runway alignment. If the bar is
7. On the EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator),
VIPER
F-16C
right of FPM center, fly to the right to center it. For a proper glide
press “M” (Mode Selector) button until the “PLS/NAV”
slope approach, you want the two bars centered and forming a
(Precision Landing System/Navigation) mode is selected.
perfect cross on the FPM (aka “center the bars”).
This will slave the EHSI to the ILS station signal.
8. Verify that NAV Master Mode is selected on the Heads-
Up Display (HUD). If either A-A or A-G mode is selected, Glide Slope Steering Bar
pressing their respective ICP button will revert the Localizer Steering Bar
master mode back to NAV.
9. Align yourself with the runway using the following tools:
a) EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator)

Bearing Pointer
b) CDI (Course Deviation Indicator)
c) ADI (Attitude Director Indicator) Localizer
Steering Bar Localizer Steering Bar
d) HUD (Heads-Up Display) Localizer Steering Bar
10. Once you are close enough to the ILS, the Glide Slope
Fail Flag will disappear and provide you guidance in the Bearing Pointer Selected Course
vertical plane to perform an approach with 3 degrees of Distance to ILS (nm)
glide slope.
Flight Path Marker
11. Fly the aircraft to the glide slope by use the Glide Slope
Steering bar and Glide Slope Deviation Indicator. Both
should be centered. On the HUD, the localizer and Glide
Slope bars should form a perfect cross with the Flight
Path Marker in the center of this cross.
Glide Slope Fail Flag
NAV Master Mode
Course Deviation
Indicator
A-A & A-G Master Mode ICP Buttons

7 518
10 – ILS TUTORIAL Command Steering Symbol “Tic Mark” Glide Slope Steering Bar
12. When valid localizer data is received, a Command Steering

VIPER
F-16C
Symbol will be displayed on the HUD to guide you through Localizer Steering Bar
12
the approach (circle). A tic mark appears on the symbol
when nearing the center of the glideslope to indicate the
pitch steering data is valid. Command Steering Symbol
13. When you have captured the ILS localizer (no lateral
deviation from runway axis) and captured the glide slope
as well, deploy landing gear. The “E” bracket (HUD AoA
Bracket) will appear upon landing gear deployment.
14. Turn on LANDING light (UP). Glide Slope Steering Bar

15. Deploy Speed Brake Localizer Steering Bar
Flight Path Marker
Localizer Captured
On Glide Slope
15
Landing Gear Deployed
14
HUD AOA Bracket

Speed Brake Deployed (“E” Bracket)
13
519
10 – ILS TUTORIAL
16. Trim to an angle of attack (AOA) of 11 deg. Angle of Attack can be
VIPER
F-16C
monitored with the three following indications:

• The AOA Indicator
• The AOA Indexer
• The HUD (Heads-Up Display) AOA Bracket (with Flight
Path Marker)
HUD AOA Bracket

AOA Indexer
(“E” Bracket)
AOA Indicator (deg)
520
10 – ILS TUTORIAL
17. When flying over the “overrun” (portion of the runway before the primary surface starts), shift the Flight Path
VIPER
F-16C
Marker forward to a point 300-500 ft down the runway.

18. Gently pull back on the stick to flare and reduce the descent rate. DO NOT level off!
19. Pull the throttle back to IDLE and touchdown with a maximum AOA of 13 deg (green circle). More than 15 deg
AOA during the landing roll-out may cause the speedbrakes or engine nozzle to smash the runway.
521
10 – ILS TUTORIAL
20. Maintain 13 deg nose-up attitude for a two-point aerodynamic braking until your airspeed has reduced to approx. 100 kts. This step is very important since the F-16’s brakes are not
VIPER
F-16C
very effective.
21. Reduce back stick pressure and lower the nosewheel to the runway.
22. Open speedbrakes fully and maintain full aft stick for maximum braking effectiveness.
23. Apply moderate to heavy braking to slow the aircraft.
24. Engage nosewheel steering when below 30 kts and taxi off the runway.
24
522
10 – ILS TUTORIAL
Note: If flying over an Outer or Inner Marker beacon, the Marker Light will illuminate.
VIPER
F-16C
Here is an example with Kobuleti’s Outer Marker.

Inner Marker Beacon
Outer Marker Beacon
You
523
F-16C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING VIPER
10 – ILS TUTORIAL
524
INTRODUCTION
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – WHY WE ALL HATE IT

VIPER
F-16C
Feel free to consult Redkite’s F-16 Air-to-Air Refueling Tutorial

https://youtu.be/kCews8fZv_o
Air-to-air refueling is one of the hardest, most hated, and most
frustrating tasks in DCS. Ever. Of all time.
Why? Well, one of the main reasons for the difficulty behind refueling is
the skill required to do formation flying. Flying in formation with
another aircraft requires much more practice than you would initially
think. Another reason is pure physics: there is this thing called “wake
turbulence”. An aircraft flies through a fluid: air. Just like with any fluid,
if you have something that displaces itself through it at a certain speed,
the fluid will become disrupted (turbulence). Wingtip vortices and
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
jetwash are both effects of this simple concept. Wake turbulence is the
reason why airliners need to wait a minimum time between takeoffs:
flying through disrupted air will destabilize the aircraft and it is unsafe,
especially during critical phases of flight like takeoff and landing.
Unfortunately, wake turbulence is something a pilot has to deal with

during air-to-air refueling. This is why the aircraft will fly just fine when
approaching the tanker, but start wobbling around when flying in close
proximity of the refueling basket/drogue and tanker engines.
525
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – HOW TO
1. Read your mission briefing to know the TACAN station channel of your KC-135 Tanker (14X) and the
UHF AM channel frequency you can communicate with it (251.000).
VIPER
F-16C
2. Power up your TACAN by setting the MIDS LVT switch to ON

3. Adjust TACAN volume as desired
4. Press T-ILS Button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to access TACAN-ILS DED (Data Entry Display)
menu.
5. Press Dobber Switch DOWN to highlight the CHAN field. Use the ICP keypad to type in the new
channel. Press ENTR to accept the changes. 2
6. If required, you may change the band by selecting the M-SEL (0) button on the ICP, then pressing ENTR.
This toggles the band between X and Y.
7. Toggle the Dobber Switch RIGHT (SEQ) to cycle through TACAN modes until TCN A/A TR (Air-to-Air
Transmit-Receive) is selected.
8. Press Dobber Switch LEFT (RTN) to return to CNI (Communication, Navigation & Identification) DED
menu. The range to TACAN (nm) will be displayed on the DED.
9. On the EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator), press “M” (Mode Selector) button to select
“TCN” mode. This will slave the EHSI to the TACAN beacon. 1
Heading to TACAN
Range to TACAN (nm)
7b
4b
5c
5d 6c 5b
4a
6b
6a
8a
7a 8b 526 9
5a Range to TACAN (nm)
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – HOW TO Communications UHF/VHF Transmit Switch (4-Way)
13a
• AFT: transmits on UHF radio
• FWD: transmits on VHF radio
10. Verify that C&I Selector (Communication, Navigation aids, and
Identification) is set to UFC (Up Front Control)
VIPER
F-16C
11. Press COM1 button on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) to select UHF
Radio
12. On the ICP, enter frequency the tanker’s UHF frequency as “25100” (251.00
MHz), then press “ENTR” button.
13. Press Communications Transmit Switch AFT and contact tanker (F6).
14. Select “Intent to refuel” in the tanker menu. The tanker will give you an
altitude (usually 20,000 ft or 10,000 ft) to rendezvous at and a speed to
match (i.e. 300 kts).
13b
12b
11 13c
10
14a
12c
14b
12a
14c
527
15. Before attempting a refueling, we need to reduce our workload as much as
possible. One such measure is to display the BINGO FUEL DED page data on
VIPER
F-16C
the Heads-Up Display, which means you don’t need to glance at that
awkwardly positioned Fuel Quantity Indicator. 16
16. Set DED (Data Entry Display) Data Switch FWD, which will allow data from
the DED to be visible on the HUD.
17. Press the LIST button, then press “2” on the ICP (Integrated Control Panel) Fuel Quantity Indicator
to select BNGO (Bingo Fuel) DED Page.
17a
17b
528
18. Open AIR REFUEL trap door.
• Note 1: If refueling with external tanks, this must be done 5 to 6 minutes
VIPER
F-16C
prior to refueling to allow the external tanks to depressurize (required if

you want to fill them up with fuel as well).
• Note 2: When door is open, the Flight Control System (FLCS) will change its
control gain to make precise movements easier.
19. Confirm that RDY light illuminates, which indicates that door has opened properly.
20. Set Master Arm switch to OFF.
21. Set RF (Radio Frequency) Switch to SILENT. All electronic signals for the aircraft will
be disabled, including the radar, radar altimeter, data link, TACAN transmit, and
ECM (Electronic Countermeasures).
Door Closed
21
20
19
Door Open
18
529
22. Once you are close enough, position yourself 20 ft below the refueling boom and
call the tanker to begin pre-contact. If you are lined up properly, he will grant
VIPER
F-16C
you permission to approach.

23. Make sure you are perfectly trimmed before beginning your approach.
24. Fly formation with the tanker, not the boom.
25. Perform gentle, small stick inputs to move towards the boom. Do not use rudder
pedals. Use short bursts of throttle to advance towards the tanker.
26. Allow the boom to pass just left or right of your canopy, about 2-3 feet above
your head. This serves as a good first check that you are at the proper height
relative to the tanker.
Avoid flying near wingtip vortices
Refueling Boom
530
27. Continue to move slowly forward, maintaining alignment with the yellow stripe painted on the bottom of the tanker. Use the Pilot Director lights on the bottom of the tanker to maintain a
position within the limits of the boom.
VIPER
F-16C
Yellow Stripe
PDI (Pilot Director) Lights
Forward-Aft (F-A)
Down-Up (D-U) Pilot Director Light
Pilot Director Light
531
28. The PDI (Pilot Director) lights are directive, meaning they tell you the direction to travel and not your current position.
In other words, preface the D, U, F and A with the word Go.
VIPER
F-16C
• If the light moves toward the D, go down and if it moves toward the U, go up.
• If the light moves toward the A, go aft and if it moves toward the F, go forward.
• A steady light means a substantial correction is required
• A flashing light means a small correction is required Forward-Aft (F-A)
Down-Up (D-U)
532
29. Fly formation on the tanker and allow the boom operator to direct the boom
into the refueling receptacle behind the cockpit on your aircraft.
VIPER
F-16C
533
30. The boomer will announce “contact” and ”you are taking fuel” when the connection is established.
31. The AR/NWS light will illuminate. Monitor your fuel transfer on the HUD (Heads-Up Display) and BNGO DED (Data Entry Display) page.
VIPER
F-16C
32. Keep the aircraft aligned with the tanker using reference points such as its engines and its centerline. This will help you evaluate if your aircraft drifts or not. Correct one axis at a time only.
Reference: Redkite’s F-16 Air-to-Air Refueling Tutorial 534

33. Refueling procedure will be completed when the “DISC” (Disconnect) warning light illuminates.
34. If you wish to disconnect before that, press your “Nosewheel Steering A/R Disc” button on your HOTAS joystick (or “S” key binding)
VIPER
F-16C
to unlatch the boom from your fuel trap door.

35. Close AIR REFUEL trap door and resume flight.
• Note: failing to shut the trap door may result in your aircraft not being able to use fuel from your external tanks.
35

• A/R: When in flight and the AIR REFUEL switch
in the OPEN position, depressing the button
Reference: Redkite’s F-16 Air-to-Air Refueling Tutorial 535

F-16C
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING VIPER
536
USEFUL RESOURCES
T.O. GR1F-16CJ-1
VIPER
F-16C
Flight Manual – HAF Series Aircraft – Blocks 50 and 52+

https://info.publicintelligence.net/HAF-F16.pdf
Eagle Dynamics (Official Developer) Work-In-Progress Early Access Guide

https://www.digitalcombatsimulator.com/en/downloads/documentation/viper_early_access_guide_en/
TO-BMS1F-16CM-1
Falcon 4.0 BMS Flight Manual - F-16C/D BMS 4.34
TO-BMS1F-16CM-34-1-1
Falcon 4.0 BMS Avionics and Non-Nuclear Weapons Delivery Flight Manual - F-16C/D BMS 4.34
PART 18 – OTHER RESOURCES
Matt Wagner (Eagle Dynamics Producer) DCS F-16C Viper Video Tutorials
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uJrMSNM7X08&list=PLer9oF4AanvFoD2t2Aq3aYRYkJs6v9wG8
Redkite’s Youtube Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kCews8fZv_o&list=PLml_c09ciucucGNhd843UNNJMeXwhS8t6
F-16.net Website
http://www.f-16.net/
Hoggit Wiki
https://wiki.hoggitworld.com/view/F-16C
537
THANK YOU TO ALL MY PATRONS
Creating these guides is no easy task, and I would like to take the time to properly thank every single one of my Patreon supporters. The following people have donated a very generous
amount to help me keep supporting existing guides and work on new projects as well:
• David Titus
• Goodknight
• John Mouat
• ChazFlyz
• M. D.
• Brandon Glenn
• Patrick
• Teitur Samuelsen
• Jack Nieh
• Jeannette Benoit
• Tim Perry
• Athena International
538
539

DCS F-16C Viper Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCS F-16C Viper Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCS F-16C Viper Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the F-16?

What is the purpose of the F-16?

What is the Lightweight Fighter program?

What is the Lightweight Fighter program?

DCS GUIDE

F-16CM VIPER BLOCK 50

superiority day fighter, it evolved into a successful all-

Experiences in the Vietnam War revealed the need

20,000 lbs; half that of its counterpart, the McDonnell

In 1972, the Air Staff selected General Dynamics'

To assign axis, click on Axis Assign. You can also

To modify curves and sensitivities of axes, click

• ROLL (DEADZONE AT 1, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 5)

• RUDDER (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)

Countermeasures Management Sw - FWD

Countermeasures Management Sw – RIGHT

Zoom In Slow: L_Shift+TMS UP

+ TOE BRAKES (MAPPED ON PEDALS) 10

Transmit Switch - UHF

SPD BRK Switch – FWD/Retract

MAN RNG Knob – CCW (Zoom Out)

ANT ELEV Knob (Radar Antenna Elevation)

Magnetic Transmitter Unit

FLCS PWR (Flight Control System Power) Test

the FLCS relay and allows verification of power

Anti-G Test Button

EPU (Emergency Power Unit) Generator Test Switch

Leading Edge Flaps Switch Digital Backup (DBU) Switch

Right Wing Down: RIght Radar (TFR) capability.

Manual Yaw Trim Knob

Flight Control System BIT (Built-In Test)

Flight Control System BIT (Built-In Test) Switch

Manual Pitch Trim Wheel Trim/AP Disc Switch

C&I (CNI, Communication, Navigation aids, and Identification) Switch

IFF Mode 4 Code Switch

IFF Mode 4 Reply Switch

Anti-Collision Lights Switch

Position Lights Switch

Wing/Tail Position Lights Switch

Master Lights Switch Aerial Refueling Light Brightness Control Knob

Manual Canopy Crank

• MID: BATT (aircraft battery is connected and

STBY GEN Indicator

ECM Panel Dim

ECM (Electronic Countermeasures)

ECM XMIT (Transmit) Switch Seat Harness Lock Lever

ECM Reset Button

AVTR (Airborne Video Tape Recorder) Video

Pressed by using “RSHIFT+HOME” (throttle goes to IDLE) or

MAN RNG/UNCAGE Knob/Switch

Radar Cursor/Enable Switch Speed Brake Switch

BUC IDLE Detent (only functional on the F-16A) AB (Afterburner) Detent

Between IDLE and MIL

The geometry of the throttle quadrant means that depending on

Audio 1 Control Panel

Secure Voice Knob

COMM 1 (UHF) Radio Mode Knob TF Tone Control Knob (Inoperative)

THREAT (TWS, Threat Warning

COMM 2 (VHF) Radio Mode Knob

UHF Radio Test